Home

User manual EN500 EN600 V2.0-A2

1. Function Name STREE Min Factory Modifi Code Unit Default cation F11 00 Closed loop running control 0 PID close loop run control invalid 1 0 x selection 1 PID close loop run control valid F11 01 Provision channel selection 0 Digital provision 1 0 o 1 AI1 analog provision 2 AI2 analog provision 3 EAI1 analog provision 4 EAI2 analog provision 5 Pulse provision 6 Communication provision 7 Reserved F11 02 Feedback channel 0 AII analog input 1 0 o selection 1 AI2 analog input 2 EAII analog input Extend effective 3 EAI2 analog input Extend effective 4 AI1 AI2 5 AIL AI2 6 Min AI1 AI2 7 Max ATL AI2 8 Pulse input F11 03 Provision channel 0 01 50 00s 0 01s 0 20s x filtering time F11 04 Feedback channel 0 01 50 00s 0 01s 0 10s x filtering time F11 05 PID output filtering 0 00 50 00s 0 01s 0 00s o time F11 06 Provision digital setting 0 00 10 00V 0 01V 1 00V o F11 07 Proportion gain Kp 0 000 9 999 0 001 0 100 o F11 08 Integral gain Ki 0 000 9 999 0 001 0 100 o F11 09 Differential gain Kd 0 000 9 999 0 001 0 000 o F11 10 Sample cycle T 0 01 1 00s 0 01s 0 10s o F11 11 Deviation limit 0 0 20 0 correspond to provide value 0 1 2 0 o percentage 1 12 PID differential amplitude 0 00 100 00 0 01 0 10 o limit F11 13 Closed loop regulation O action 0 o characteristic l reaction F11 14 Feedback channel O positive characteristic 0 o Positive Negative l negative
2. 40 2 pump power frequency 41 communication provision 42 torque control speed limiting 43 60 Reserved FO9 01 Open collector output Same as above 0 x terminal Y2 output setup FO9 02 Open collector output Same as above 0 x terminal Y3 output setup FO9 03 Open collector output Same as above 0 x terminal Y4 output setup FO9 04 Programmable relay Same as above 22 x output setting i Detection amplitude of 0 00 50 00Hz 0 01Hz 5 00Hz o F09 05 i Frequency arrival FAR a FDT 1 frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 10 00Hz o F09 06 level level F09 07 FDTI1 lag 0 00 50 00Hz 0 01Hz 1 00Hz o FO9 08 FDT2 freguency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 10 00Hz o level level F09 09 FDT2 lag 0 00 50 00Hz 0 01Hz 1 00Hz o F09 10 Zero frequency signal 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz o detection value F09 11 Zero frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz o acklash F09 12 Zero current detection 0 0 50 0 0 1 0 0 o amplitude F09 13 Zero current detection 0 00 60 00s 0 01s 0 1s o time F09 14 Over current detection 0 0 250 0 0 1 160 0 o value F09 15 Over current detection 0 00 60 00s 0 01s 0 00s o time F09 16 Current 1 arrival 0 0 250 0 0 1 100 0 o detection value FO9 17 Current 1 width 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 FO9 18 Current 2 arriving the 0 0 250 0 0 1 100 0 detection value FO9 19 Current 2 width 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 FO9 20 Fre
3. F01 18 Deceleration time 1 Range 1 60000 Depend on type Acceleration time is interval accelerate from zero frequency to high limit frequency deceleration time is the interval decelerate from high limit frequency to zero frequency The unit defined by FO1 19 Example F01 17 100 F01 19 1 acceleration time 1 is 10 0 seconds 1 EN500 EN600 series drive defines 15 acceleration and deceleration time only acceleration and deceleration time 1 defined here acceleration and deceleration 2 15 defined in Note Parameter F04 16 F04 43 2 acceleration and deceleration 1 15 select time unit through parameter F1 19 factory default unit is 0 1 second F01 19 Accelerate decelerate time unit Range 0 2 1 This function can define acceleration and deceleration time unit 0 0 01s 1 0 1s 2 1s 1 The function is valid to all acceleration and deceleration excerpt 3 for inching run Note 2 Advise to select 0 1s as the time unit F01 20 Accelerate decelerate mode selection Range 0 1 0 0 Line acc dece mode Output frequency raises or decline as the constant slope as fig 7 1 105 7 Detailed function specification 1 S curve acc dece mode Output frequency raise or decline as the S curve as fig 7 2 Freq 50 OQHZ kiirii SO OOHz eg 8 time i time EE i ti te t2 Fig 7 1 Line acc dece Fig 7 2 S curve acc dece
4. F12 10 Automatic switching time 0000 9999 minute 1 0 x interval F12 11 Revival mode selection 0 Awake by the value of F12 03 1 1 o 1 Awake by the value of F12 12 F12 01 F12 12 Revival pressure 0 01 0 99 0 01 0 75 o coefficient F12 13 Reserved F12 14 Reserved F13 Traverse Fixed Length Control Function Parameter Group Function Min Factory Modifi Code Dame Seu oes Unit Default cation F13 00 Traverse function O traverse invalid 1 0 x selection traverse valid F13 01 Traverse operating Units digit enter mode 1 0000 x mode O automatically enter terminal enter manually Tens digit O variable swing fixed swing Hundreds digit traverse halt start mode selection O restart start as previous halt record Thousands digit traverse status reserve selection O no reserve reserve F13 02 Traverse frequency 0 0 50 0 0 1 10 0 o swing value F13 03 Sudden Jump 0 0 50 0 0 1 2 0 o frequency F13 04 Traverse cycle 0 1 999 9s 0 1s 10 0s F13 05 Triangular wave rising 0 0 98 0 traverse cycle 0 1 50 0 time preset frequency of 0 00 400 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00Hz o F13 06 Traverse F13 07 Traverse preset 0 0 6000 0s 0 1s 0 0s o frequency waiting time F13 08 Setting length 0 65535m 1m Om o F13 09 Number of pulses for 17 10000 1 1 o axis per circle F13 10 Axis perimeter 0 01 100 00cm 0 01cm 10 00cm o F13 11 Reserved F13 12 Length correction 0 001 1 000 0 001 1 000 o coefficient F1
5. Units digit power down reserve setup 0 Auxiliary frequency power down reserve When auxiliary frequency channel provide is valid and power down at run mode the current auxiliary setting frequency reserve in parameter F01 04 1 Auxiliary frequency power down no reserve tens digit halt reserve setup 0 Halt auxiliary frequency hold When auxiliary frequency channel provide is valid recording current run frequency only after halt 1 Halt auxiliary frequency recovery parameter F01 04 auxiliary setting frequency in software recording is recovered the value of parameter FO1 04 after halt N Only when F01 03 0 3 4 is valid Note Main and auxiliary provide Range 0 7 0 calculating setup This parameter is to select frequency provide channel and through the complex of main frequency source and auxiliary frequency source to achieve frequency F01 06 provide 0 Main frequency Complex frequency of current is main frequency 1 Auxiliary frequency Complex frequency of current is auxiliary frequency 2 Plus polarity oppose of complex and main frequency complex frequency is zero 3 Minus polarity oppose of complex and auxiliary frequency complex frequency is zero 4 Multiplication polarity opposed of main and auxiliary frequency 102 7 Detailed function specification complex frequency is zero 5 Max the max frequency of main and auxiliary absolute value 6 Min the min frequency of
6. BITO Y 1 positive and negative logic definition BIT1 Y2 positive and negative logic definition BIT2 Y3 positive and negative logic definition BIT3 Y4 positive and negative logic definition BITO fault relay 1 positive and negative logic definition BIT1 expand OC1 positive and negative logic definition BIT2 expand OC2 positive and negative logic definition BIT3 expand OC3 positive and negative logic definition BITO expand OC4 positive and negative logic definition BIT1 expand fault relay positive and negative logic definition BIT2 expand fault relay2 positive and negative logic definition BIT3 reserved BITO BIT3 reserved 157 7 Detailed function specification F09 25 Y1 output closed delay time Range 0 000 50 000s 0 000s Y1 output disconnected Dle sy delay time Range 0 000 50 000s 0 000s F09 27 Y2 output closed delay time Range 0 000 50 000s 0 000s Y2 output disconnected Us delay time Range 0 000 50 000s 0 000s F09 29 Y3 output closed delay time Range 0 000 50 000s 0 000s Y3 output disconnected Merely delay time Range 0 000 50 000s 0 000s F09 31 Y4 output closed delay time Range 0 000 50 000s 0 000s Y4 output disconnected F09 32 Range 0 000 50 000s 0 000s delay time F09 33 EE output closed delay Range 0 000 50 000s 0 000s F09 34 Relay output disconnected Range 0 000 50 000s 0 000s delay time
7. F01 15 Run command channel selection Range 0 2 0 0 Operation keyboard run control Start and stop with 1 Terminal run command control Terminal X1 is forward FWD X2 is reverse REV during the function code X1 X8 setup Other terminal can also be regarded as for rev input terminal 2 Communication runs command control Start and stop with communication mode 1 Drive can change run command channel through switch of multi function key terminal command channel in halt and run carefully modify command channel after confirm in site the permission to run command channel modification After the command channel modification keyboard button setup valid or not by parameter F00 15 2 After run command channel modification frequency channel can be defined by parameter F18 00 F18 01 F18 02 or defined by parameter F01 00 F01 03 F01 06 and multi function terminal 104 7 Detailed function specification Range units digit 0 1 tens digit 0 2 Units digit Keyboard command for rev setup only valid to keyboard inching command 0 Forward 1 Reverse Tens digit for rev forbid suitable for all command channel not include inching function 0 For rev available 1 Reverse not available imposing on reverse stop as the halt mode 2 Forward not available imposing on forward stop as the halt mode F01 17 Acceleration time 1 Range 1 60000 Depend on type F01 16 Run direction setup 00
8. F09 10 Zero frequency signal Range 0 00Hz upper limit 0 00Hz detection value frequency F09 11 Zero frequency backlash Rance oe Hz upper limit 0 00Hz frequency Operating freq p A F09 11 F09 10 i Time Zero ges operating output H Eg Time Fig 7 25 Zero frequency signal detection 154 7 Detailed function specification Parameter FO9 10 FO9 11 defines the zero frequency output control function When the output frequency is within the zero frequency signal detection range if Yi output function selects 11 then the output of Yi is indication signal Zero current detection AW tS a F09 12 EET Range 0 0 50 0 0 0 F09 13 Zero current detection time Range 0 00 60 00s 0 1s A Output current Zero current detection amplitude d F09 12 i i Time Zero current detection signal FS ae ae Time Zero current detection time F09 13 Fig 7 26 Zero current detection diagram When the output current of the inverter is less than or equal to zero current detection level and lasts longer than the zero current detection time then the output of frequency inverter multifunction Yi is indication signal Figure 7 26 is the schematic of zero current detection F09 14 Over current detection value Range 0 0 250 0 160 0 F09 15 Over current detection time Range 0 00 60 00s 0 00s Output current Output over current detec
9. F08 01 parameter sets filter time of input terminal check When input terminal state is changed the terminal state change is valid only when the set filter time is unchanged Otherwise it will remain the last state thus effectively reduce malfunction caused by interruption The group C monitor state is for the state of the disposed parameter When demand terminal as the high speed function low down the value of this parameter is needed in case losing the signal F08 02 X1 Input terminal closed time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 03 X1 Input terminal opened time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 04 X2 Input terminal closed time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 05 X2 Input terminal opened time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 06 X3 Input terminal closed time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 07 X3 Input terminal opened time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 08 X4 Input terminal closed time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 09 X4 Input terminal opened time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 10 X5 Input terminal closed time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 11 X5 Input terminal opened time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 12 X6 Input terminal closed time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 13 X6 Input terminal opened time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 14 X7 Input terminal closed time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 15 X7 Input terminal opened time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s F08 16 X8 Input termina
10. Units digit panel s button selection 0 Reversal command action button 1 Jog action button Tens digit multi function 0 Invalid 1 Jog run Multi function button as jog run button run direction decided by button function selection unit bit of FO1 16 After setting function the jog run function on the key then used pad is invalid 2 For rev switching Press this button to change the run direction when run press the same button change to another direction This function key is not as start key only for signal switch 3 Free stop Setup free stop function and stop mode FO2 11 the same function with 1 Jog run 4 Switching to run command provide mode as the setup order of F00 16 94 7 Detailed function specification 5 For rev torque switching After this function is valid it can realize the direction switching after torque model 6 9 Reserved Hundredth terminal run command control 0 keypad 5 is invalid 1 keypad 455 is valid Thousandth communication run command control 0 keypad 7 is invalid 1 keypad 5 is valid Multi function key run command channel switching order selection 0 Keyboard control terminal control communication control 1 Keyboard control terminal control 2 Keyboard control lt gt communication control 3 Terminal control lt communication control These parameters cooperate with multi function key to run
11. Fig 7 39 Offset limit B Offset limit is the percentage refer to the value of reference Note F11 12 PID differential amplitude limit Range 0 00 100 00 0 10 In the PID regulator the effect of differential is too sensitive too easy to cause system oscillation therefore limit the effect of differential PID in a smaller range F11 12 the parameter that used to set the output range of PID differential F11 13 Closed loop regulation characteristic Range 0 1 0 0 Positive effect When the provision increases select while requiring speed of motor increase 1 Negative effect When the provision increases select while requiring 171 7 Detailed function specification speed of motor decrease Value after converted LOVE eg Speed Positive Effect Positive Effect egative Effect Negative Effect Feedback 0 10V 0 TOT Fig 7 40 Closed loop characteristic Fig 7 41 Feedback characteristic F11 14 Feedback channel positive negative Range 0 1 0 characteristic 0 Positive characteristic The relationship between reference and feedback is positive 1 Negative characteristic The relationship between reference and feedback is negative This parameter is used to change the feedback characteristic of the feedback signal After input into inverter through the feedback channel the feedback pressure will compare with the reference after regulat
12. A vr MITI U 1 EE 4 JL MI Fig e Fig 2 5 outer dimension Table 2 1 EN600 mounting size Inverter type A B W H D DI Fix Hole Fig No M yP mm mm mm mm mm mm mm ABO EN600 2S0004 EN600 2S0007 3 104 186 115 200 151 5 Fig a EN600 2S0015 EN600 2S0022 EN600 2S0037 129 227 140 240 175 5 Fig a EN600 4T0007G 0015P EN600 4T0015G 0022P 104 186 115 200 151 3 Fig a EN600 4T0022G 0037P EN600 4T0037G EN600 4T0055P EN600 4T0055G 0075P 29 227 140 240 175 5 Fig a EN600 4T0075G 0110P EN600 4T0110G 0150P 65 281 180 304 189 6 Fig a EN600 4T0150G 0185P EN600 4T0185G 0220P 80 382 250 398 210 214 9 Fig b EN600 4T0220G 0300P EN600 4T0300G 0370P 80 434 280 450 240 244 9 Fig b EN600 4T0370G 0450P 2 Inverter type and specification EN600 4T0450G 0550P 90 504 5 290 530 250 254 9 Fig b EN600 4T0550G 0750P Table 2 2 EN500 mounting size EE H HI w wi w2 D DI NI N2 Mi M2 Fig y YP mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm No EN500 4T0750G 0900P 570 546 340 237 320 12 O18 EN500 4T0900G 1100P EN500 4T1100G 1320P 650 628
13. Unit digit Start mode 1st 0 Auto start The drive operates at the preset frequency of traverse for a certain time thereafter enter traverse mode automatically 1 Terminal manual mode Choosing multi function terminal Xi X1 X8 as 56 function when the terminal is enabled the drive will enter traverse mode The drive will exit traverse operation and operate at the pre set traverse frequency when it s disabled Tens digit Traverse amplitude AW mode choosing 0 Variable swing Amplitude AW changes with the central frequency and the change rate relate to the definition of F13 02 1 Fixed swing Traverse operating amplitude AW is determined by Upper limit Frequency and F13 02 Note The traverse central frequency is set by the main frequency Hundreds digit Restart mode 0 Restart at the initial state 1 Restart at the memorized state before stopping Thousands digit Traverse state saving when power off This function is effective when the start mode is Restarting from the reserved memory state and saving operating state when power off 0 Not save 1 Save When in variable amplitude mode the channel of central BE frequency is confirmed by F01 06 During the traverse frequency or operation the Acc and Dec time are controlled only by traverse ote frequency circle F13 04 when adjusting the central frequency 178 7 Detailed function specification F13 02 Traverse frequency swing value Ran
14. Fig C 1 EN LED2 Operating Keyboard Layout 251 Appendix C Keyboard C 2 2 Description for keyboard functions LED digital tubes and indicator lights Double display keyboard consists of two 5 digit digital tube screens 9 buttons and 10 indicator lights If need more details about function definition of the 9 buttons LED digital tubes and specification of the indicator lights then please refer to Keyboard Function Specifications in Chapter 5 B LED2 digital tube supervision is set by parameter F00 25 Note C 3 LCD keyboard C 3 1 LCD keyboard series 1 Local LCD keyboard type EN LCDI 2 Remote control LCD keyboard type EN LCD2 C 3 2 Keyboard Layout Failure alarm indicator light f D Forward run indicator light Mode indicator light E E Reverse run indicator light LCD screen l Increase key Exit Program key wy N GE Confirm Data key Multiple function key Vv gt Shift Supervision key Ba Ae Decrease key Reverse Jog key P RUN es Stop Reset key vw Forward run key Fig C 2 Keyboard Layout Sketch EN LCD1 EN LCD2 C 3 3 Keyboard Function LCD Display and Spec of Indicator Lights LCD keyboard consists of a LCD screen 9 buttons and 4 indicator lights LCD screen To display Function Setting Running Supervision Failure Supervision Code and Parameter For more details about function definition of the 9 buttons and specification of the indicator lights please refer to Keyboard Func
15. auxiliary index byte see table B 3 Table B 3 Free port1 failure type description Hare Description Fells Description code decimal p code decimal P 1 Overcurrent during 19 Current detecting circuit accelerating process failure Overcurrent during External interference 2 20 decelerating process failure 3 Overcurrent during 21 Internal interference constant speed process failure 4 Oyen oleae during 22 PID provision loss accelerating process 5 Overvoltage during 23 PID feedback loss decelerating process 6 Overvoltage during 24 PID error amount constant speed process exception 243 Appendix B Free port communication protocol 7 Overvoltage while halting 25 Startup terminal protection 8 Under voltage during 26 RS485 communication running process failure 9 Inverter overload 27 Reserved protection 0 Motor overload protection 28 Reserved H Motor underload 29 Reserved protection 7 7 2 Input phase missing 30 EPROM read and write wrongly Joy Temperature detection 3 Output phase missing 31 breakage 4 Inverting module 32 Self tuning failure protection 5 eben aroun tasarik 33 Contactor exception during running process 6 abort crout 10 arth 34 Interior failure 1 during electrifying process 7 Inverter over heating 8 External device failure Free port 2 failure type description Failure Description Failure
16. 0 01Hz provision freq Auxiliary device 2 00 03 no 010C00030197 r no forward run Auxiliary device reverse 2 00 04 no 010C00040198 r no run Run gt tol Auxiliary device OHz cont r forward run with run 2 1001 05 highlimit 010C00050FA00280 r 0 01Hz an adjusting frequency provision freq vee Auxiliary device reverse OHz function i ic ee run with run frequency 2 00 06 high limit 010CO0060FA00281 r 0 01Hz provision freq Auxiliary device stop 00 07 no 010C0007019B r no Auxiliary device jog run 00 08 no 010C0008019C r no Auxilia F KEER ee 2 100 09 no 010C0009019D r no forward jog run Auxilia 5 F ae AE IE SIE 010C000A01A5 r no jog run Auxilia ice sti Ka AE OR 2 o oB no 010C000B01A6 r no run Auxiliary device failure 5 2 00 0C no 010C000C01A7 r no restoration na S Query auxiliary device z 5 00 00 no 010F00000197 r 1 S 3 Jopio Kaonb uotsioa software version 248 Appendix B Free port communication protocol Table B 5 read auxiliary device function code parameter Finci Read auxiliary device function code parameter all function code parameter except user unction Ji password and manufacturer password definition except user password and manufacturer password k Frame Order Checkout Frame Meanings Address Order R Run data head index sum end
17. 1 J3 Plug pin definition a Re TX Appendix D Communication extension card SA Definition RIN Definition data data 1 bit bare 6 VCC 2 bit bare 7 bit bare 3 Communication signal A 8 communication signal B 4 bit bare 9 bit bare 5 GND 2 J2 Plug pin definition 2 4 1 8 PIN Definition RN Definition data data 1 Communication signal A 3 GND 2 Communication signal B 4 VCC 3 J2 switch wiring Right plug Ed i DEN X Left plug ANY 3 Tin 4 VG fa Table D 2 The left end plug and The right end plug PIN data The left end plug The right end plug The left end plug The right end plug PIN data PIN data PIN data PIN data 7 1 4 6 z 2 5 7 i 3 2 8 4 9 3 5 261 Appendix D Communication extension card D 3 CANopen communication card D 3 1 CANopen introduction CANopen is an architecture in the control area network Controller Area Network CAN on the high level communication agreements including communication equipment sub sub agreements and agreements often used in embedded systems industrial control is a commonly used fieldbus CANopen implements the network layer and above the agreement OSI model CANopen standard includes addressing scheme several small communication sub agreements D 3 2 Equipment model Communication agreement on other modules communication processing and network communication unit ne
18. negative logic Bitl The connection of VDI2 and VDO2 0 positive logic 1 negative logic Bit2 The connection of VDI3 and VDO3 0 positive logic 1 negative logic Bit3 The connection of VDI4 and VDO4 0 positive logic 1 negative logic Bit4 The connection of VDI5 and VDO5 207 7 Detailed function specification 0 positive logic 1 negative logic Parameter F20 22 definite logical relation if the virtual output terminal Bit0 Bit4 is according to logical relation setting of VDI1 VDI5 and VDO1 VDOS 0 stands for positive logic 1 stands for negative logic IES Parameter F20 21 definition VDI state the Digital setting will not Note influence by F20 22 208 7 22 Reserved parameter group 2 F21 7 Detailed function specification F21 00 an Reserved F21 21 7 23 Reserved parameter group 3 F22 F22 00 Be Reserved F22 17 7 24 Reserved parameter group 4 F23 F23 00 Reserved F23 17 7 25 Reserved parameter group 5 F24 F24 00 Ps Reserved F24 13 209 7 Detailed function specification 7 26 User Definition Display Parameter Group F25 F25 00 User function code 1 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 01 User function code 2 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 02 User function code 3 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 0
19. 00 2D no 010B002D01A9 r no provision channel Inverter rated current 00 2E no 010B002E01AA r 0 1A Inverter rated voltage 00 2F no 010B002F01AB r 1V Inverter rated power 00 30 no 010B00300196 r 0 1KW 246 Appendix B Free port communication protocol Reserved Reserved Frequency after acceleration and 11 00 33 no 010B00330199 r 0 01Hz deceleration Motor rotor frequency 1 00 34 no 010B0034019A r 0 01Hz Current provision torque 1 00 35 no 010B0035019B r 0 1 Current output torque 1 00 36 no 010B0036019C r 0 1 Current torque current 1 00 37 no 010B0037019D r 0 1A Current flux current 1 00 38 no 010B0038019E r 0 1A Auxiliary device run 2 00 00 no 010C00000194 r no command Set current run frequency OHz high 010C00010FA002 Set freq provision of auxiliary 2 00 01 1 2 is 0 01Hz 40 00Hz i limit freq 7C r device Auxiliary Auxiliary device run with OHz high 010C00020FA002 device run n 2 00 02 be 0 01Hz run frequency provision limit freq 7D r Set freq 40 00Hz Auxiliary device forward 2 00 03 no 010C00030197 r no run 4 Auxiliary device reverse 3 2 00 04 no 010C00040198 r no 8 run El el r a Forward run mi Auxiliary device forward lr 5 i OHz high 010C00050FA002 boot strap a run with run frequency 2 00 05 oy ar ia 0 01Hz 8 Age limit freg 80 r Set freq prov
20. 3 1 When the inverter stops freely restart the inverter after a few seconds If over current fault occurs when starting please extend the F02 08 time 3 2 Do not modify the set frequency when the inverter starts in slow down process 4 When torque model is valid we suggest use the start mode 2 F02 01 Starting delay time Range 0 0 60 0s 0 0s Starting delay time refers to the waiting time before the inverter is started after receiving running command F02 02 Starting frequency Range 0 0 10 00Hz 0 00Hz F02 03 pees ESI dure RE ODDO 0 0s Starting frequency refers to the initial frequency when the inverter is started as shown in Fig 7 3 fs starting frequency holding time refers to consecutive running time during which the inverter runs at the starting frequency as shown in Fig 7 3 ti 108 7 Detailed function specification finax f Start time Freq i I Starting ti time Fig 7 3 Starting frequency and starting time B Starting frequency is not limited by lower limit frequency Note Range 0 0 100 0 F02 04 DS braking euerentiy ten G type inverter rated 30 0 starting current F02 05 De BEE fire ven Range 0 0 30 0s 0 0s starting When F02 00 1 F02 04 F02 05 valid and stop mode is deceleration stop as shown in Fig 7 4 The setting of starting DC braking current is with respect to the percentage of inverter rated output curre
21. 5 2 2 Keypad function description tee ee EER ee Ee EER Ee ER EER ee ee 42 5 2 3 LED and indicator light testes sesse ees se see EER Ke Ee EER se see ees 43 5 2 4 Key board display status tees ee see EER RE ER EER Re ner ER see ee 43 5 2 5 User Management Parameters ttet tse ees see eke ees ee eke ees ee eke ees 46 5 2 6 Method for operating keypad sesse Ee eek Ee eke EER ee ER ees ee 46 5 3 Inverter electrification sets e ees sesse ese D EE Rae DE ee Ge SEE See Deed 49 5 3 1 Check before electrification reeds ses ses see ee Ee EER See es 49 5 3 2 First electrification eese Gees eN See Gee gee Se KEN ee ee 49 6 Function parameter schedule graph tt see ee EER EE PRE EER EE ER EER EE ER ee see 50 6 1 Symbol description tee see ese EE ER EER RE ER EER EE ER EER EE ER EER se ees ee 50 6 2 Function parameter schedule graph Pree rr ere rere reer re ere reer re reer eee 50 7 Detailed function specification EET Te ee 90 7 1 System Parameter Group FOO tese tees ee eke eek EE ER EER EE ER EER Ke ees ee 90 7 2 Basic Run Function Parameter Group FOLs srertrer reeset eerste etree ees 99 7 3 Start stop forward reverse brake function parameter group FOR urnen erne ee ee ee ee 108 7 4 V F control parameter group FO3 tees sees ee ese ees ees ee ee ee ee see ee 114 7 5 Auxiliary running parameter group F04 tees ee see see ees ees ees ee ees ee 117 7 6 Communication control parameter group FOS reses ee ses see ee ee 123
22. CN2 The user interface The encoder uses 1 CN2 Terminal definitions Terminal Hys PIN data labeling Description 1 PE Shielding terminal 2 PE Shielding terminal Power supply GND of EN PGO1 and GND of control panel 3 GND is connect GND of EN PGO2 and GND of control panel isolation 4 VCC Provide 5V 300mA current toward outside 5 A Encoder output signal A negative 6 A Encoder output signal A positive 7 B Encoder output signal B negative 8 B Encoder output signal B positive 9 Z Encoder output signal Z negative 10 ZF Encoder output signal Z positive 2 PG card specification The user interface Terminal table Spacing 3 81mm The maximum rate 500kHz Differentiator input signal amplitude lt 7V 267 Appendix F Braking unit and braking resistance Appendix F Braking unit and braking resistance F 1 Braking unit and braking resistance The motor s electric potential energy will charge inverter s capacitance up reversely if speed of the motor descends too quickly or load of the motor wobbles too quickly while the inverter is running which will increase the voltage upon power modules suddenly and is easy to make the inverter damaged The inverter will control it according to load size and performance You only need to connect external braking resistance to realize timely energy discharge when the braking function is needed To connect external resistance is a kind of energy consumption brakin
23. CX3 terminal status CX7 terminal status CX4 terminal status CX6 terminal status CX5 terminal status 4 Drive status BITO 1 busbar voltage setup BIT1 1 common run command valid BIT2 1 jog run command valid BIT3 1 drive run period BIT4 1 current run direction to reverse BITS5 1 run command direction to reverse BIT6 1 deceleration brake period BIT7 1 motor acceleration period BIT8 1 motor deceleration period BIT9 1 drive alarm BIT10 1 drive fault BIT11 1 current limited period BIT12 1 fault self recovery period BIT13 1 self adjusting period BIT14 1 free halt status BIT15 1 speed tracking start 89 7 Detailed function specification 7 Detailed function specification The parameter function code of this chapter listed content as below Code er Factory ou Description Setup Range Explanation Default 7 1 System Parameter Group F00 F00 00 Parameter group display control Range 0 3 0 0 Basic list mode Display only F00 F01 F02 FO3 basic control parameter group and F26 fault record parameter group 1 Middle list mode Display all parameter except for extension virtual and reserve parameter group 2 Senior list mode All parameter groups can be displayed 3 User list mode Display parameter defined by user and monitor parameter F00 00 display all the time F00 00 display all the time Under intermediate menu mode 3 irrelevant parameter group can be covered accordin
24. Continuous run Match up with protect action 1 0 x frequency selection O run at the frequency setup by now when alarm 1 run at the frequency of upper limit 2 run at the frequency of low limit 3 run at the frequency of abnormal for standby F19 37 Abnormal standby 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 10 00Hz x frequency F19 38 Encoder disconnection 0 0 8 0s No detection when value is 0 0 1s 0 0s o detection time F19 39 Over speed OS 0 0 120 0 equals upper limit frequency 0 1 120 0 o detection time F19 40 Over speed OS 0 00 20 00s No detection when value is 0 0 01s 0 00s o detection time F19 41 Detection value when 0 0 50 0 equals upper limit frequency 0 1 10 0 o speed deviation is too large F19 42 Detection time when 0 00 20 00s No detection when value is 0 0 01s 0 00s o speed deviation is too large F19 43 Overvoltage suppression 0 0 100 0 0 1 90 0 o coefficient F19 44 Reserved F20 Internal Virtual Input Output Node Parameter Group Function Min Factory Modifi code Name AE Unit Defsuit cation F20 00 Virtual input VDI1 function 0 90 1 0 o selection F20 01 Virtual input VDI2 function 0 90 1 0 o selection F20 02 Virtual input VDI3 function 0 90 1 0 o selection 83 6 Function parameter schedule graph F20 03 Virtual input VDI4 function 0 90 1 0 selection F20 04 Virtual input VDI5 function 0 90 1 0
25. E7PROM fault action selection 0 Alarm continue operation 1 Alarm stop according to the stop mode 2 Fault free stop Hundreds digit Contactor fault action selection 0 Alarm continue operation 1 Alarm stop according to the stop mode 2 Fault free stop Thousands digit running lack Voltage fault display action selection 0 no detection 1 Fault free stop F19 33 Reserved F19 34 Reserved F19 35 Fault indication and clock Range units digit 0 1 during the period of recovery tens digit 0 1 00 Units digit During automatic reset of fault display selection 0 Action During automatic reset Yi and Relay of will update display the Signal based on the internal state 1 No action During automatic reset Yi and Relay display Signal No action Tens digit Lock function selection to realize display before power off 0 disabled 1 enabled When this function is enabled if the inverter shows the fault before the last time power down then the inverter will display the fault last time 203 7 Detailed function specification fault state make sure that users will know about the inverter s potential faults F19 36 Continuous run frequency selection when alarm Range 0 3 0 This parameter defines the run frequency when users choose Alarm continues to run for the inverter s failure 0 running at the current setting frequency
26. Mainframe See 7EH ADDR 13 4 BCC ODH order remark Byte guantity 1 2 2 4 0 4 1 Auxiliary s Function device 7EH ADDR 06 Es code BCC ODH remark respond parameter Byte guantity 1 2 2 4 4 4 1 Command index combination of function code group number and hex code of function code number For instance If want to read parameter of F0 05 function code order index 0005 If want to read parameter of F2 11 function code order index 020B If want to read parameter of F2 15 function code order index 020F If want to read parameter of F2 13 function code order index 020D Corresponding relation between decimal and hex value of function code group No Function code Function code f Decimal Hex Decimal Hex group No group No F00 0 00H FOE 14 OEH F01 1 01H FOF 15 OFH F02 2 02H F10 16 OH temark F03 3 03H EL 17 11H F04 4 04H F12 18 2H F05 5 05H F13 19 3H F06 6 06H F14 20 4H F07 7 07H F15 21 5H F08 8 08H F16 22 6H F09 9 09H F17 23 7H FOA 10 OAH F18 24 8H FOB 11 OBH F19 25 9H FOC 12 OCH FIA 26 AH FOD 13 ODH FIB 27 1BH Virtual data 0 FFFF namely 0 65535 Please input correct user password before you set user function code parameter 249 Appendix B Free port communication protocol Table B 6 set auxiliary device function code parameter Function Set auxiliary device function code parameter all function code parameter
27. Parameter F09 25 F09 34 defines the corresponding delay time from connect or disconnect to frequency level of the multifunction output terminals Table 7 30 is the schematic of multi function output terminal operation Yi level Invalid AMV Invalid Yi Valid close delay Disconnect delay Setting rang 0 000 50 000s Fig 7 30 Multifunction output terminal action diagram F09 35 Analog output AO1 selecting Range 0 25 0 F09 36 Analog output AO2 selecting Range 0 25 0 DO function selecting reuse he F09 37 with Y4 Range 0 25 0 O output frequency before slip compensation 0 00Hz upper limit frequency l output frequency after slip compensation 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 2 setup frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 3 master setup frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 4 auxiliary setup frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 7 Detailed function specification 5 current output 1 0 2xrated current of frequency inverter 6 current output 1 0 3xrated current of frequency inverter 7 output voltage 0 1 2xrated voltage of load motor 8 bus voltage 0 1 5xRated bus voltage 9 motor speed 0 3 xrated speed 10 PID given 0 00 10 00V 11 PID feedback 0 00 10 00V 12 AI1 0 00 10 00V or 4 20mA 13 AI2 10 00 10 00V or 4 20mA 14 communication given AO output is controlled by communication please refer to the related communication protocol for details Note 15 mot
28. Range 0 3 0 0 No action 1 Static auto tuning It is applied to applications where the motor cannot be disconnected from the load or the process is complicated Values on the motor s nameplate should be input correctly before staring auto tuning F15 01 F15 06 Set F15 11 as 1 and press n 3 back to monitoring mode then press i U i to start auto tuning which with a tune symbol on the keyboard 3 After auto tuning the Drive will exit process automatically and the detected values of the stator s resistance rotor s resistance and the leakage inductance will be saved in F15 07 F15 09 In static auto tuning mode the value of No load current and mutual inductive reactance will not be detected The user can input the related values with the reference of the Motor factory data or the data on the motor test report Without related value please adopt the Default value Otherwise it may cause negative influence on the performance of motor During the process of auto tuning any abnormal please press e9 to stop auto tuning 2 Rotating auto tuning of Asynchronous motor Rotating auto tuning function is suitable for the applications which the load of motor is lighter than 30 of the rated load or some kind of small inertia load Please try your best to disconnect the load of your motor and make the motor in static or unload state so that auto tuning the value of motor exactly Values on the motor s nameplate should be input correctly be
29. Saig time ai pressi Range 0 0 6000 0s 0 0s Closed loop frequency This function can make the closed loop adjuster into the stable status quickly When the closed loop function start the output frequency will ramp up to the preset closed loop frequency F 11 19 within the Acc time and keep running the time that set in F11 20 then start the closed loop operation as shown is Fig 7 42 Output Freq Time Hold time of Preset Freq Fig 7 42 Preset closed loop operating B Preset closed loop Function is ineffective when set F11 19 and F11 20 as 0 Note F11 21 Closed loop output reversion selection Range 0 2 2 0 The inverter will runs with the low limit freguency when the closed loop output value is negative 1 The inverter will reverse running when the value of the closed loop output is negative be opposite of the initial direction 2 determined by running demand The motor running direction is determined by demand direction The comparison value can be display in the PID monitor amp parameters it s positive when the reference bigger than the feedback value and negative when reference smaller than feedback value Note 173 7 Detailed function specification Closed loop output F11 22 reversion frequency upper limit Range 0 00Hz upper limit 50 00Hz Frequency The PID regulator is a kind of bipolar adjustment By setting F11 21 and F11
30. Table 7 5 Acceleration deceleration time terminal selection Acceleration Acceleration Acceleration Acceleration deceleration deceleration deceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration time time selection time selection time selection time selection selection terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1 OFF OFF OFF ON Acceleration deceleration time 1 OFF OFF ON OFF Acceleration deceleration time 2 OFF OFF ON ON Acceleration deceleration time 3 OFF ON OFF OFF Acceleration deceleration time 4 OFF ON OFF ON Acceleration deceleration time 5 OFF ON ON OFF Acceleration deceleration time 6 OFF ON ON ON Acceleration deceleration time 7 ON OFF OFF OFF Acceleration deceleration time 8 ON OFF OFF ON Acceleration deceleration time 9 ON OFF ON OFF Acceleration deceleration time 10 ON OFF ON ON Acceleration deceleration time 11 ON ON OFF OFF Acceleration deceleration time 12 140 7 Detailed function specification ON ON OFF ON Acceleration deceleration time 13 ON ON ON OFF Acceleration deceleration time 14 ON ON ON ON Acceleration deceleration time 15 13 15 Main and auxiliary frequency operational rule selection terminal By ON OFF of frequency setting channel selection terminal 13 14 and 15 7 kinds of main and auxiliary frequency operational rules defined in F01 06 parameter can be realized Switchover between main and auxiliar
31. auxiliary frequency setup confirmed by EAI2 analog voltage current input range 10 10V EAI2 jumper wire selection V side or 4 20mA EAI2 jumper wire selection A side 7 High speed pulse setup Auxiliary frequency setup by frequency signal of terminal pulse only X8 input input pulse specification voltage range 5 30V frequency range 0 00 50 00 KHz 8 Terminal pulse width setup Auxiliary frequency setup by pulse width signal of terminal pulse only X8 input input pulse specification voltage range 15 30V pulse width range 0 1 999 9ms 9 Terminal encoder provide Auxiliary frequency setup by terminal encoder pulse only X3 or X4 input 0 01Hz is a fixed adjusting precision 10 20 Reserved Analog provide is positive and negative polarity control its prior to N command direction control when auxiliary freguency provide is Note AI2 EAI1 EAI2 and setup provide is to be 10 10V run direction confirmed by analog provide signal polarity completely 101 7 Detailed function specification Except terminal encoder provide F01 03 9 main and auxiliary A provide channel cannot setup to the same frequency source when they are the same then panel light ALM and A 51 display Auxiliary frequency digital Range 0 00Hz upper Rass 0 00Hz setup limit frequency When F01 03 0 3 or 4 FO1 04 is the initial frequency value of auxiliary frequency F01 04 Auxiliary frequency digital Range 00 11 1 VAL dIE control
32. choose multi section frequency 1 15 F10 31 F10 45 to run at multi section speed 4 swing frequency run The inverter will enter into swing frequency run mode when swing frequency function effective parameter F13 00 1 is set Set relevant swing frequency run special parameter according to textile swing frequency craft to realize swing frequency run 5 common run Common open loop run mode of general inverter In above 6 kinds of run mode except jog run the inverter can run according to kinds of frequency setting method 41 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter 5 2 Operation and use of key board 52 1 Keypad layout The operating keyboard is the main unit of frequency inverter to accept commands display parameters Keyboard outline diagram shown in Figure 5 2 Voltage indicator light Current indicator light Frequency indicator light Failure alarm indicator light 4 Forward run indicator light Mode indicator light 6 Reverse run indicator light Increase key Exit Program key je N Confirm Data key Multiple function key lt gt AVA gt Shift Supervision key pas x Decrease key Reverse Jog key T RUN Stop Reset key Forward run key Fig 5 2 keypad layout sketch 5 2 2 Keypad function description There are 9 key presses on inverter keypad and function definition of each key is as shown in table 5 1 Table 5 1 keypad function table Key Name Function descrip
33. feedback error limit and PI parameters are similar with the general PID adjuster the relationship between reference and expected feedback is shown in Fig 7 38 The reference and feedback 168 7 Detailed function specification are converted and based on 10 00V In Fig 7 37 the real values of closed loop reference and feedback can be regulated in Group F06 and F07 so that can reach a good performance Expected Value eedback 20m Mg AmA Pressure reference 0 10V Fig 7 38 Reference and expected feedback value After the system control mode is confirmed follow the procedures below to set the closed loop parameters 1 Determine the closed loop reference and feedback channel F11 01F11 02 2 The relationship between the closed loop reference and feedback should be defined for closed loop control the Group F6 3 Set up the closed loop frequency presetting function F11 19 F 11 20 4 Adjust the proportion gain integral gain differential gain sampling cycle and error limit F11 07 F 11 11 F11 00 Closed loop control function Range 0 1 0 0 PID closed loop function disabled 1 PID closed loop function enabled F11 01 Reference channel choose Range 0 7 0 0 Digital provision 1 AI1 analog 0 10V or 4 20mA provision 2 AI2 analog provision 3 EAT1 analog provision Extensible 4 EAI2 analog provision Extensible 5 Pulse provision 6 Communication provision Please refer to t
34. means increase 1 EN LED3 D operation keyboard is different with the standard configured EN LED1 in the key site please pay E attention to the key site when using EN LED3 D Note 2 EN LED3 D keyboard is different with other keyboards in unlocking way unlocking way of EN LED3 Dkeyboard is pressing key for more than 2 seconds 257 Appendix C Keyboard C 5 Communication Component The maximum electric distance between keyboard EN LED1 EN LED2 EN LCD1 EN LED3 D and local inverter is 2m RS485 communication mode is adopted between inverter and remote keyboard EN LCD2 only an ordinary cable is needed to connect each other and their maximum electric distance can be 1000m When the communication with each other is main auxiliary mode namely take remote keyboard as main device and inverter as auxiliary device The terminals of the connection cable are made by crystal ends so it is easy to maintain Power needs customers outer leading the voltage range is from 10V to 24V the demand current is 150mA 1mm of PVC insulate copper wire is suggested to connect Following function can be realized by remote keyboard 1 Can control run stop jog failure reset change setting frequency modify function parameter and run direction of auxiliary device 2 Can identify the type of auxiliary device Can monitor the running frequency setting frequency output voltage output current analog closed loop feedback analog closed l
35. on time F18 10 Setup accumulate run 07 65535 hours 1 0 time F18 11 Timing run function O invalid 1 0 enable 1 valid F18 12 Timing run stop time 0 1 6500 0Min 0 1Min 2 0Min F18 13 Currently run arrival 0 0 6500 0Min 0 1Min 1 0Min time F18 14 Keyboard UP DOWN _ 0 keyboard frequency provide value adjusting 1 0 selection under monitor 1 PID digital provide value adjusting mode 2 6 Reserved F18 15 V F vibration restrain 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 50 00Hz end frequency F18 16 Torque closed loop 0 Torque open loop control 1 1 control selection 1 Torque closed loop control Note This parameter is valid when F00 24 1 or 2 F18 17 Reserved F18 18 Reserved F18 19 Reserved F18 20 Reserved F18 21 Reserved F18 22 Reserved F18 23 Reserved F18 24 Reserved 80 6 Function parameter schedule graph F19 Protective Relevant Function Parameter Group Function Name RR Min Factory Modifi code Unit Default cation F19 00 Power off restart waiting 0 0 20 0s 0 means no start function 0 1s 0 0s x time F19 01 Fault self recovery times 0 10 0 means no automatic reset function 1 0 x F19 02 Fault self recovery 0 5 20 0s 0 1s 5 0s x interval time F19 03 Motor overload O alarm continuous run 1 2 x protection action l alarm stop run as halt mode selection 2 fault free halt
36. packing transportation etc please contact our company or local agent rapidly if some careless omission or mistake arise we ll deal with it as soon as possible 2 2 Type explanation EN6OO 4T 0015G 0022P B Code Name Code accessories EN500 Series No R B Inbuilt brake unit EN600 Series No Dedicated fan Code Volt grade Code amp pump ti e 2S 1 phase 220V id KW AT 3 phase 380V 0015P 1 5 Bee ie 0022P 2 2 general type Code motor power KW 6300P 630 0004 0 4 0007 0 75 5600G 560 6300G 630 Fig 2 1 Type description 2 3 Nameplate explanation Nameplate presented as figure 2 2 with type and rating data at the bottom of inverter right side P EN600 INVERTER TYPE EN600 4T0550G 0750P Type Series No SOURCE 3PH 380V 50 60Hz OUTPUT 55 75KW 112 150A CES N SHENZHEN ENCOM ELECTRIC TECHNOLOGIES Co LTD MADE IN CHINA Fig 2 2 Nameplate Rated input vol And freg Motor power and output current Serial No Manufacturer and origin 2 Inverter type and specification 2 4 Inverter type explanation Input merrie Rated output Adaptable motor Voltage Current A KW EN600 2S0004 2 5 0 4 EN600 2S0007 4 0 75 ss EN600 2S0015 7 1 5 EN600 2S0022 10 2 2 EN600 2S0037 15 3 7 EN600 4T0007G
37. parameter adjusts duty ratio brake unit The higher the brake use rate is the greater the brake unit duty ratio is and the more apparent the brake effect is but when fluctuation of the brake process busbar voltage is more apparent user needs to select proper parameter based on brake resistor and brake power F02 25 Encryption time Range 0 65535h 0 When F02 25 gt 1 the encryption time is available When the running time exceed the time defined by F02 25 the inverter will stop and it will restart after decode F02 26 Reserved 113 7 Detailed function specification 74 VIF control parameter group F03 F03 00 V F curve set Range 0 4 0 0 Constant torque curve 1 Degression torque curve 1 2 Degression torque curve 2 3 Degression torque curve 3 4 V F curve setting V F frequency and voltage cannot be 0 or Max value This function code defines EN600 flexible V F setting mode to satisfy different load characteristics 4 kinds of fixed curves and one customized curve can be selected according to definition of F03 00 When F3 00 0 V F curve is Constant torque curve feature as shown in Fig 7 7a curve 0 When F03 00 1 V F curve is 2 0 order power degressive torque characteristic as shown in Fig 7 7a curve 3 When F03 00 2 V F curve is 1 7 order power degressive torque characteristic as shown in Fig 7 7a curve 2 When F03 00 3 V F curve is 1 2 order power degressi
38. s no fault and running signal maintained when power on again there s no other factors which Note affect normal starting Range 0 10 F19 01 Fault self recovery times 0 indicates no self recovery 0 function F19 02 Ee sel ever mier aN anen GS A 5 0s When the inverter is running because of fluctuation of load faults may happen in some case and it will top to output In order not to stop the operation of equipment choosing the recovery functions No alarm stop in stopping mode Inverter will recovery to run with speed checking restart style within the setting time if inverter cannot run then fault protection will begin stop running No alarm when the self recovery times of fault are set to 0 self recovery function stops 1 When using fault self recovery function and make sure the equipment is permitted and inverter do not enter fault 2 Self recovery function have the effect on power on terminal protection clock fault overload and over heated output short circuit short circuit to ground and the lack voltage when running of fault Protection is disabled 3 When F19 0040 open stop and restart function We can start this equipment without operators so be careful to use this function Motor overload protection H203 action selection Range 0 2 2 When the AC motors is overloaded this mode of Protection will happen 195 7 Detailed function specification 0 A
39. upper limit 0 00Hz last two fault frequency F26 12 Output frequency at the Range 0 00Hz upper limit 0 00Hz last two fault frequency Output current at the last yes F26 13 Rule Range 0 0 6553 5A 0 0A DC busbar voltage at the SAS AUS F26 14 last two fault Range 0 0 6553 5V 0 0V Module temperature at the Ses 5 F26 15 last two fault Range 0 125 C OC F26 16 Input terminal status at 0 the last two fault 212 7 Detailed function specification Accumulated run time at Teci the last two fault Range 0 65535min 0min F26 04 F26 17 record the running state of fault for the first and second time before when Input terminal state at the fault the terminal state is the whole terminal state after the time delay including the standard input terminal state and expanded input terminal state When Virtual terminal communication is set as the terminal panel point the standard Input terminal state is determined by the actual physical input terminal and Virtual terminal communication please refer to the details of the Input terminal state Bit0 X 1 Standard input terminal 1 Bit1 X2 Standard input terminal 2 Bit2 X3 Standard input terminal 3 Bit3 X4 Standard input terminal 4 Bit4 X5 Standard input terminal 5 Bit5 X6 Standard input terminal 6 Bit6 X7 Standard input terminal 7 Bit7 X8 Standard input terminal 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 valid 0 valid 0 valid
40. 0 00s delay time F20 17 Virtual output VDO3 close Range 0 00 600 00s 0 00s delay time F20 18 Virtual output VDO4 close Range 0 00 600 00s 0 00s delay time 206 7 Detailed function specification Virtual output VDOS close HADES delay time Range 0 00 600 00s 0 00s F20 10 F20 19 definite the time of open up and shut down terminal VDO1 VDOS definite is the delay time of internal level from open up to shut down F20 20 Virtual input VDI enable control Range 00 FF 00 Parameter F20 20 is to control VDI1 VDI5 is enable F20 20 BITO BIT4 is according to the enable unit VDI1 VDI5 0 stands for disabled 1 stands for enable The relations are below tens units BITO VDI1 enable control unit BIT1 VDI2 enable control unit BIT2 VDI3 enable control unit BIT3 VDI4 enable control unit BITO VDI5 enable control unit F20 21 Virtual input VDI status digital setup Range 00 FF 00 Virtual input terminal VDI state is determined by the VDI F20 21 definite virtual input VDI state Digital and virtual output terminal VDO state the relation between them is logical OR Parameter F20 21 BITO BIT4 is according to VDII VDIS5 state 0 stands for disabled state 1 stands for enabled state F20 22 Virtual input output connection Range 00 FF 00 Bit0 The connection of VDI1 and VDO1 0 positive logic 1
41. 1 110mmabove 100mm 100mm 50mm 7 50mm a is Vee above above above above 7 N 2 bi I RONS 200mmabove od sees a 15KW amp down power b 18 5KW amp up power Fig 3 1 mounting space 16 3 Installation and wiring mm Leading divider Fig 3 2 mounting of multiple inverters 3 2 Parts disassembly and installation 32 1 Keyboard disassembly and installation 1 Disassembly A Let the forefinger press finger inlet on the keypad P depress fixing flexible plate on the top lightly draw it outward then you can disassemble the keypad J n 2 Assembly T A I Assemble First interface the fixed hook of on the bottom ad hook of keyboard with the keyboard installation claw of inverter then press the fixed shrapnel on the top of keyboard to push it assemble well properly keyboard assemble well when sounding of crisp show as Fig 3 3 Fig 3 3 Keypad assembly Assemble hook 3 2 2 Cover disassembly and installation 3 2 2 1 Cover disassembly and installation 1 Disassembly Located the thumbs to the side bayonet the ring fingers on the joint of the up and down cover with thumbs press inside and pull upside at the same time until the bayonet snap RY open between cover and whole case then pull back cover to make it off the inverter Fig 3 4 metal cover disassemble and assembly 17 3 Installation and wiring 2 Assembly 1 tilt cover at 5 10 degree 2 interface in
42. 10 2 Inverter type and specification EN500 4T3750G 4000P EN500 4T4000G 4500P SP BS 4000 LI SP BS 4000 LO SP BS 4000 LI SP BS 4000 LO 2 7 2 Base outer dimension mg ei J m i 2 1 T Di ay H Fig a Fig b Fig 2 6 base dimension Table 2 3 base size Ww D1 Ho B l Fig Ee mm mm mm SP BS 0900 340 300 180 Fig a SP BS 0750 LI SP BS 0750 LD 340 300 350 SP BS 0900 LI SP BS 0900 LO SP BS 1320 400 320 180 SP BS 1100 LI SP BS 1100 LO 400 320 380 SP BS 1320 LI SP BS 1320 LO SP BS 1600 480 380 180 SP BS 1600 LI 480 380 400 11 109 5 2 Inverter type and specification SP BS 1600 LO SP BS 2200 500 380 200 SP BS 2000 LI SP BS 2000 LO SP BS 2200 LI SP BS 2200 LO 500 380 400 SP BS 4000 700 430 204 SP BS 2500 LI SP BS 2500 LO SP BS 2800 LI 700 430 400 SP BS 2800 LO Fig b SP BS 3150 LI SP BS 3150 LO SP BS 4000 LI 700 430 450 SP BS 4000 LO 2 8 Outer size of keypad and its fixing box unit mm 140 134 5 107 5 Fig 2 7 Mounting size of keypad Fig 2 8 Hole size of keypad 1 EN LCD2 long distance keypad outer lead do not support keypad holder installed only keypad installed support mounting E size refer to
43. 11 is the same but here it uses control terminal to realize which is convenient for remote control 26 External stop instruction This command is effective for all running command channel when this function terminal is effective the inverter stops running according to mode set by F2 11 27 Stop DC braking input command DB Implement DC braking to the motor during stop by control terminal so as to realize emergency stop and accurate position of the motor During deceleration stop if this function terminal closed when frequency is lower than the brake starting frequency F02 14 it will brake according to brake current defined in F02 16 It will not stop until terminal is opened 28 Inverter running prohibited The running inverter stops freely when this terminal is effective and forbidden to start in waiting status It is mainly applied to occasion needing safe linkage 29 Acceleration deceleration prohibited command When this function is valid keep the motor away from any external signal except stop command maintain current revolving speed running ES This function is invalid in normal deceleration stop process Note 142 7 Detailed function specification 30 Three wire running control Refer to F08 26 operating mode Three wire operating mode function introduction 31 Process PID invalid Realize flexible switchover in low level running mode under closed loop running status 1 Switchover between closed loop and low l
44. 22 can choose whether the inverter reverse run in some degree frequency or not F11 23 Multiple closed loop provision 1 Range 0 00 10 00V 0 00V F11 24 Multiple closed loop provision 2 Range 0 00 10 00V 0 00V F11 25 Multiple closed loop provision 3 Range 0 00 10 00V 0 00V F11 26 Multiple closed loop provision 4 Range 0 00 10 00V 0 00V F11 27 Multiple closed loop provision 5 Range 0 00 10 00V 0 00V F11 28 Multiple closed loop provision 6 Range 0 00 10 00V 0 00V F11 29 Multiple closed loop provision 7 Range 0 00 10 00V 0 00V Among the closed loop reference channel besides the 7 channels defined by F11 01 the closed loop reference can also be defined in F11 23 F11 29 The priority of multi closed loop reference control is higher than the reference channels that defined by F11 01 Multi closed loop reference 1 7 can be selected by external terminals Please refer to the terminal function 19 21 of introductions to F08 18 F08 25 When the function of Constant water supply is enable the reference of constant water pressure is decided by the multi closed loop reference which selected by external terminals Computational formula constant pressure reference F12 06 x Multi closed loop reference 10 00V By using this functions can realize different times with a different constant water pressure 174 7 Detailed function specification 7 13 C
45. 257 C 5 Communication Component urene EE ER EER EE ER enn se ee 258 Appendix D Communication extension card tree EER EER EER EE EE Ee 259 D 1 Communication card selection sesse esse RE iee EE dee be EE seernes 259 D 2 PROFIBUS DP communication card etse ese see ees see see RE ee EE 259 D 3 CANopen communication card sesse ees se eke EER EE ER EER EE Ee ee see 262 D 4 CANIink communication card seese ees SeSe Ad Rees eg sees ee 264 Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card stres esse ese see see ees see 266 Appendix F Braking unit and braking resistance treere ses see see see see ee 268 1 Safety information and use notice points 1 Safety information and use notice points To make ensure personal amp equipment safety this chapter must be read carefully before the inverter come into use 1 1 Safety precautions There are three kinds of safety warnings in this manual as below Symbol description It may cause human death serious injury or heavy property loss with wrong operation It may result body or device damage with wrong and timeless precautions under operation Should pay extra cautions when inverter in use under this symbol 1 Safety information and use notice points Forbid to cut off the power source directly when inverter under running acceleration or deceleration status Power source could cut off when inverter completely in halt and standby status Otherwise user should be r
46. 3 respectively parameter mode is set Basic menu mode menu mode Intermediate Advanced menu mode and user menu mode Basic menu F00 F01 F02 F03 F26 F00 FO1 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F18 F19 F26 Advance F00 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 menu F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 Middle menu User custom F00 00 and F25 parameters group 5 2 6 Method for operating keypad Can carry on various operation to the inverter through keypad for example 1 Status parameter display switching After pressing key display C group status supervision parameter after displaying one supervision parameter code for 1 second will display this parameter value automatically Press key will go back to supervision interface Is ls LED displayed content 0 00 gt Key press operation gt order n C 00 Para Fig 5 7 waiting status parameter display operating example 46 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter 2 Function code parameter setting Take function code F01 01 modified from 5 00Hz to 6 00Hz as example Boldface in Fig 5 8 shows flickering digit LED displayed content 0 00 F00 00 F01 00 Key press i 7 a A gt A gt paredon grapi Enter into Choose Move to the Choose Exit editing editing Status F01 group position to function status display first
47. 55 6 Function parameter schedule graph selection FO1 10 Auxiliary 0 00 1 00 0 01 1 00 frequency source scope FO1 11 upper limit Low limit freguency 600 00Hz 0 01Hz 50 00Hz Teguency FO1 12 Low limit 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 40Hz frequency FO1 13 Low limit 0 As low limit frequency run 1 2 frequency run 1 As setting frequency run mode 2 As zero frequency run 3 Sleep PWM clocked at sleep mode FO1 14 Sleep run hysteresis 0 01Hz upper limit frequency This function can be 0 01Hz 0 01Hz frequency used to finish the sleep mode function realizing energy saving operation process and the hysteresis width can avoid inverter starting frequently in threshold FO1 15 Run command 0 Operation keyboard run control 1 0 channel selection 1 Terminal run command control 2 Communication run command control FO1 16 Run direction Units digit Keyboard command for rev setup only 1 00 setup valid to keyboard inching command 0 Forward 1 Reverse Tens digit for rev forbid suitable for all command channel not include inching function 0 For rev available 1 Reverse not available imposing on reverse stop as the halt mode 2 Forward not available imposing on forward stop as the halt mode FO1 17 Acceleration time 1 1 60000 Acceleration time is interval accelerate from Base on zero frequency to upper limit frequency 1 motor type FO1 18 Deceleration
48. 7 7 Setting curve parameter group FOG etes sees reses ees esse ee ee ee ee 128 7 8 Analog quantity Pulse input function parameter group FO7 see ee 132 7 9 On off input function parameter group FO8 sr sesse eerste terse ee 135 7 10 Switch output function parameter group F09 seer sees ses ee ses see 150 7 11 Simple PLC Multi speed function parameters Group F10 furer 161 7 12 Closed Loop PID operation Parameters Group F 11e ss see sesse see 168 7 13 Constant pressure water supply function parameters Group F12 175 7 14 Traverse Fixed length control Function Parameters Group F13 178 7 15 Vector Control parameters Group F14 trees esse sees see ee ee ee ee 182 7 16 Motor parameters Group F15 tees seek seke ee ee ee ee EE Ee EER se see ee 187 7 17 Closed loop encoder parameters Group F16 ree seer ese ees ses see 190 7 18 Reserved parameters Groupl F 17e esse ee esse see ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 191 7 19 Enhanced Control Functions Parameters Group F18 sesse sesse 192 7 20 Protective Relevant Function Parameters Group F19 see sesse see 195 7 21 Internal Virtual Input Output Node Parameter Group F20 free 206 7 22 Reserved parameter group 2 F21 renerne erne reen tenes 209 7 23 Reserved parameter group 3 F22 testes sesse ee ee Ee Ee Ee Ee Bee tenes 209 7 24 Reserved parameter group 4 F23 testes sesse see ee Ee Ee Ee Ee Bee Ee se 209 7 25 Reserved parameter group 5 F24 testes sesse see ee Ee E
49. AI 89 Reserved 41 Main frequency switchover to AI2 90 Reserved 42 Main frequency switchover to EAI 91 Reserved 43 Main frequency switchover to EAI2 92 Pulse frequency input X8 VALID 44 Main frequency setting channel 93 Pulse width PWM INPUT X8 selection terminal 1 VALID 45 Main frequency setting channel 94 Reserved selection terminal 2 46 Main i frequency setting channel 95 Reserved selection terminal 3 47 Main l frequency setting channel 96 Reserved selection terminal 4 48 Clear auxiliary frequency Function introduction in Table 7 3 is as shown below 1 2 External command terminal When running command channel is terminal running command control inverter s forward and reverse by external terminal 3 4 External jogging command terminal Set as any running command channel setting running command control inverter s jogging forward and jogging reverse by external terminal 5 8 Multi step running terminal By setting these functions terminal increase and decrease time of each step corresponds to the each step time Table 7 4 Multi step running selection table ON OFF combination up to 15 multi step running frequencies can be set The Ky K K K Frequency setting OFF OFF OFF OFF Other running frequencies OFF OFF OFF ON Multi step frequency 1 OFF OFF ON OFF Multi step frequency 2 OFF OFF ON ON Multi step frequency 3 OFF ON OFF OFF Multi s
50. Brake resistance fitting part External connect 3 External connect Brake unit fitting part Installation and wiring P O BR L1 220V AC AC380V multi function input 1 S L2 220V AC 50 60Hz N DT X1 10V 10V s5 LY kE internal optocoupler isolation input X terminal active electric level x4 support high level and low level Lower level valid short circuit 5 slice connect PW and 24V external wiring show as solid line high level valid short circuit slice connect PW and COM external wiring show as dotted line Xa DIUsed as hi speed pulse inputy terminal DI COM when external power source used remove the short circuit slice 24V Q PB C u V ENS00 EN600 A Y3 K ET Relay load Yamo T i stow 1 DO Frequency meter 24V pulse Analog output type amet sa AOIO AN voltmeter A02switch SWA y 10 cx O 10V A02 EAN amperemeter V 0 10V m V 4 20mA A 4 20mA A GNDO TA Program relay output F09 04 O OOpen TA TC Open GND A12 A 4 20mA Current input Must set parameter F00 20 when SW2 switch 10V Ted com TB TC close RER oe 3 TC nalog input type SWI switch AIl valid Omon AU Analog input type SW2 switch AD valid ATL VO od Voltage input 485 V A A 20mACurrent inpu
51. Description code decimal p code decimal p 1 Overcurrent during 3 Inverting module accelerating process protection 2 ye during 14 External device failure decelerating process 3 Overcurrent during 5 Current detecting circuit constant speed process failure 4 Overvoltage during 6 RS485 communication accelerating process i failure 5 Overvoltage during 17 Reserved decelerating process 6 Overvoltage during 8 Reserved constant speed process 7 Control power supply 19 Under voltage overvoltage 8 Inverter overload 20 System interference 9 Motor overload 21 Reserved 10 Inverter over heating 22 Reserved 244 Appendix B Free port communication protocol gt i 11 AE 23 EPROM read and write wrongly 12 Reserved 5 Checkout sum Data meanings frame checkout 4 byte ASCH Calculation method accumulative sum of ASCII code value of all byte from auxiliary device address to run data 6 Frame end Hex 0D single byte B 2 6 Protocol command list Frame 7E and frame end 0D are omitted in following description address checkout sum ASCII character format Table B 4 Free port 1 protocol command table E e gt ero 8 z Bee g sl E a PaE 5 RIS o S BE 8 5 g co EIS gt an amp 2 p 2 Zz AE gt Go BE Ey 2 Beles lei ag 2558 2 i 3 BejejPe SE 3798 3 Bol E ae 5 ge 2 E R al sas a om amp 2 a S E SS aga 8 T de cog ga op S Es 2
52. External connect to brake ay v resistor reverse terminal EN600 4T0150G 0185P IDC volt Negative terminal U v w 3 phase AC output terminal connect to motor Grounding terminal R S T 3 phase AC input terminal Terminal 1 connect power source x P External connect to DC reactor t ce IDC volt Positive terminal RS TPG UV Ww External connect to brake EN600 4T0185G 0220P PB ns ad resistor reverse terminal EN600 4T0220G 0300P Terminal 2 IDC volt Negative terminal DIES OlS DDD External connect brake unit RS T PB UV W U v w 3 phase AC output terminal connect to motor Grounding terminal RS amp T 3 phase AC input terminal Terminal 1 AS connect power source P External connect to DC reactor PB External connect to brake il resistor reverse terminal EN600 4T0300G 0370P Re Be EA IDC volt Positive terminal EN600 4T0370G 0450P Terminal 2 IDC volt Negative terminal gt external connect brake unit U v w 3 phase AC output terminal R S T PBG U V W connect to motor Grounding terminal 22 3 Installation and wiring i R S T 3 phase AC input terminal Terminal 1 is connect power source P External connect to DC reactor External connect to brake PB f S7 resistor reverse terminal R S T U V W EN600 4T0450G 0550P POO IDC volt Positive terminal EN600 4T0550G 0750P Terminal 2
53. F05 32 Reserved F05 33 Reserved F05 34 Reserved F05 35 Reserved F05 36 Reserved F05 37 Reserved F05 38 Reserved F05 39 Reserved F06 Setting curve parameter group Function Min Factory Modifi Code Name Ser Range Unit Defauit cation F06 00 Setting curve Units digit AI curve selection 1 0000 o selection 0 curve 1 1 curve 2 2 curve 3 Tens digit AI2 curve selection The same as Units digit Hundred digit rapid pulse curve selection The same as Units digit Thousands digit pulse width setting curve 62 6 Function parameter schedule graph selection The same as Units digit FO6 01 Curve 1 min setting 0 0 curve inflexion setting 0 1 0 0 o F06 02 Corresponding physical 0 07 100 0 0 1 0 0 o quantity of curve 1 min setting F06 03 Curve 1 inflexion setting Curve 1 min setting curve 1 Max setting 0 1 50 0 o F06 04 Corresponding physical 0 0 100 0 0 1 50 0 o quantity of curve 1 inflexion setting F06 05 Curve Max setting Curve 1 inflexion setting 100 0 100 0 is 0 1 100 0 o corresponding to 5V Input AD terminal F06 06 Corresponding physical 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 o quantity of curve 1 Max setting F06 07 Curve 2 min setting 0 0 curve 2 inflexion setting 0 1 0 0 o F06 08 Corresponding physical 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 o guantity of curve 2 min setting F0
54. F19 04 Motor overload 20 0 200 0 motor rated current 0 1 150 0 x protection coefficient F19 05 Inverter overload O detection all the time 1 0 x pre alarm detection 1 detection as constant velocity selection F19 06 Inverter overload 20 180 inverter rated current 1 130 o pre alarm detection level F19 07 Inverter overload 0 0 20 0s 0 1s 5 0s o pre alarm delay time F19 08 Motor underload 0 0 120 0 motor rated current 0 1 50 0 o alarm detection level F19 09 Motor underload 0 1 60 0s 0 1s 2 0s o alarm detection time F19 10 Motor underload Units digit detection selection 1 00 o alarm detection action 0 no detection 1 detection all the time when run 2 detection only when constant velocity Tens digit action selection O alarm continuous run l alarm stop run as halt mode 2 fault free halt F19 11 Input amp output phase Units digit input phase loss 1 1111 o loss short circuit 0 no detection detection action fault free halt Tens digit output phase loss O no detection fault free halt Hundreds digit power on on earth short circuit protect detection enable O no detection fault free halt Thousands digit operation on earth short circuit protect detection enable O no detection fault free halt F19 12 Over voltage stall 0 forbid 1 1 x selection allowed F19 13 Over voltage stall 20 150 rated busbar voltage 1 125 x protection voltage F19 14 Automatic current limit 110 230 G type rated current
55. Function 0 No output 31 Set count value reached 1 Frequency inverter running RUN 32 Designated count value reached 2 Frequency inverter Forward running 33 _ Shutdown time arrival of the running 3 Frequency inverter Reverse running 34 Time arrival of the running 4 Frequency inverter DC brake 35 Setup running time arrived Frequency inverter Ready for 5 operation RDY 36 Setup power on time arrived 6 Shutdown command indicator 37 1st pump variable frequency 7 Zero current state 38 lst pump frequency 8 Over current state 39 2nd pump variable frequency 9 Current arrived 40 2nd pump frequency 0 Current 2 arrived 41 Communication given 1 Frequency inverter Zero frequency 42 Reserved output 2 Frequency arriving signal FAR 43 Reserved Frequency level detection signal 1 13 FDTI 44 Reserved Frequency level detection signal 4 2 FDT2 45 Reserved Output frequency arriving upper 5 limit FHL 46 Reserved Output frequency arriving lower 6 limit FLL 47 Reserved Frequency 1 arrived 48 Reserved 1 Frequency 2 arrived 49 Reserved 9 Frequency inverter overload pre alarm 50 Reserved signal OL 7 Detailed function specification Frequency inverter Low voltage 20 ae signal LU a ee 21 External stopping command EXT 52 Reserved 22 Frequency inverter fault 53 Reserved 23 Frequency inverter warning 54 Reserved 24 Simple PLC operation running 55 Re
56. Function Code 10 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 10 User Function Code 11 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 11 User Function Code 12 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 12 User Function Code 13 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 13 User Function Code 14 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 14 User Function Code 15 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 15 User Function Code 16 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 16 User Function Code 17 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 17 User Function Code 18 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 18 User Function Code 19 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 19 User Function Code 20 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o OO o 6 Function parameter schedule graph F25 20 User Function Code 21 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 F25 21 User Function Code 22 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 F25 22 User Function Code 23 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 F25 23 User Function Code 24 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 F25 24 User Function Code 25 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 F25 25 User Function Code 26 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 F25 26 User Function Code 27 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 F25 27 User Function Code 28 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 F25 28 User Function Code 29 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 F25 29 User Function Code 30 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 OoJojojojojololo o o F26 Fault Record Function Parameter Group Functio
57. IDC volt Negative terminal External connect brake unit gt Us vw 3 phase AC output terminal ay connect to motor R S T PBG UV W OT Oo 7 Grounding terminal Note D EN600 4T0185G 0220P EN600 4T0550G 0750P there are two kinds of sort order for main loop terminal terminal 2 remove P add PB terminal EN600 4T0185G 0220P EN600 4T0550G 0750P terminal 1 short circuit diagram of copper bar assembly on main loop terminal edgefold assembly in up direction for short circuit copper bar Short circuit copper bar o gt edgefold in up i direction Table 3 3 EN500 main loop input output terminal description gt T Terminal 4 le Adapted type Main loop terminal GE Function description S T 3 phase AC input terminal je Connect power source CG IDC volt Positive terminal GC IDC volt Negative terminal A External connect to DC EN500 4T0750G 0900P ollelelelelolel MP ear RST POOUV We External connect brake unit i vy 3 phase AC output terminal N connect to motor Grounding terminal S T 3 phase AC input terminal nS Connect power source SE aL La Lic IDC volt Positive terminal ele DTODTOTO EN500 4T0900G 1100P IDC volt Negative terminal F oe OOO Ol OHO Ee 5 i EN500 4T1320G 1600P External connect brake unit RS T ODOUV WO UV VW 3 phase AC output terminal ca ana
58. Reserved Hundreds digit terminal run command control multi function button function button invalid button valid s digit communication run command control button invalid button valid 0001 F00 16 Multi function key run command channel switching order selection 0 Keyboard control terminal control communication control 1 Keyboar 2 Keyboar 3 Terminal control communication control control terminal control control communication control F00 17 Motor speed display coefficient 0 1 999 9 0 1 100 0 F00 18 Line velocity display coefficient 0 1 999 9 0 1 1 0 F00 19 Extended Port Parts set 0 Invalid 1 Reserved 2 Multi pump water supply card 3 Incremental PG encoder 4 10 Reserved F00 20 Analog input terminal configuration Units digit AI 0 0 10V input 1 4 20mA input Tens digit AI2 configuration 0 10 10V input 1 4 20mA input Hundreds digit EAI configuration 0 0 10V input 1 10 10V input 2 4 20mA input Thousands digit EAI2 configuration 0 0 10V input 1 10 10V input 2 4 20mA input configuration 0000 F00 21 Analog output terminal configuration Units digit AO1 configuration 0 0 10V output 1 4 20mA output Tens digit AO2 configuration 0 0 10V output 1 4 20mA output Hundreds digit EAO1 configuration 0000 53 6 Function
59. VDI to VDI5 have the same functions as Xi terminals on the control board and can be used for digital input For more details see description of F08 18 to F08 25 The realization of the function set by internal virtual terminal must be based on the available terminal function F20 05 Virtual output VDO1 function selection Range 0 60 0 F20 06 Virtual output VDO2 function selection Range 0 60 0 F20 07 Virtual output VDO3 function selection Range 0 60 0 F20 08 Virtual output VDO4 function selection Range 0 60 0 F20 09 Virtual output VDOS function selection Range 0 60 0 VDO functions are similar to the Yi functions on the control board The VDO can be used together with VDIx to implement some simple logic control If VDO function is set to non 0 the function setting and use of VDOx are the same as the output of parameter of Yi Please refer to descriptions in group FO9 Virtual output VDO1 open F20 10 F Range 0 00 600 00s 0 00s delay time F20 11 Virtual output VDO2 open Range 0 00 600 00s 0 00s delay time F20 12 Virtual output VDO3 open Range 0 00 600 00s 0 00s delay time F20 13 Virtual output VDO4 open Range 0 00 600 00s 0 00s delay time F20 14 Virtual output VDOS open Range 0 00 600 00s 0 00s delay time F20 15 Virtual output VDO1 close Range 0 00 600 00s 0 00s delay time F20 16 Virtual output VDO2 close Range 0 00 600 00s
60. XXX0 AT1 Analog input signal 0 10V voltage signal input F00 20 be 0000 SWI1 i selection 0 10V W I F00 20 be XXXI 4 20mA current signal input E V F00 20 be XXOX sw2 AD Analog input signal 10V 10V voltage signal input F00 20 be 0000 selection 10V 10V W I F00 20 be XX1X 4 20mA current signal input AO1 Analog output signal SW3 f selection Bly F00 21 be XX00 0 10V voltage signal output FOO21 be 0000 AO Analog output signal mee BWA ae Pot signa W I F00 21 be XX11 4 20mA current signal output EMI inhibiti fi lecti P i SW5 i inhibition for selection earth grounding suspending terminal suspending 1 In the graphic of slide switch black square means switch ES slidable location 2 Only when heavy interfering exist on working site it s Note suggested to put EMI dial switch to earth grounding location and should connect to the earth 3 6 2 Descriptions for control board terminal 1 CN3 and CN4 terminal layout as following 10V AIL AI2 GND X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 DI CN4 CN3 485 485 A01 A02 COM Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 D0 COM PW 24V TA TB TC 27 3 Installation and wiring 2 CN3 and CN4 terminal function description show as Table 3 6 Table 3 6 function table for control board terminal Type Symbol Description Terminal Function and specification X1 Multifunction input 1 z X2 Multifunction input 2 Input voltage rang
61. according to the motor nameplate details and doing the self learning to motor parameter One VFD can only drive one motor in vector control mode and VFD power need match up with motor normally one class less or more of the VFD power than motor is allowed 2 with speed sensor vector control support the speed and torque control When choose the closed loop vector control mode the AC motor should be installed with an encoder and the inverter should be installed with the same type of the encoder It can be used on the high accuracy speed control amp torque control application One inverter only can drive one AC motor like Paper make machine cranes and elevator When using the closed loop control including setting motor parameter F15 group we should also set the encoder parameter group F16 and the Extended Port F00 19 parameter F00 25 Monitor parameter 2 selection Range 0 65 2 When user choose EN LED2 keypad under monitoring mode we can use F00 25 parameter to modify monitoring content of keypad digital display LED2 When user choose EN LCD1 or EN LCD2 keypad under monitoring mode we can use F00 25 parameter to change monitoring content of below LED For monitoring content of F00 25 parameter please refer to description of F00 01 F00 26 Busbar voltage adjustment Range 0 900 1 100 1 000 We can use this parameter to adjust the busbar voltage to make the inverter bus voltage is accordin
62. based on the default value Proportional gain is usually adjusted first Under the condition that the system is immune from oscillation proportional gain can be increased as big as possible Then adjust integral time so that the system responds fast and will not be over adjusted The above parameters are valid for Closed loop or Open loop speed control mode invalid for V F control and torque control mode F14 06 Stable coefficient of low Range 0 50 Valid when frequency generating F00 24 1 or 2 16 When the motor connected to frequency inverter under a low frequency generating status Please adjusting this parameter appropriately For example the frequency inverter will be unstable when drives a potential load which is declining gradually Increasing F14 06 will improve the stability of the system 182 7 Detailed function specification Current loop proportional Range 1 500 Valid when Ps Ns gain F00 24 1 or 2 Range 0 1 100 0ms Valid F14 08 Current loop integral time when F00 24 1 or 2 4 0ms F14 07 and F14 08 are the PI regulator parameters of Current loop The system torque dynamic response can be faster if the Current loop proportional gain P is increased or Current loop integral time constant Ti is decreased The system stability can be improved if the Current loop proportional gain P is decreased or integral time constant Ti is increased In general the above parameters
63. characteristic characteristic F1115 PID regulation upper limit 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 50 00Hz o frequency F11 16 PID regulation lower limit 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz o frequency F11 17 Integral regulation 0 when integral arrival separate PID threshold 0 o selection value stop integral adjusting 1 when integral arrival separate PID threshold value continue threshold value adjusting F11 18 PID threshold of the 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 o integral separation F11 19 Preset closed loop 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz o frequency F11 20 Holding time of preset 0 0 6000 0s 0 1s 0 0s o 73 6 Function parameter schedule graph closed loop freguency F11 21 Closed loop output 0 close loop output minus low limit 1 2 o reversion selection frequency run 1 close loop output minus reverse run effect by run direction setting 2 determined by running demand Closed loop output 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 50 00Hz o F11 22 Reversion frequency upper limit F11 23 Multiple closed loop 0 00 10 00V 0 01V 0 00V o provision 1 F11 24 Multiple closed loop 0 00 10 00V 0 01V 0 00V o provision 2 F11 25 Multiple closed loop 0 00 10 00V 0 01V 0 00V o provision 3 F11 26 Multiple closed loop 0 00 10 00V 0 01V 0 00V o provision 4 F11 27 Multiple closed loop 0 00
64. configuration hundreds digit Reserved thousands digit 0 1 F00 22 0000 Units digit hundreds digit Reserved Thousands digit Y4 output configuration 0 Open collector output 1 DO output The thousands digit decide the Y4 output terminal type when 0 means open collector output when means high speed pulse DO output F00 23 G P type setup Range 0 1 0 0 G type Adapt to constant torque load type 1 P type Adapt to fan amp pump load type EN500 EN600 integrates G P type design in full power range F15 group motor relative parameter will change automatically according to the G or P type 3 P type machine only can support V F control Note F00 24 Motor control model Range 0 2 0 0 V F control If we need to start the fan and water pump application or the inverter should drive one more AC motors please choose the V F control mode when drive parts of the synchronous machines we also can choose V F control 1 Speedless Vector Control 1 Comparing with the speed vector control 2 the mode is more suitable to control the induction motor below 160KW 97 7 Detailed function specification supporting the speed and torque control Speedless sensor vector control run mode mainly used to velocity control torque control in the application site which require high control performance To get better control performance we need to set up motor parameter group F15
65. current limit function is invalid Motor run section selection Fi ie when instant power off Rance t 0 disabled 1 enabled F19 19 Frequency droop rate when Range 0 00 99 99Hz s 10 00Hz s instant power off Voltage rebound estimate F19 20 time when instant power off Range 0 00 10 00s 0 10s pis Hond mie valey Range 60 100 80 when instant power off F19 22 Allowed the longest off time Range 0 30 5 00s 2 00s when instant power off 199 7 Detailed function specification Bus voltage _F19 20 Jf F19 21 i Bes l Time Run freq Deceleration Acceleration Time time time Run freq F19 22 Time Fig 7 47 AC drive action diagram upon instantaneous power failure Upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip the DC bus voltage of the AC drive reduces This function enables the AC drive to compensate the DC bus voltage reduction with the load feedback energy by reducing the output frequency so as to keep the AC drive running continuously If F19 18 1 upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip the AC drive decelerates Once the bus voltage resumes to normal the AC drive accelerates to the set frequency If the bus voltage remains normal for the time exceeding the value set inF19 20 it is considered that the bus voltage resumes to normal When instantaneous power failure happens if the time is exceed the time of F19 22 definite inverter No a
66. dead zone time Range 0 0 3600 0s 0 0s F02 21 Forward reverse switching mode Range 0 1 0 Over zero switchover 1 Over starting frequency switchover Forward reverse dead zone time refers to the process in which the inverter operates from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward After output frequency reaches the defined frequency in switchover mode entering in to the transition time as shown in Fig 7 6 t within transition time tl output frequency is OHz Output Fig 7 6 Forward reverse dead zone time 112 7 Detailed function specification Energy consumption ee braking selection Range 0 1 0 0 No energy consumption braking 1 Energy consumption braking 1 Please set the function parameter correctly according to the actual use condition Otherwise control feature will be affected B Before starting this function make sure the inverter has built in Note brake unit and brake resistor 2 When the inverter is below 15KW this parameter value is 1 when inverter is up 15KW this parameter value is 0 Energy consumption Range 115 0 145 0 5 Er braking voltage rated busbar voltage 1254096 F02 24 Energy consumption Range 0 06 100 0 100 0 braking use rate Energy consumption braking function is only valid for built in brake unit FO2 23 defines energy consumption braking busbar voltage threshold value FO2 24
67. don t need change Motor driven torque Range 0 0 250 0 Valid 5 Bis current limit value when F00 24 1 2 and 3 1800 6 Braking torgue Range 0 0 250 0 Valid 5 Brel current limit value when F00 24 1 or 2 ED It is the range of output torque of speed loop defined by the positive torque and negative torque limit When the application needs quick acceleration and deceleration this parameter can be appropriately increased to meet the specific requirements However if it s too large the drive tends to over current In torque control mode the range of actual torque output is restricted to the above limit too Asynchronous motor 7 o F14 11 flux weakening control Ranges 20 0 SUV Oe 80 0 when F00 24 1 or 2 coefficient Asynchronous motor Range 10 0 80 0 Valid i EA Min flux coefficient when F00 24 1 or 2 EO Parameters of F14 11 F14 12 Used to correcting the weakening curve in weakening field The correction of the curve will improve the precision of speed control during weakening field The minimum field reference is the minimum value of weakening field And F14 12 is just available for Closed loop vector control mode F14 13 Torque provision channel selection Range 0 8 0 0 Digital setting 1 AT1 analog provision 0 10V or 4 20mA corresponds to 0 200 0 Rated torque current of the motor 2 AI2 analog provision 3 Terminal UP DOWN adjusting 4 Communic
68. e fare invalid 3 Effective command frame length is 14 or 18 byte B 2 5 Explanation and description for format 1 Frame head 699 It s character namely hex 7E single byte 2 Auxiliary device address Data meanings local address of auxiliary device double byte ASCII format Inverter factory default is 01 3 Mainframe command auxiliary device respond Data meanings mainframe send out command and auxiliary device respond to the command Double byte ASCII format Response code function classification Species 1 gt command code 10 mainframe ask auxiliary device to report current preparation state and control situation Table B 1 Command code meanings for response frame response area Response Meanings code Preparation state of Control from mainframe To set frequency is ASCII auxiliary device is allowed allowed 10 Haven t get ready No meaning 11 Get ready Allow Allow 12 Get ready Allow Allow 13 Get ready Don t allow Don t allow 14 Get ready Don t allow Don t allow 20 Frame error Species 2 gt command code 11 15 5 kinds of function command which mainframe send to auxiliary device for detail please see protocol command list 242 Appendix B Free port communication protocol Table B 2 Response code meanings for response frame command index area Response code Meanings of response code Description ASCII Auxiliary devic
69. eee eee eee eee eee Tee eee eee ee 8 2 7 ENS00 optional base tte ee tee ees see ee ee Ee Ee ee ee Ee EER Ee ees ees arene 10 2 8 Outer size of keypad and its fixing box ee ee eke EER ee ER EER ee eke ee 12 2 9 Product technic index and spec tee Ee EE ER rr rr EER Ke ER ee se ee 13 3 Installation and wiring tee see ees ee ER EER EE ER EER EE ER EER ee ER EER ee eke ee 16 31 Installation ambient eest ee r es i e eian 16 3 1 1 The demands for installation ambient sere ees se ee sees 16 3 1 2 Installation direction and space tese ee EER EE ER EER EE ER ee 16 3 2 Parts disassembly and installation tettetett eke eek ee eke EER EE ER ees ee ee 17 3 2 1 Keyboard disassembly and installation reses ese ees ses ees 17 3 2 2 Cover disassembly and installation ree EE EE EE EE EE EE ee 17 3 3 Wiring notice points trees ees ee ER EER EE ER EER EE ER EER ee eke EER ee eke ee 18 3 4 Main loop terminal wiring tse see see ees Ke ER EER EE ER SEER EE ER cee se ee 19 3 4 1 Connection between inverter and fitting parts sees sesse sees 21 3 4 2 Main loop terminal wiring tees see eek KEER EE eke EER EE ER EER ee ee 21 3 5 Basic running wiring diagram tse esse ese ee ee EER EE ER EER RE ER ee see 25 3 6 Control loop collocation and wiring tees e eke EER EE ER EER EE ER ees see 25 3 6 1 Relative location and function for control board terminal and slide switch TT EE EE 25 3 6 2 Descriptions for control board terminal sers ees ses
70. group parameter For example Setting F05 18 00 00 indicates that mapping FO5 18 00 00 as input parameterl 1 xx represents function code 2 F25 xx represents not mapping 3 By this way some incontinuity parameter can be together to read the data and using the input mapping application parameter ES to increase the communication efficiency For example if reading Note F00 00 F01 10 F02 02 and F03 04 you can map the above mentioned parameters to F05 18 F05 19 F05 20 F05 21 and F05 22 Under RTU communication mode only 1 continuous reading 5 groups of parameter commands 01 03 05 12 00 05 24 D1 can read 5 groups of parameter values thus improving communication efficiency F05 28 Reserved F05 39 127 7 Detailed function specification 7 7 Setting curve parameter group F06 F06 00 Setting curve selection Range units digit 0 2 tens digit 0 2 hundreds digit 0 2 thousands digit 0 2 0000 Units digit AI1 curve selection 0 curve 1 1 curve 2 2 curve 3 Tens digit AI2 curve selection Same as units digit Hundreds digit rapid pulse curve selection Same as units digit Thousands digit Pulse width setting curve selection Same as units digit This function code tens digit hundreds digit and thousands digit are used to select analog quantity input AIl AI2 rapid pulse input and pulse width input signal setting curve Curve and 2 are 3 po
71. include the step running frequency and running time when power off it restart with the mode that set in hundreds digit after power on again No matter power off storage in stop status or running status you B should set thousands digit as 1 thereafter set tens digit as 1 or Note 2 otherwise power off storage function is ineffective F10 01 Step 1 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 02 Step 2 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 03 Step 3 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 04 Step 4 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 05 Step 5 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 06 Step 6 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 07 Step 7 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 08 Step 8 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 09 Step 9 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 10 Step 10 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 11 Step 11 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 12 Step 12 setting Range 000H E22H 000 164 7 Detailed function specification F10 13 Step 13 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 14 Step 14 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 15 Step 15 setting Range 000H E22H 000 F10 01 F10 15 are used to configure the operating frequency direction and Acc Dec time of each PLC operating step These functions are all selected by digits on different place of parameters Details as below Unit digit Frequency setting 0 select multi frequency i i 1 15 please refer to F10 31 F10 45 for def
72. inverter damage or spare part less otherwise it may cause fire or human injury 3 inverter should install in a place where can accept itself weight otherwise it may cause inverter drop down or belongings damage 1 Safety information and use notice points 1 2 Application range 1 This kind of inverter apply to 3 phase ac asynchronous motor only for general industry 2 It should handle cautiously and consult with manufacturer when inverter apply to high reliability required equipment which relevant to life properties and safety device 3 This kind of inverter is the general motor control device in industry When inverter apply to dangerous equipment safeguard should be considerable in case of inverter failure 1 3 Use notice points 1 EN500 EN600 series inverter belong to voltage type inverter and it is normal with up temperature noise and vibration of motor increasing over power frequency run slightly 2 It is required to match inverter with variable frequency motor running at low speed with constant torque for long time When match inverter with general asynchronous motor running at low speed it should take measures to make motor heat dissipation or monitoring motor temperature in avoid of motor flash 3 It is necessary to take measures in advance for the damage caused for the bad lubrication of the reduction box and wheel gear mechanical devices running at low speed for long time 4 It is necessary to assure a
73. is not available into the range of EN500 EN600 permit setting the User defined parameter Note will not make effective 211 7 Detailed function specification 7 27 Fault Record Function Parameter Group F26 F26 00 The last fault record Range 0 50 0 F26 01 The last two fault records Range 0 50 0 F26 02 The last three fault records Range 0 50 0 F26 03 The last four fault records Range 0 50 0 0 No fault 1 26 E 01 E 26 fault 27 29 Reserved 30 39 E 30 E 39 fault 40 50 Reserved F26 00 F26 03 definite the four times previous four code of faults and the two times previous fault for the voltage current terminal and etc of inverter users base on fault code and refer to fault function amp fault handle process then getting the results for different types of fault and reasons Setup frequency at the Range 0 00Hz upper limit F26 04 0 00Hz last one fault frequency F26 05 Output frequency at the Range 0 00Hz upper limit 0 00Hz last one fault frequency F26 06 Output current at the last Range 0 0 6553 5A 0 0A one fault F26 07 DC bus voltage at the last Range 0 0 6553 5V 0 0V one fault Module temperature at ers 4 F26 08 thelast one aal Range 0 125 C OC Input terminal status at E26 the last one fault Accumulated run time at FE z F26 10 EERS fault Range 0 65535min Omin F26 11 Setup frequency at the Range 0 00Hz
74. length control E Timing control Timing control function setting time range 0 1Min 6500 0Min Virtual terminal Five group virtual input amp output IO can realize simply logical control The parameters as setting frequency output frequency output amp Keypad display voltage output current can be displayed 3 a Button Locked Lock all or part of the buttons Protection function Motor power on Shot circuit test input amp output phase loss protection over current protection over voltage protection under voltage protection over heat protection overload protection under load protection relay absorption protection terminal protection and no stop protection under power off Application site Indoor not bare to sunlight no dust no corrosive gas no flammable gas no vapor no water drop or salt etc Under 1000 meter Cabove 1000 meter require to reduce volume to Altitude use output current reduce about 10 of rated currenvolt per 1000 z meter high se a Environment 10 C 40 C environment temperature between 40 C 50 C 5 temperature need to reduce volume or strengthen heat sink OQ 2 Environment humidity Smaller than 95 RH no drop condenses Vibration Smaller than 5 9 M S 0 6g Storage temperature 40 C 70 C 8 Protection grade IP20 Q E Cooling mode Forced air cooling and natural Installation mode Wall hanging and cabinet installation To get a perfect
75. lo QGA2IPG LZIPGS ISS 5 5 9 S 68 Ig 5 ejej e amp Slaelaglaglaea 2 209 Ed 3 3 3 S 5 n n n Send 1 2 2 4 4 2 2 byte Remark gt Slave address Single inverter ID code range 0 247 Thereinto address 00 is broadcast address gt Command code Read parameter from inverter or command of Data the value is 06 gt Register address The storage address of inverter function parameter is double byte 235 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol The high byte is in the front and the low byte is in the back The detail relation between parameter and storage address can be seen in the later excel gt Data The new value of revised parameter gt Checksum From slave address to the character before checksum the LRC checksum of the character string Response frame Response frame format ml 2 a gt a Q Q Q ne fo ole W Wj W W gt Q lam Sale 3 laslasleglesle le ole lee ERE ig 2 2 Boe BAS RS BAS 2 2 2 2 2 Q Ba Sol a 2 IEB Bld zlazla nlan pr o EE 68 2 loslosl8EIBEIK EES S S g 5 led g 5 2 ERAS jegjeg g Ba a ag Send 1 2 21 4 4 2 2 byte Remark gt Slave address Single inverter ID code range 0 247 Thereinto address 00 is broadcast address gt Command code Read parameter from inverter or command of Data the value is 06 gt Register address The storage address of inv
76. logic DO2 connection DO3 connection DO4 connection DOS connection 84 6 Function parameter schedule graph F21 Reserved Parameter Group 2 Function Name SR Min Factory Modifi code Unit Default cation F21 00 Reserved F21 21 F22 Reserved Parameter Group 3 Function Min Factory Modifi code Name Setikange Unit BEE cation F22 00 Reserved F22 17 F23 Reserved Parameter Group 4 Function Min Factory Modifi code Name Set Range Unit Default cation F23 00 Reserved F23 17 F24 Reserved Parameter Group 5 Function Min Factory Modifi code Name Sones Unit N cation F24 00 Reserved F24 13 F25 User Definition Display Parameter Group Function Min Factory Modifi code Name ER Unit Derik cation F25 00 User Function Code 1 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 F25 01 User Function Code 2 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 02 User Function Code 3 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 03 User Function Code 4 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 04 User Function Code 5 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 05 User Function Code 6 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 06 User Function Code 7 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 07 User Function Code 8 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 08 User Function Code 9 F00 00 F25 xx 0 01 25 00 o F25 09 User
77. loop and closed loop speed control mode increasing the strength of the field can realize fast decreasing of the motor when stop The energy generated during the field braking process will be consumed in a form of heat inside of the motor As a result the temperature of motor inside will increase when field 185 7 Detailed function specification braking frequently Please care about the temperature of the motor not over the allowed maximum value If an operation command be given during the process of field braking the field braking function will be canceled and the frequency inverter will operate to the set frequency again Please disable the field braking function when using braking resistor F14 25 Pre excitation start up time constant Range 0 1 3 0 Valid when F00 24 1 0 5 In SVC control mode decrease the value of F14 25 appropriately will decrease the start time of the motor realizing fast start performance Speed loop proportional Range 0 010 6 000 Valid MAG ain when F00 24 3 ve F14 27 Speed loop integral time Range 0 010 9 999 Valid 0 360 constant when F00 24 3 Adjusting F14 26 and F14 27 will change the responsive characteristic of Vector control Motor stabilization Range 10 300 Valid when F14 28 coefficient F00 24 3 ai When the motor which connected to the drive is vibration and not stable increasing F14 28 will get rid of the vibration Z z 7 5 z F14 29 C
78. man BE aeon Range 10 0 50 0 20 0 initiation segment time S curve acceleration up segment time roga eel ion Range 10 0 50 0 20 0 initiation segment time S curve deceleration up segment time F01 21 F01 24 select S curve acceleration and deceleration mode F01 20 1 valid only under acceleration and deceleration and F01 21 F01 22 lt 90 F01 23 F01 24 lt 90 S curve starts interval time as fig 7 2 output frequency changed slope increase slowly from zero F01 22 Range 10 0 70 0 60 0 F01 24 Range 10 0 70 0 60 0 S curve up interval time as fig 7 2 output frequency changed slope is constant S curve ends interval time as fig 7 2 output frequency changed slope decrease slowly to zero F01 25 Keyboard jog run frequency a 5 00Hz F01 26 Terminal jog run frequency ET RE 5 00Hz F01 27 Jog interval time Range 0 0 100 0s 0 0s F01 28 Jog acceleration time Range 0 0 6000 0s 20 0s F01 29 Jog deceleration time Range 0 0 6000 0s 20 0s 106 7 Detailed function specification F01 25 F1 26 defines keyboard jog and terminal jog run frequency when jog run accelerate as the zero frequency and not effect by the start mode defined by parameter F02 00 When jog command revocation stop as setting halt mode when input another command during the deceleration accelerate or decelerate according to the current frequency F1 27 defies valid command in
79. o F10 27 Step 12 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 28 Step 13 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 29 Step 14 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 30 Step 15 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 31 Multi frequency 1 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 5 00Hz o F10 32 Multi frequency 2 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 10 00Hz o F10 33 Multi frequency 3 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 20 00Hz o F10 34 Multi frequency 4 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 30 00Hz o F10 35 Multi frequency 5 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 40 00Hz o F10 36 Multi frequency 6 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 45 00Hz o F10 37 Multi frequency 7 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 50 00Hz o F10 38 Multi frequency 8 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 5 00Hz o F10 39 Multi frequency 9 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 10 00Hz o F10 40 Multi frequency 10 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 20 00Hz o F10 41 Multi frequency 11 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 30 00Hz o F10 42 Multi frequency 12 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 40 00Hz o F10 43 Multi frequency 13 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 45 00Hz o F10 44 Multi frequency 14 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 50 00Hz o F10 45 Multi frequency 15 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 50 00Hz o 72 6 Function parameter schedule graph F11 Close loop PID run function parameter group
80. of long distance F12 06 manometer Range 0 001 9 999Mpa 1 000Mpa This parameter defines the range of long distance manometer Setting this parameter can correspond to the maximum feedback pressure with the analog feedback signal 10V or 20mA Allowed deviation of upper limit frequency or lower limit frequency when add or reduce pump F12 07 Range 0 1 100 0 1 0 When output frequency reaches the deviation range of upper limited frequency and the feedback is less than given value adding pumps judge is available When output frequency reaches the deviation range of lower limited frequency and the feedback is more than given value decreasing pumps judge is available When F12 07 0 0 output frequency reach upper or lower limitation frequency and the pressure meets the requirement then decrease pumps is available F12 08 Pump switch judging time Range 0 0 999 9s 5 0s When the output frequency up to the upper limit frequency F11 15 but the pressure still not meeting the requirement the system will add pump after the judging time When the output frequency down to the lower limit frequency F11 16 but the pressure still not meeting the requirement the system will reduce pump after the judging time F12 09 Electromagnetic contactor switching delay time Range 0 1 10 0s 0 5s 176 7 Detailed function specification This parameter de
81. parameter schedule graph 0 0 10V output 1 4 20mA output Thousands digit EAO2 configuration 0 0 10V output 1 4 20mA output F00 22 Y output terminal configuration Units digit Hundreds digit reserved Thousands digit Y4 output configuration 0 Open collector output 1 DO output 0000 F00 23 G P type setup 0 G type 1 P type Note P type is only for V F control F00 24 Motor control mode 0 V F control object to torque control 1 speed less sensor vector control 1 compare to speed less sensor vector control 2 this control mode is more suitable for asynchronous motor lt 160KW support speed and vector control 2 speed sensor vector control support asynchronous motor speed and torque control 3 speed less sensor vector control 2 only support asynchronous motor speed control this control mode is more suitable for motor gt 185KW F00 25 Monitor parameter 2 selection The same as parameter F00 01 F00 26 Busbar voltage adjustment coefficient 0 900 1 100 1 000 F00 27 Parameters copying and Language selection Units digit Language only valid for LCD keypad 0 Chinese 1 English 2 Reserved Tens digit parameter upload and download valid for LCD and digital potentiometer keypad 0 Inaction 1 parameter upload 2 parameter download 00 F01 Basic Run Function Parameter Group Function Code Name Se
82. record at present F13 14 Processes of length record when stop Range 0 1 1 0 Reset The counter reset automatically when stop the drive 1 Keep the record When stop the drive the counter keep the record at present 181 7 Detailed function specification 7 15 Vector Control parameters Group F14 F14 00 Speed Torque control selection Range 0 1 0 Speed control mode 1 Torque control mode this parameter is effective when set F00 24 as 1 or 2 When the control mode is vector control with PG or without PG the user can select torque control or speed control by setting the parameter of F14 00 or through control multi function terminal which selected as No 65 function F14 01 Speed loop high speed Range 0 1 40 0 Valid when 20 0 proportional Gain F00 24 1 or 2 IE eee E TE apr EE NET AE od DES EE EE HERE Through F14 01 to F14 05 you can set the proportional gain and integral time of Speed loop regulator so as to change the speed response characteristic under vector control mode The system dynamic response of speed loop can be faster if the proportional gain is increased or the integral time is decreased However if the proportional gain is too large or the integral time is too small the system tends to oscillate The suggested adjusting way as below When the default parameter is not suitable please fine adjust the parameters
83. reduces carrier freq so as to reduce inverter temperature rise When radiator temperature is relatively low carrier freq gradually restores to set value This function can reduce inverter overheat alarm Digit low speed carrier freq limit mode 0 No limit 1 Limit Limit carrier wave at low speed improve stability performance of revolving speed at low speed Hundreds digit carrier wave modulation system 0 3 phase modulation 1 2 phase and 3 phase modulation Thousands digit Asynchronous modulation synchronization mode valid under V F control 0 Asynchronous modulation 1 Synchronous modulation under 85Hz Asynchronous modulation 1 When units digit is set as 1 after reaching overheat warning alarm point carrier wave will decrease to 1 5KHz when the temperature decrease to 5 C lower than overheat warning alarm point carrier freq will automatically rise to the set carrier freq 2 Synchronous modulation it means that carrier freq changes when output frequency changes it guarantees that the ratio N carrier ratio between the two does not change generally used ote when output frequency is high conducive to input voltage quality When output frequency is low 85Hz or below generally no need of synchronous modulation so at this time carrier freq and output frequency ratio is relatively high advantages of asynchronous modulation are more apparent When operating frequency is higher than 85Hz Sync
84. reset 64 Reset this operation time 65 speed torque control switching 66 90 Reserved 91 Pulse frequency input X8 VALID 92 Pulse width PWM INPUT X8 VALID 93 96 Reserved RRA Kr rs KR F08 19 Input terminal X2 function selection Same as above F08 20 Input terminal X3 function selection Same as above F08 21 Input terminal X4 Same as above 66 6 Function parameter schedule graph Function selection F08 22 Input terminal X5 Same as above 1 0 x function selection F08 23 Input terminal X6 Same as above 1 0 x function selection F08 24 Input terminal X7 Same as above 1 0 x function selection FO8 25 Input terminal X8 Same as above 1 0 x function selection FO8 26 FWD REV operating 0 Two wire control mode 1 1 0 x mode selection 1 Two wire control mode 2 2 Two wire control mode 3 monopulse control mode 3 Three wire control mode 1 4 Three wire control mode 2 FO8 27 Set internal count value 0 65535 1 0 o to setting F08 28 Specify internal count 0 65535 1 0 o to setting F08 29 Internal timer timing 0 17 6000 0s 0 1s 60 0s o setting F08 30 Terminal pulse encoder 0 01 10 00Hz only be effective by given 0 01Hz 1 00Hz o frequency rate X1 X2 encoder F08 31 Reserved F09 On off analog output function parameter group Function Min Facto Modifi Code ETE Sa R
85. shown in Fig 7 21 When Xi inputs the eighth pulse Y loutputs one indicating signal At this moment F8 27 8 When Xi Counting trigger signal input function terminal output pulse reaches F08 28 defined value Y2 Y2 is set as internal counter specified value to outputs one indicating signal until set count value arrives As shown in Fig 7 21 when Xi inputs the fifth pulse Y2 starts outputting one indicating signal Until set count value 8 arrives F08 28 5 When specified count value is greater than set count value specified count value Invalid Xi input i 2 2 4 5 7 i 9 Y1 Y2 Fig 7 21 set count value setting and specified count value setting 148 7 Detailed function specification F08 29 Internal timer timing setting Range 0 1 6000 0s 60 0s This parameter sets timing time of inverter internal timer timer is triggered by external triggering terminal Xi terminal function no is 61 the timer starts timing upon receiving external triggering signal After reaching timing time Yi terminal outputs a breadth of 0 5s valid pulse signal When internal timer clearing terminal is valid Xi terminal function is set as 60 internal timer is reset FOS 30 oo pulse encoder Range 0 01 10 00Hz 1 00Hz frequency rate This parameter defines main frequency regulation speed during terminal pulse encoder setti
86. supply mode the four parameters must all set to this value the terminal functions can be achieved 41 Communication given In this moment the output of Yi is controlled by communication Please refer to the related communication protocol for details 153 7 Detailed function specification 42 60 Reserved F09 05 Detection amplitude of frequency arrival FAR Range 0 00 50 00Hz 5 00Hz This parameter is added in the definition of Table 7 10 on the 12th functions As shown in Figure 7 23 when the inverter output frequency in the setting frequency of positive and negative detection width output indication signal Range 0 00Hz upper F09 06 FDT1 frequency leveDlevel 10 00Hz limit frequency F09 07 FDT1 lag Range 0 00 50 00Hz 1 00Hz F09 08 FDT2 frequency levellevel Range 0 00Hz upper 10 00Hz limit frequency F09 09 FDT2 lag Range 0 00 50 00Hz 1 00Hz F09 06 F09 07 is in the definition of Table 7 10 on the 13 Functions F09 08 FO9 08 is in the definition of Table 7 10 on the 14 functions take an example of 13 Output freq FDT level FDT lag functions When the output frequency Time exceeds a certain setting frequency FDT1 level output indicator Signal until the output frequency drops below the certain frequency FDT1 frequency level FDT1 level FDT1 lag As shown in Fig 7 24 Freq level detection diagram Figure 7 24
87. then pressing Gus return to C 00 parameter monitor Monitor contents various as different monitor parameter refer to parameter FOO O1 Monitor parameter group C 00 C 05 have run and stop modes For example C 00 display different physical value under run and Note stop two modes F00 13 Power on fault monitor EES 0 parameter selection When the parameter power on first time C monitor parameter group display under drive run or stop status For example FO0 13 1 power on or stop to monitor display parameter setup by C 01 when F00 02 3 FOO 08 6 power on inverter stops busbar voltage display inverter runs output frequency and keypad display Pressing ENTER monitor C 00 for the setting motor value Range units digit 0 2 tens digit 0 5 000 hundreds digit 0 4 Parameter operation LDL control Units digit To define which parameters will be allowed to modify 0 All parameters are allowed to modification 1 Excerpt this parameter the other parameter is not allowed to modification 2 Except F01 01 F01 04 and this parameter the others parameter are not allowed to modification Tens digit To define which parameters will be resumed factory default value 0 No action 1 All parameters return to default not include fault record parameter group F26 group parameter 2 Except for motor parameter all parameters return to default not include F15 and F26 group parameter
88. time F00 24 1 or 2 F14 09 Motor driven torque 0 0 250 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 180 0 x A current limit value F00 24 1 or 2 or 3 F14 10 Braking torque current 0 0 250 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 180 0 x limit value F00 24 1 or 2 Asynchronous motor 20 0 100 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 80 0 o F14 11 flux weakening control F00 24 1 or 2 coefficient F14 12 Asynchronous motor 10 0 80 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 10 0 o i Min flux coefficient F00 24 2 F14 13 Torgue provision 0 Digital setting 1 0 x channel selection 1 AIl Analog setting 2 AD Analog setting 3 Terminal UP DOWN adjustment setting 4 communication provision 5 EAI Analog setting expansion effective 6 EAI2 Analog setting expansion effective 7 rapid pulse setting X8 terminal needs to choose the corresponding function 8 terminal pulse width setting X8 terminal needs to choose the corresponding function Note This parameter is valid when F00 24 1 or 2 F14 14 Torque polarity setting 00 11 1 00 o Units digit torque setting polarity 0 positive 1 negative Tens digit torque compensation polarity 0 The same as setting direction of torque 1 opposite the setting direction of torque Note This parameter is valid when F00 24 1 or PA F14 15 Torque digital setting 0 0 200 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 0 0 o value F00 24 1 or 2 76 6 Function parameter sche
89. 0 valid 0 valid 0 valid 0 valid 0 valid 0 invalid invalid invalid invalid invalid invalid invalid invalid Bit8 EX1 Extended input terminal 1 1 valid 0 invalid Bit9 EX2 Extended input terminal 2 1 valid 0 invalid Bit10 EX3 Extended input terminal 3 1 valid 0 invalid Bitl1 EX4 Extended input terminal 4 1 valid 0 invalid Bit12 EXS Extended input terminal 5 1 valid 0 invalid BIT13 EX6 Extended input terminal 6 1 valid 0 invalid 213 7 Detailed function specification 7 28 Password and Manufacturer Function Parameter Group F27 F27 00 User password Range 00000 65535 00000 User password setting function is used for preventing unauthorized persons from checking and modifying the functional parameters Set F27 00 to 00000 if the user password function is unnecessary If user password function is necessary input a 5 digitnone zero figure and press n D to confirm The password is effective at once gt To change the password Press r and input the primary password selectF27 00 F27 00 00000 at the moment then input new password and press to confirm The password is effective at once To cancel the password Press into the state of verification and enter the original correct 5 digit password into the state of parameter editing then select F27 00 F27 00 00000 at the moment and directly press 7 D to confirm the password can be canceled 3
90. 0 10 0 F10 30 Step 15 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 Parameters F10 16 F10 30 defined Running time of each PLC Step from Step 1 to Step 15 ae step running time include Ace time and De time 00 Note www F10 31 Multi Freguency 1 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 5 00Hz F10 32 Multi Freguency 2 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 10 00Hz F10 33 Multi Frequency 3 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 20 00Hz F10 34 Multi Freguency 4 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 30 00Hz F10 35 Multi Frequency 5 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 40 00Hz F10 36 Multi Frequency 6 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 45 00Hz F10 37 Multi Frequency 7 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 50 00Hz F10 38 Multi Frequency 8 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 5 00Hz F10 39 Multi Frequency 9 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 10 00Hz F10 40 Multi Frequency 10 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 20 00Hz F10 41 Multi Frequency 11 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 30 00Hz F10 42 Multi Frequency 12 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 40 00Hz 166 7 Detailed function specification F10 43 Multi Frequency 13 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 45 00Hz F10 44 Multi Frequency 14 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 50 00Hz F10 45 Multi Frequency 15 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Freq 50 00Hz Frequency will be used in Multi speed operation mode and Simple PLC o
91. 00 4T0185G 0220P Optional No 2270 PCS ZIKW 21 8KW 268 Appendix F Braking unit and braking resistance EN600 4T0220G 0300P Optional No 2220 1PCS 211KW 22 2KW EN600 4T0300G 0370P Optional No 2190 1PCS 215KW 23KW EN600 4T0370G 0450P Optional No 216 80 1PCS 218 5KW 23 7KW EN600 4T0450G 0550P_ Optional No 2130 1PCS 222KW Z4 5KW EN600 4T0550G 0750P_ Optional No 2119 1PCS 228KW 25 5KW 269 ENC Address 5 6F Bldg 4 Minqi Technology Park Lishan Rd Nanshan Area Shenzhen 518055 China E mail encvfd encvfd com Website http www encvfd com
92. 0015P 2 3 3 7 0 75 1 5 EN600 4T0015G 0022P 3 7 5 1 5 2 2 EN600 4T0022G 0037P 5 8 5 2 2 3 7 EN600 4T0037G 8 5 3 7 EN600 4T0055P 13 5 5 EN600 4T0055G 0075P 13 17 5 5 7 5 EN600 4T0075G 0110P 17 25 75 11 EN600 4T0110G 0150P 25 33 11 15 EN600 4T0150G 0185P 33 39 15 18 5 EN600 4T0185G 0220P 39 45 18 5 22 EN600 4T0220G 0300P 45 60 22 30 EN600 4T0300G 0370P 60 75 30 37 EN600 4T0370G 0450P 75 91 37 45 3 phase EN600 4T0450G 0550P 91 112 45 55 380V EN600 4T0550G 0750P 112 150 55 75 EN500 4T0750G 0900P 150 176 75 90 EN500 4T0900G 1100P 176 210 90 110 EN500 4T1100G 1320P 210 253 110 132 EN500 4T1320G 1600P 253 304 132 160 EN500 4T 1600G 2000P 304 380 160 200 EN500 4T2000G 2200P 380 426 200 220 EN500 4T2200G 2500P 426 474 220 250 EN500 4T2500G 2800P 474 520 250 280 EN500 4T2800G 3150P 520 600 280 315 EN500 4T3 150G 3550P 600 650 315 355 EN500 4T3550G 3750P 650 680 355 375 EN500 4T3750G 4000P 680 750 375 400 EN500 4T4000G 4500P 750 800 400 450 2 Inverter type and specification EN500 4T4500G S000P 800 870 450 500 EN500 4T5000G 5600P 870 940 500 560 EN500 4T5600G 6300P 940 1100 560 630 EN500 4T6300G 1100 630 2 5 Appearance and parts name explanation 2 5 1 EN600 Appearance and parts name explanation LED digital tube _ LED digital tube Upcover plate upcover plate S Operation keyboard Operation keyboard Down cover plate Down cover plate Control cable inlet Nameplate Control
93. 0130197 r no Analog input AI1 00 14 no 010B00140198 r no Analog input AI2 00 15 no 010B00150199 r no Exp nding analog input 00 16 no 010B0016019A r no EAI Expanding analog input 00 i7 010B0017019B r EAD no no Analog AOL oo 18 no 010B0018019C r no output Analog AO2 output 00 19 no 010B0019019D r no Expanding analog EAQI o0 1A no O10BO0IAQIAS r no output Expanding analog EAO2 00 1B no 010B001B01A6 r no output External pulse input 00 1C no 010B001CO1A7 r 1Hz frequency Reserved Process PID provision 00 1E no 010B001E01A9 r 0 01V Process PID feedback 00 1F no 010B001F02AAV 0 01V Process PID error 00 20 no 010B00200195 r 0 01V Process PID output 00 21 no 010B00210196 r 0 01Hz Simple PEC current o 22 no 010B00220197 r no segments Frema l milti section 00 23 no 010B00230198 r no speed current segments Provision pressure for oo 24 ia 010B00240199 r 0 001Mp constant pressure water a Feedback pressure for oo 25 FR 010B0025019A r 0 001Mp constant pressure water a Relay state for constant oo 26 ie 0108002601 9B r g pressure water Current length 00 27 no 010B0027019C r no Accumulative length 00 28 no 010B0028019D r no Current internal count 00 29 no 010B0029019E r no Current internal time 00 2A no 010B002A01A6 r no Setting channel for run 00 2B no 010B002B01A7 r no command Matnarequencyiprovision 00 2c no 010B002C01A8 no channel Auxiliary frequency S
94. 01s 0 100s o Accelerate Decelerate F00 24 1 or 2 time setting F14 21 Torgue compensation 0 0 100 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 0 0 o F00 24 1 or 2 F14 22 Positive torque gain 50 0 150 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 100 0 o regulation coefficient F00 24 1 or 2 F14 23 Negative torque gain 50 0 150 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 100 0 o regulation coefficient F00 24 1 or 2 F14 24 Flux braking coefficient 0 0 300 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 0 0 o F00 24 1 or 2 F14 25 Pre excitation start up 0 1 3 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 0 5 x time constant F00 24 1 F14 26 Speed loop proportional J0 010 6 000 This parameter is valid when 0 001 0 500 o gain F00 24 3 F14 27 Speed loop integral 0 010 9 999 This parameter is valid when 0 001 0 360 o time constant F00 24 3 F14 28 Motor stabilization 10 300 This parameter is valid when 1 100 o coefficient F00 24 3 F14 29 Compensation gain of 100 0 130 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 100 0 o vibration restrain F00 24 3 F14 30 Torque compensation 0 00Hz upper limit frequency This parameter 0 01Hz 0 00Hz o limit frequency is valid when F00 24 1 or 2 77 6 Function parameter schedule graph F15 Asynchronous Motor Parameter Group Function Name SERE Min Factory Modifi code U
95. 0Hz x F04 05 Jump freq 3 range 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz x 58 6 Function parameter schedule graph F04 06 Slip freq gain 0 0 300 0 0 1 0 0 x F04 07 Slip compensation 0 0 250 0 0 1 100 0 z limit F04 08 Slip compensation 0 1 25 0s o s 20s Ag time constant F04 09 Carrier freq 0 5 16 0K 0 1K Based o on motor type F04 10 PWM optimized Units digit Carrier freq is adjusted 1 0110 x adjustment automatically according to temperature 0 Banned 1 Allowed Tens digit low speed carrier freq limit mode 0 No limit 1 Limit Hundreds digit carrier wave modulation system 0 3 phase modulation 1 2 phase and 3 phase modulation Thousands digit Asynchronous modulation synchronization mode valid under V F control 0 Asynchronous modulation 1 Synchronous modulation under 85Hz Asynchronous modulation F04 11 AVR function 0 No action 1 0 x 1 Action all the time 2 No action only during deceleration F04 12 Reserved F04 13 Automatic energy saving 0 No action 1 0 x operation 1 Action F04 14 Acceleration time 2 and 1 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz x switchover frequency F04 15 Deceleration time 2 and 1 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz x switchover frequency F04 16 Acceleration time 2 1 60000 1 200 o F04 17 Deceleration time 2 1 60000
96. 0P 1000 1000 150 2 150 2 5 EN500 4T3550G 3750P 1000 1000 185 2 185 2 5 EN500 4T3750G 4000P 1250 1250 240 2 240 2 5 EN500 4T4000G 4500P 1250 1250 240 2 240 2 5 EN500 4T4500G 5000P 1250 1250 270 2 270 2 ka EN500 4T5000G 5600P 1600 1600 270 2 270 2 5 EN500 4T5600G 6300P 1600 1600 300 2 300 2 S EN500 4T6300G 2000 2000 300 2 300 2 1 5 20 3 Installation and wiring 3 4 1 Connection between inverter and fitting parts 1 Breaking device like isolation E Switch must assemble between power source and inverter to keep persona safety under repairing and inverter requirement for compulsory power off 2 There must be over current Protection breaker or fuse in inverter power supply circuit to avoid failure expanding because of the second device failure N E E Ac input reactor In option 3 AC input reactor When high harmonics between inverter and power supply is strong which cannot os Input EMI filter In option meet system requirement or input side power factor need to improve ac input reactor can be added El 4 Contactor is used to power supply only INSOO ENGOR 4 do not use it to control inverter start and stop 5 Input side EMI filter UVW hoosing optionally EMI filter to ANT restrain high frequency transduction 1 Input EMI filter In option interference and radio frequency er interference from inverter power line ME I 6 Output side EMI filter we Choosing optionally EMI filter to M restrain radio frequen
97. 1 170 x level F19 15 Freguency decline rate 0 00 99 99Hz s 0 01Hz s 10 00Hz s x of automatic current limit 81 6 Function parameter schedule graph F19 16 Automatic current limit 0 constant velocity invalid 1 0 action selection 1 constant velocity valid F19 17 Rapid current limiting 150 250 G type rated current 1 230 coefficient F19 18 Motor run section 0 forbid 1 0 selection when instant 1 allowed power off F19 19 Freguency droop rate 0 00 99 99Hz s 0 01Hz s 10 00Hz s when instant power off F19 20 Voltage rebound 0 00 10 00s 0 01s 0 10s estimate time when instant power off F19 21 Action estimate voltage 60 100 rated busbar voltage 1 80 when instant power off F19 22 Allowed the longest off 0 30 5 00s 0 01s 2 00s time when instant power off F19 23 Terminal external device 0 alarm continuous run 1 2 ault action selection l alarm stop run as halt mode 2 fault free halt F19 24 Power on terminal O invalid 1 0 protection selection 1 valid F19 25 Provide lost detection 0 100 1 0 value F19 26 Provide lost detection 0 0 20 0s 0 1s 0 58 time F19 27 Feedback lost detection 0 100 1 12 value F19 28 Feedback lost 0 0 20 0s 0 1s 0 58 detection time F19 29 Deviation magnitude 0 100 1 50 abnormal detection value F19 30 Deviation magnitude 0 0 20 0s 0 1s 0 58 abnormal detection time F19 31 Protection actio
98. 1 frequency after Acce Dece 0 01Hz 52 motor rotor frequency 0 01Hz 53 current given torque percentage relative to rated torque with direction 54 current output torque percentage relative to rated torque with direction 55 torque current at present 0 1A 56 flux current at present 0 1A 57 65 Reserved 4 4 4 4 4 4 F00 02 C 01 display Same as above 2 o parameter selection when operation F00 03 C 02 display Same as above 4 o parameter selection when operation F00 04 C 03 display Same as above 5 o parameter selection when operation F00 05 C 04 display Same as above 6 o parameter selection when operation F00 06 C 05 display Same as above 9 o parameter selection when operation F00 07 C 00 display Same as above 2 o parameter selection when stop F00 08 C 01 display Same as above 6 o parameter selection 51 6 Function parameter schedule graph when stop F00 09 C 02 display parameter selection when stop Same as above 48 F00 10 C 03 display parameter selection when stop Same as above 14 F00 11 C 04 display parameter selection when stop Same as above 20 F00 12 C 05 display parameter selection when stop Same as above F00 13 Power on fault monitor parameter selection 0 5 F00 14 Parameter operation control Units digit Parameter modi
99. 1 running at the upper limiting frequency 2 running at the lower limit frequency 3 running at the fault Alternate frequency Abnormal standby Range 0 00Hz upper limit F19 37 frequency frequency This parameter definite the alternative running frequency when inverter fault user can use it along with parameterF 19 36 F19 38 Disconnection testing Range 0 0 8 0s_ time of encoder No detection while at 0 When the inverter runs with the closed loop vector mode the detection starts while the run frequency is higher than 1Hz when the A B phase signal of the encoder continues for the time set in F19 38 and no feedback has been received then the inverter alarms the fault of E 37 and freely stop 10 00Hz 0 0s i 0 F19 39 Overspeed detection Range 0 0 120 0 Yo 120 0 value equals upper limit frequency Overspeed detection Range 0 00 20 00s EEN time no detection while at 0 DUS Under the open loop or the closed loop vector mode when it was detected that the motor rotational speed is higher than the setting value of F19 39 and after the continue time of F19 40 s setting value the inverter alarms fault of E 38 and freely stop No detection when F19 40 equals 0 but detection is still available when F19 39 equals 0 i 0 F19 41 Detection value of too Range 0 0 50 0 10 0 large speed deviation equals upper limit frequency Detection time of t
100. 1 200 o F04 18 Acceleration time 3 1 60000 1 200 o F04 19 Deceleration time 3 1 60000 1 200 o F04 20 Acceleration time 4 1 60000 1 200 o F04 21 Deceleration time 4 1 60000 1 200 o F04 22 Acceleration time 5 1 60000 1 200 o F04 23 Deceleration time 5 1 60000 1 200 o F04 24 Acceleration time 6 1 60000 1 200 o F04 25 Deceleration time 6 1 60000 1 200 o F04 26 Acceleration time 7 1 60000 1 200 o F04 27 Deceleration time 7 1 60000 1 200 o F04 28 Acceleration time 8 1 60000 1 200 o F04 29 Deceleration time 8 1 60000 1 200 o F04 30 Acceleration time 9 1 60000 1 200 G F04 31 Deceleration time 9 1 60000 1 200 o F04 32 Acceleration time 10 1 60000 1 200 o F04 33 Deceleration time 10 1 60000 1 200 o F04 34 Acceleration time 11 1 60000 1 200 o F04 35 Deceleration time 11 1 60000 1 200 o F04 36 Acceleration time 12 1 60000 1 200 o F04 37 Deceleration time 12 1 60000 1 200 o F04 38 Acceleration time 13 1 60000 1 200 o dil Oo 6 Function parameter schedule graph F04 39 Deceleration time 13 1 60000 200 F04 40 Acceleration time 14 1 60000 200 F04 41 Deceleration time 14 1 60000 200 F04 42 Acceleration time 15 1 60000 200 F04 43 Deceleration time 15 1 60000 200 ololololo F05 Terminal correlative function parameter group Function Code Name Set Range Min Unit Factory Default Modifi cation F05 00 protoco
101. 1 6000 0s 0 1s 20 0s o time F02 Start stop forward reverse brake function parameter group Function Min Factory Modifi Code Dame padre Unit Default cation F02 00 Start running 0 Start from starting frequency 1 0 x mode 1 First brake and then start from starting frequency 2 Start by revolving speed tracking F02 01 Starting delay 0 0 60 0s 0 1s 0 0s x time F02 02 Starting frequency 0 0 10 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00Hz x F02 03 Starting frequency 0 0 60 0s 0 1s 0 0s x duration time F02 04 DC braking 0 0 100 0 G type inverter rated current 0 1 30 0 x current when starting F02 05 DC braking 0 0 30 0s 0 1s 0 0s x time when starting F02 06 Speed trac 0 Current setting frequency 1 2 x starting frequency 1 Running frequency before power down selection 2 Speed track auxiliary starting frequency F02 07 Speed trac 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 10 00Hz x auxiliary starting frequency F02 08 Speed trac 0 00 10 00s 0 01s 0 10s x starting waiting time F02 09 Speed track current 1 20 1 2 x control coefficient F02 10 Speed trac 0 1 30 0 V F control unit is 1 second SVC 0 1 4 0 x searching speed control unit is 0 1 second time F02 11 Stop mode 0 Deceleration stop 1 0 o 1 Free stop 2 Deceleration DC braking stop F02 12 Deceleration stop 0 00 upper limit frequency This parameter is 0 01Hz 0 00Hz x holding frequency only valid for stop mode 0 F02 13 Deceleration stop 0 00 10 00s 0 01s 0 00s x holdin
102. 10 00V 0 01V 0 00V o provision 5 F11 28 Multiple closed loop 0 00 10 00V 0 01V 0 00V o provision 6 F11 29 Multiple closed loop 0 00 10 00V 0 01V 0 00V o provision 7 F12 Constant Pressure Water Supply Function Parameter Group Function m Sira Min Factory Modifi code unit Default cation F12 00 Constant pressure water 0 no constant pressure water supply 1 0 x supply mode selection 1 select inverter to achieve one drive two mode 2 select extend board to achieve one drive two mode 3 select extend board to achieve one drive three mode 4 select extend board to achieve one drive four mode F12 01 Target pressure setting 0 000 long distance pressure gage 0 001Mpa 0 200Mpa range F12 02 Sleep frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 30 00Hz o threshold F12 03 Awake pressure 0 000 long distance pressure gage range 0 001Mpa 0 150Mpa o threshold F12 04 Sleep delay time 0 0 6000 0s 0 1s 0 0s o F12 05 Revival delay time 0 0 6000 0s 0 1s 0 0s F12 06 The range of long distance 0 001 9 999Mpa 0 001Mpa 1 000Mpa manometer F12 07 allowed deviation of upper 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 o limit frequency and lower limit frequency when add or reduce pump F12 08 Pump switch 0 0 999 9s 0 1s 5 0s o judging time F12 09 Electromagnetism 0 1 10 0s 0 1s 0 58 o contactor switching delay time 74 6 Function parameter schedule graph
103. 11 01 and F11 02 F12 02 Sleep frequency threshola Range 0 00Hz upper 30 00Hz limit frequency F12 03 Revival pressure threshold Fa EE 0 150Mpa The function of Sleep frequency threshold To save energy and protect the motor when the water feedback pressure within the offset limit F11 11 and the operating frequency is under in the sleep frequency threshold F12 02 after a sleep delay time F12 04 the system will enter a sleep mode and the operating frequency will drop to 0 00Hz 175 7 Detailed function specification Revival function When the system is in the sleep mode if the feedback water pressure keep less than F12 03 the revival pressure a delay time F12 05 the system will revival from the sleep mode F12 04 Sleep delay time Range 0 0 6000 0s 0 0s This parameter is the delay time that from the feedback pressure meets the sleep conditions to the system enter in sleep mode Within the sleep delay time if the feedback pressure does not meet the sleep conditions the system will not enter into sleep mode Sleep function is disabled when F12 04 0 F12 05 Revival delay time Range 0 0 6000 0s 0 0s When the constant pressure supply system in the sleep state if the feedback pressure of system less than F12 11 which defined the revival pressure threshold the system will revival and get out of sleep mode after the revival delay time The range
104. 2 49 no upper limiting frequency F03 11 V F voltage value3 Range V F voltage value2 g0 00 100 00 motor rated voltage F03 04 FO3 11 defines multi step V F curve Note that 4 voltage points and frequency points relationship shall be satisfied VO lt V1 lt V2 lt V3 FO lt F1 lt F2 lt F3 for details please refer to Fig 7 8b If the voltage at low frequency is set too high motor overheat or even over burning may cause over current protection may occur to the inverter F03 12 V F oscillation suppression factor Range 0 255 10 Under V F control this parameter can be set properly to prevent motor vibration of the motor When the inverter operates at low frequency without load the greater the motor power is the greater the vibration of motor will be This parameter can be increased to restrain the vibration of motor When carrier freq is smaller this parameter can be adjusted lower to reduce vibration 116 7 Detailed function specification 7 5 Auxiliary running parameter group F04 F04 00 Jump freq 1 EE Me limiting 0 00Hz F04 01 Jump freq 1 range Fee eee limiting 0 00Hz F04 02 Jump freq 2 nu aaa G limiting 0 00Hz F04 03 Jump freq 2 range RE limiting 0 00Hz F04 04 Jump freq 3 ee limiting 0 00Hz F04 05 Jump freq 3 range ELE oe Hinting 0 00Hz F04 00 F04 05 is set to keep inverter s output
105. 2 5 0 F06 03 50 0 F06 04 60 0 F6 05 75 0 F06 06 90 0 F06 21 0 Fig 7 11 AN selects curve 1 frequency setting 131 7 Detailed function specification 7 8 Analog quantity Pulse input function parameter group F07 F07 00 AT input filter time Range 0 000 9 999s 0 050s F07 01 AT setting gain Range 0 000 9 999 1 004 F07 02 ATI setting bias Range 0 0 100 0 0 5 AT1 input filter time is used to set AIl software filter time When field analog guantity is easily interrupted increase filter time to make the analog guantity check stable but when filter time is greater the response time of analog guantity check is slower Please set according to the actual situation AT1 setting bias is indicated with Max input 10V or 20mA percentage which is used to set up and down translation quantity of AIl analog input Take voltage input bias positive as an example the adjustment relationship of setting bias and gain adjustment before and after adjustment is as follows Analog input AT after revise input gain F07 01 x Analog input AT1 before revise setting bias F07 02 x10V Taking current input and bias positive as an example the adjustment relationship between gain adjustment and setting bias is as follows Analog input AI after revise input gain F07 01 x Analog input AI1 before revise setting bias F07 02 x20mA F07 03 AD input filter time Range 0 000 9 999s 0 050s F07 0
106. 2 Analog output 2 Output voltage range 0 10V Output current range 4 20mA Multi Open circuit collector Y1 d function output 1 Opto coupler isolation output unipolar Open output y2 Open circuit collector circuit collector output terminal output 2 Max voltage output 30V y3 Open circuit collector Max current output 50mA output 3 28 3 Installation and wiring Function code F00 22 to select terminal output Open circuit collector mode Y4 DO output 4 When Open circuit collector output with the same High speed impulse spec as terminal Y output When High speed impulse output the max frequency is 20KHz Rela TB TC ri Contact capacity AC250V 2A cosg 1 d or AC250V LA cosp 0 4 Opu ER es DC30V 1A terminal Communi 485 485 differential 485 differential signal positive terminal cation interface 485 Signal interface 485 differential signal negative terminal CN2 retain Auxiliary StandardRS485 interface CN6 communication Twisted pair cable or shield wire to connect interface 3 RS485 crystal outlet CN6 layout as following ml 12345678 RS485 terminal CN6 layout No 1 3 4 5 Name 485 485 3 6 3 Analog input amp output terminal wiring 1 AIl receive analog voltage or current signal single ended input switch through SW1 wire as below AIl voltage input e 10V SWI E
107. 2 T3 T4 T5 TiS T1T2 73 7475 T15 e e ee ee a a a e a The first cycle 7 a The second cycle RUN Command STOP Command Fig7 33 PLC continuous operation mode al al5 The Acc time of different steps d1l d15 The Dec time of different steps f1 f15 The frequency of different steps There are 15 steps can set in Fig 7 31 7 32 7 33 Tens digit Restart mode after interruption 0 Restart from the first step If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving STOP commands fault alarm or power failure it will run from the first step after restarting 1 Restart from the interruption step If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving STOP command or fault 162 7 Detailed function specification alarm the drive will record the operating time of the current step and will continue from the step where the drive stops after restart at the for this step with the remained time as show in Fig 7 34 If the frequency defined drive stops due to power off it will not record the state and from the first step operate when restart 2 Restart from the interrupted Frequency If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving STOP command or fault alarm the drive will record the operating time and the current frequency of the interrupt step it will operating with the record time and record frequency when restart as show in Fig7 35 Output Hi Hz Pause signal fi N de ay NS fy as ay Time t
108. 3 User function code 4 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 04 User function code 5 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 05 User function code 6 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 06 User function code 7 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 07 User function code 8 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 08 User function code 9 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 09 User function code 10 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 10 User function code 11 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 11 User function code 12 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 12 User function code 13 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 13 User function code 14 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 14 User function code 15 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 15 User function code 16 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 16 User function code 17 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 17 User function code 18 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 18 User function code 19 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 19 User function code 20 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 20 User function code21 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 21 User function code 22 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 22 User function code 23 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 23 User function code 24 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 24 User function code 25 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 25 User function code 26 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 26 User function code 27 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 210 7 Detailed function specification F25 27 User functi
109. 3 Extension parameter return to default only F21 F24 group parameter return to default 4 Virtual parameter return to default only F20 group parameter return to default 5 Fault record return to default Only fault record parameter group F26 group restores factory default Hundreds digit Locked key that definite the keypad when locking function is valid 0 All locked 93 7 Detailed function specification 1 Except button the others locked 2 Except V 5 button the others locked 3 Except ux gt button the others locked St gt button the others locked 4 Except gt gt 1 In factory status the unit of this function code parameter is 0 and it is default and allowed to change all the other function code parameters when user finish and want to change the function code setup this function code parameter should set up 0 first eS When all changes finish and need to do parameter protect this Note function code setup into the IP grade you need 2 The decade recovers to 0 automatically after record remove or factory default operation 3 When the third of parameter F00 14 finish setup S button pressing lasting for 2 seconds to lock keyboard and relevant keyboard key when need to unlock the keyboard press the button for 2 seconds F00 15 Button function selection Range units digit 0 1 tens digit 0 9 hundreds digit 0 1 thousands digit 0 1 0001
110. 3 13 After length arrival O automatically reset 0 1 o record length manage 1 no change F13 14 Process of length O automatically reset 0 1 o record when stop 1 no change 75 6 Function parameter schedule graph F14 Vector Control Parameter Group Function Name SR Min Factory Modifi code Unit Default cation F14 00 Speed torque control 0 speed control 1 0 o selection 1 torque control This parameter is valid when F00 24 1 or 2 F14 01 Speed loop high speed 0 1 40 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 20 0 o i proportional gain F00 24 1 or 2 Speed loop high speed 0 0017 10 000s This parameter is valid when 0 001s 0 040s o F14 02 7 integral time F00 24 1 or 2 F14 03 Speed loop low speed 0 1 80 0 This parameter is valid when 0 1 20 0 o i proportional gain F00 24 1 or 2 Speed loop low speed 0 001 10 000s This parameter is valid when 0 001s 0 020s o F14 04 integral time F00 24 1 or 2 F14 05 Speed loop parameter 0 00Hz 20 00Hz This parameter is valid when 0 01Hz 5 00Hz o j switching frequency F00 24 1 or 2 Low frequency power O 50 This parameter is valid when 1 16 o F14 06 generation stability F00 24 1 coefficient F14 07 Current loop 1 500 This parameter is valid when F00 24 1 1 70 o j proportional gain or 2 F14 08 Current loop integral 0 1 100 0ms This parameter is valid when 0 lms 4 0ms o
111. 4 AD setting gain Range 0 000 9 999 1 003 F07 05 AI2 setting bias Range 0 0 100 0 0 1 Parameter FO7 03 F7 05 is used to set analog quantity input AI2 filter time gain and setting bias For detail using method please refer to analog quantity input AIl Take voltage input bias positive as an example the adjustment relationship between gain adjustment and setting bias is as follows Analog input AI2 after revise input gain F07 04 x Analog input AI2 before revise setting bias F07 05 x10V Taking current input and bias positive as an example the adjustment relationship between gain adjustment and setting bias is as follows Analog input AI2 after revise input gain F07 04 x Analog input AI2 before revise setting bias F07 05 x20mA F07 06 Analog setting bias Range units digit 0 1 01 polarity tens digit 0 1 Units digit AI1 setting bias polarity 0 Positive polarity 1 Negative polarity 132 7 Detailed function specification Tens digit AI2 setting bias polarity 0 Positive polarity 1 Negative polarity Parameter FO7 06 is used to set analog quantity AIl and when AI2 counts the polarity of bias Take voltage input as an example when F07 06 units are set as 0 Analog input All after revise input gain F07 01 xAnalog input AI1 before revise Setting bias F07 02 x10V When F7 06 units are set as 1 Analog input All after revise input gain F07 01 xAnalo
112. 400 297 340 012 O18 EN500 4T 1320G 1600P Fig c EN500 4T1600G 2000P 980 953 480 370 400 O38 019 9 O18 EN500 4T2000G 2200P 1030 1003 500 370 400 O38 P19 9 O18 EN500 4T2200G 2500P EN500 4T2500G 2800P EN500 4T2800G 3150P 1368 1322 700 500 440 430 O52 O19 O12 22 EN500 4T3 150G 3550P i Fig d EN500 4T3550G 3750P OB EN500 4T3750G 4000P 1518 1483 700 500 500 430 77 47 19 612 22 EN500 4T4000G 4500P EN500 4T4500G 5000P 1650 850 700 550 490 40 013 EN500 4T5000G 5600P Fig e EN500 4T5600G 6300P 1700 900 750 550 490 40 013 EN500 4T6300G 2 7 EN500 optional base 2 7 1 EN500 inverter and base selection table Base model Type base with Input Base with base with DC Standard base reactor output reactor reactor EN500 4T0750G 0900P SP BS 0750 L SP BS 0900 LO SP BS 0750 LD SP BS 0900 EN500 4T0900G 1100P SP BS 0900 L SP BS 0900 LO EN500 4T1100G 1320P SP BS 1100 LI SP BS 1100 LO SP BS 1320 EN500 4T 1320G 1600P SP BS 1320 L SP BS 1320 LO EN500 4T 1600G 2000P SP BS 1600 SP BS 1600 L SP BS 1600 LO EN500 4T2000G 2200P SP BS 2000 L SP BS 2000 LO SP BS 2200 EN500 4T2200G 2500P SP BS 2200 L SP BS 2200 LO EN500 4T2500G 2800P SP BS 4000 SP BS 2500 L SP BS 2500 LO EN500 4T2800G 3150P SP BS 2800 L SP BS 2800 LO EN500 4T3 150G 3550P SP BS 3150 L SP BS 3150 LO EN500 4T3550G 3750P SP BS 4000 L SP BS 4000 LO
113. 5 2 status indicator light description Item Function description Digital display Display current run status parameter and set parameter Unit for relevant current digital displayed physical parameter for A Hz V i current is A for voltage is V for frequency is Hz MOD This indicator light is lit in non supervision status and extinguished v w if no key pressed for a minute then come back to supervision status A a ALM Alarm indicator light indicate that the inverter is in over current or over 2 we voltage suppressing status or failure alarm status currently gt B TE ET S 3 Forward run indicator light indicate S FWD that the inverter output forward phase g order and the connected motor rotate in The inverter work in DC forward direction brake status if FWD REV Reverse run indicator light indicate that indicator light is lit at the the inverter output reverse phase order same time REV and the connected motor rotate in reverse direction 52 4 Key board display status EN500 EN600 keypad display status is classified as Waiting status parameter display Function code parameter editing status display Malfunction alarm status display Run status parameter display Alarm state display in total 5 kinds of status LED indicator light will all be lit after the inverter electrified Then enter into set frequency display As shown in Fig 5 3 a 43 5 Run and operation explanation for
114. 6 09 Curve 2 inflexion setting Curve 2 min setting curve 2 Max setting 0 1 50 0 o F06 10 Corresponding physical 0 0 100 0 0 1 50 0 o quantity of curve 2 inflexion setting F06 11 Curve 2 Max setting Curve 2 inflexion setting 100 0 0 1 100 0 o F06 12 Corresponding physical 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 o guantity of curve 2 Max setting FO6 13 Curve 3 min setting 0 0 curve 3 inflexion 1 setting 0 1 0 0 o FO6 14 Corresponding physical 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 o guantity of curve 3 min setting FO6 15 Curve 3 inflexion 1 setting Curve 3 min setting curve 3 inflexion 2 0 1 30 0 o setting F06 16 Corresponding physical 0 0 100 0 0 1 30 0 o quantity of curve 3 inflexion 1 setting F06 17 Curve 3 inflexion 2 setting Curve 3 inflexion 1 setting curve 3 Max 0 1 60 0 o setting F06 18 Corresponding physical 0 0 100 0 0 1 60 0 o guantity of curve 3 inflexion 2 setting FO6 19 Curve 3 Max setting Curve 3 inflexion 1 setting 100 0 0 1 100 0 o F06 20 Corresponding physical 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 o quantity of curve 3 Max setting FO6 21 Curve lower than min Units digit curve setting 1 11111 o input corresponding selection 0 Corresponds to min setting corresponding physical quantity 1 0 0 of the corresponding physical quantity Tens digit curve 2 setting Same as units digit Hundreds digit curve 3 setting Same as units digit Thousands digit extend
115. 8 F05 10 ee ei virtual terminal Range 0 90 0 F05 11 eae A virtual terminal Range 0 90 0 F05 12 pe ae as virtual terminal Range 0 90 0 F05 13 EE RR virtual terminal Range 0 90 0 F05 14 Re ei virtual terminal Range 0 90 0 F05 15 EE ei virtual terminal Range 0 90 0 F05 16 Ener coe virtual terminal Range 0 90 0 F05 17 EE ei virtual terminal Range 0 90 0 Communication virtual terminal CX1 CX8 function and terminal X1 X8 function is different E The communication virtual terminal function is realized by setting the Modbus address and 1D09 Note F05 18 Eer application Range F00 00 F26 xx 25 00 F05 19 RR application Range F00 00 F26 xx 25 00 F05 20 P a application Range F00 00 F26 xx 25 00 F05 21 EE application Range F00 00 F26 xx 25 00 F05 22 EE application Range F00 00 F26 xx 25 00 F05 23 ME application Range F00 00 F26 xx 25 00 F05 24 Re application Range F00 00 F26 xx 25 00 126 7 Detailed function specification F05 25 EE application Range F00 00 F26 xx 25 00 F05 26 BE Es application Range F00 00 F26 xx 25 00 F05 27 EE application Range F00 00 F26 xx 25 00 Input parameter address mapping This parameter is used for mapping waiting for input Integral part corresponds with group no of the parameter while decimal part corresponds with intra class reference parameter series no within
116. 8 On off input function parameter group Function Min Facto Modifi Code Name SetRange Unit Default cation Input terminal positive 0000 FFFF include extend input terminal 1 0000 o F08 00 and negative logic setting F08 01 Input terminal filter 0 000 1 000s suitable for extend input 0 001s 0 010s o time terminal ji X1 Input terminal 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 02 i closed time Ae X1 Input terminal 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 03 opened time gt X2 Input termina 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 04 closed time 5 X2 Input terminal 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o 08 05 opened time F08 06 X3 Input terminal 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o closed time 7 X3 Input termina 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 07 opened time 64 6 Function parameter schedule graph terminal 1 10 Acceleration deceleration time selection terminal 2 11 Acceleration deceleration time selection terminal 3 12 Acceleration deceleration time selection terminal 4 13 Main and auxiliary freguency operational rule selection terminal 1 14 Main and auxiliary freguency operational rule selection terminal 2 15 Main and auxiliary freguency operational rule selection terminal 3 16 Freguency ascending command CUP 17 Frequency descending command DOWN 18 Frequency ascending descending frequency resetting 19 Multi step closed loop terminal 1 20 Multi step closed loop termin
117. 85 net Can realize communication between inverters through PC PLC or HMI if it s needed Specific communication mode is as mentioned below 1 PC or PLC as mainframe inverter as Slave device point to point communication between mainframe and Slave device 2 Slave device don t response when mainframe send out command by broadcast address 3 User can set local address baud rate and data format of the inverter through Slave device keypad or serial communication mode 4 EN500 EN600 provides the RS485 interface 5 Default mode Asynchronous serial semiduplex transport mode There are RTU and ASII two mode Default format and transport rate 8 N 1 9600bps Appendix A Modbus communication protocol A 4 Transmission mode Asynchronous serial semiduplex transport mode Default format and transport rate 8 N 1 9600bps The detail setting parameter please refer to the FOS group function mode Remark the parameter is valid under the Modbus communication the other parameter comply with the original service manual F05 00 Protocol 0 Modbus protocol 1 0 x selection 1 Reserved 2 Profibus protocol expansion is valid 3 CanLink protocol expansion is valid 4 CANopen protocol expansion is valid 5 free protocol 1 revision all the parameter of ENS00 is valid 6 free protocol 2 only revising part parameter of EN500 is valid Remark expansion card is needed when select 2 3 4 communication F05 01 Baud rate The unit digital free pr
118. AO2 output terminal with Y3 0 1 0 0 o bias reuse F09 45 DO filter time 0 0 20 0s 0 1s 0 0s F09 46 DO output gain 0 00 2 00 0 01 1 00 F09 47 DO maximum pulse 0 1 20 0KHz 0 1KHz 10 0KHz output frequency F09 48 Reserved FO9 49 Reserved F09 50 Reserved F10 Simple PLC Multi speed Function Parameter Group Function Min Facto Modifi Code Name Se oes Unit Default cation F10 00 Simple PLC operate Units digit run mode selection 1 0000 x setting O inaction 1 stop after single cycle 2 final value keep after single cycle 3 continuous cycle Tens digit interrupt run restart mode selection O restart from first phase 1 continuous run from phase frequency at interruption 2 continuous run from run frequency at interruption Hundreds digit PLC run time unit 0 second minute Thousands digit power down memory selection 0 no memory 1 phase of reserve power down frequency power down recording PLC run status contain power down phase run frequency time have run F10 01 Step 1 setting 000H E22H 1 000 o Units digit frequency setup 0 Multi section frequency i i 1 15 1 frequency determined by complex frequency of main and auxiliary 2 Reserved Tens digit operation direction selection 0 forward l reversal 2 determine by run command Hundreds digit ACC DEC time selection 0 ACC DEC time 1 1 ACC DEC time 2 2 ACC DEC time 3 3 ACC DEC time 4 4 ACC DEC time 5 5 ACC DEC time 6 71 6 Function p
119. Checking method show as graph 1 1 below with 500V voltage type megohm meter insulation resistance should not smaller than 5 MQ otherwise inverter maybe damaged 12 Forbid inverter output side to assemble capacitor to improve power factor or anti thunder dependent resistor etc otherwise it may cause inverter fault trip or component damage show as graph 1 2 Ss X EN500 EN600 N After wiring finish short circuit U V W to measure insulation resistance U ENS500 EN600 V W Ground Megohmmeter Fig 1 1 motor insulation check Fig 1 2 capacitor at output side forbidden 1 4 Scraping handling notice Notices when handling with scrapped inverter and components 1 The unit dispose the inverter as industrial waste 2 Electrolytic capacitor It may cause explosion when electrolytic capacitor under burning 3 Plastic it may result in harmful and poisonous gas when plastic and rubber of inverter burning and safeguard preparations should be taken before burning 2 Inverter type and specification 2 Inverter type and specification 2 1 Incoming inverter inspect 1 Check if there is damage during transportation and inverter itself has damage or fall off parts 2 Check if parts presented in packing list are all ready 3 Please confirm nameplate data of the inverter is in line with your order requirement Our product is guaranteed by strict quality system during manufacturing
120. Confirmed by F03 04 F03 11 F03 01 Torque boost mode 0 Manual boost 1 0 o 1 Auto torque boost F03 02 Torgue boost 0 0 12 0 0 1 Base on o motor type F03 03 Torgue boost cut off 0 0 100 0 motor rated frequency 0 1 100 0 o frequency F03 04 V F frequency value 0 0 00 V F frequency value 1 0 01Hz 10 00Hz x F03 05 V F voltage value 0 0 00 V F voltage value 1 0 01 20 00 x FO3 06 V F frequency value 1 V F frequency value 0 V F frequency value 2 0 01Hz 20 00Hz x FO3 07 V F voltage value 1 V F voltage value 0 V F voltage value 2 0 01 40 00 x FO3 08 V F frequency value 2 V F frequency value 1 V F frequency value 3 0 01Hz 25 00Hz x FO3 09 V F voltage value 2 V F voltage value 1 V F voltage value 3 0 01 50 00 x F03 10 V F frequency value 3 V F frequency value 2 upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 40 00Hz x FO3 11 V F voltage value 3 V F voltage value 2 100 00 motor rated 0 01 80 00 x voltage F03 12 V F oscillation 0 255 1 10 o suppression factor F04 Auxiliary running parameter group Function Min Factory Modifi Code Dame Senge Unit Default cation F04 00 Jump freq 1 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz x F04 01 Jump freq range 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz x F04 02 Jump freq 2 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz x F04 03 Jump freq 2 range 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz x F04 04 Jump freq 3 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 0
121. EN500 EN600 inverter provide RS485 serial communication interface to user The following wire connection can make up of single main single sub control system or single main multi sub control system To use host computer softwar PC or PLC controller can realize real time monitoring and operation to inverter and to achieve complicated run control like long distance control high degree automation It can also use a host inverter and the other slave inverter to make up of the cascade or synchronous control inverter network 1 Inverter RS485 interface and other device with RS485 interface wire connection show as following EN500 A 485 A 485 Device with RS485 EN600 B 485 B 485 or RS485 ge g EN500 EN600 Fig 3 18 Communication terminal wiring 32 3 Installation and wiring 2 Inverter RS485 interface and host computer device with RS232 interface connection RS232 RS485 transverter Host computer EN500 EN600 inverter name description Shield cable signal Pin No description name B 5V shell Signal negative B TXD 2 Signal positive a m i RXD 3 GND 5 4 6 RI 9 CD 1 RTS 7 CTS 8 Fig 3 19 RS485 communication wiring 33 4 EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility Explanation 4 EMC Electromagnetic compatibility explanation Because of inverter working principal resulting in electromagnetic noise and to avoid or reduc
122. F05 group function code Remark The definition for this parameter is only effective under free port communication mode and definition for other parameters are the same as original F05 00 Protocol 0 Modbus protocol 1 0 x selection l reserved 2 Profibus protocol extension effective 3 CanLink protocol extension effective 4 CANopen protocol extension effective 5 freedom protocol 1 can modify all function parameters of EN500 EN600 6 freedom protocol 2 can only modify part of function parameter of EN500 EN600 Remark expansion card is needed if select protocol 2 3 4 F05 01 Baud rate LED first bit freedom protocol and Modbus baud 1 005 x configuration rate selection 0 300BPS 1 600BPS 2 1200BPS 3 2400BPS 4 4800BPS 5 9600BPS 6 19200BPS 7 38400BPS 8 57600BPS F05 02 00 x Data formiat LED first bit freedom protocol and Modbus protocol data format 0 1 8 1 format no checkout RTU 1 1 8 1 format even checkout RTU 2 1 8 1 format odd checkout RTU 3 1 7 1 format no checkout ASCII 4 1 7 1 format even checkout ASCI 5 1 7 1 format odd checkout ASCI F05 03 Local address 0 247 00 is master station address 1 1 x 240 Appendix B Free port communication protocol B 2 4 Data command frame format Main device command frame format 2 frame end en
123. F10 00 Simple PLC operate setting 0000 The simple PLC operation mode re start mode after interruption unit of running time and the storage mode when power off can be set in different bit of parameter F10 00 details as follows Unit digit simple PLC operation mode 0 No action PLC operation mode is disabled 1 Stop after single cycle as show in Fig 7 31 the drive stops automatically after one cycle of operation and will not start only when receiving RUN command again 2 Maintain final value after one cycle as show in Fig 7 32 the drive will keep running with the final value and the direction after complete one cycle operation the drive won t stop according to the set stop mode until the stop command is available 3 Continuous operation as show in Fig 7 33 the drive will start next cycle of operation automatically after completing one cycle of operation until receiving STOP command then stop according the set stop mode fo dis fis fi ds ary as aN f a ds f T15 EE EE NE N LE RUN Command N STOP Command Fig 7 31 PLC stop operating after one cycle mode 161 7 Detailed function specification f dis az fs fi j ds ss ar as aa fs zy 5 A CE 5 mir ms in Me ims RUN Command _ STOP Command N Fig 7 32 PLC holds the final value after one cycle mode dis Mdis f2 fig f2 fis az P d 29 di 5 5 fi de fi as fi as as PLC Operation ap fs da da aa fi fa T1 T
124. FMS 3 PROFIBUS RS485 the first layer realize the balanced data transmission wire a bus segment one Bus segment is shielded twisted pair cable both ends of the segments have a terminating resistor Transmission mode to half duplex asynchronous synchronous gap free data exchange basis the physical layer supports fibre the data frame 11 and the transfer rate 9 6Kbit sec 12Mbit sec Bus length range from 100 to 1200 meters 4 Between same level controller and PC communications token passing procedure to ensure adequate opportunity to deal with their communication tasks in a determined time Complex PLC and PC with a simple division formula I O communications you must quickly and with minimal protocol overhead master slave program 259 Appendix D Communication extension card D 2 2 The external form of PROFIBUS DP and terminal definition description o ooo o o Fig D 1 PROFIBUS DP outline dimensional drawing Table D 1 Terminal function description ee Name Description Remark date it on 15KW USB form adapter USB connection factory and distribution to pe kor 2 lugs DB9 adapter cable frequency inverter or olay P below it on 15KW n DB9 communication signal connection Use it on communication port interface 9 pin DB9 female frequency inverter or the above JP2 Board level docking connector When you install this plug docking with the main control board CN2 260
125. Fig 2 7 2 Except EN LCD2 long distance keypad when other keypad Note outer lead user can adjust the hole size under actual situation on keypad or keypad holder thickness of install board between 1 0 1 5mm is suggested 3 When installed with keypad holder it need to buy extra 12 2 Inverter type and specification 2 9 Product technic index and spec Item Item description 1 phase 220V Grade 1 phase 220V 50Hz 60Hz Rating volt frequency phase 380V Grade 3 phase 380V 50Hz 60Hz R 1 phase 220V Grade 200 260V Allowed volt range 3 chase 380V Grade 320 460V Voltage 0 380V Frequency 0 600Hz el G type 150 of rated current for 1 minute 7 ype gt Over loading capacity P type 120 of rated current for 1 minute vector control PG vector control open loop V F control torque Conmolmode control PG torque control p 40 5 rated synchronous speed vector control ae sone 40 1 rated synchronous speed PG vector control P 1 rated synchronous speed V F control 1 2000 PG vector control Speed regulation range 1 100 vector control 1 50 V F control 1 0Hz 150 rated torque V F control Start up torque 0 5Hz 150 rated torque vector control OHz 180 rated torque PG vector control 0 3 rated synchronous speed vector control Speed flietuation 0 1 rated synchronous speed PG vector control Torque control 10 rated torque
126. Look up auxiliary motor state 10 00 00 no 010A00000192 r 1 Main setting frequency 1 00 00 no 010B00000193 r 0 01Hz Auxiliary setting 11 00 01 no 010B00010194 r 0 01Hz frequency Setting frequency 1 00 02 no 010B00020195 r 0 01Hz w Output frequency 1 00 03 no 010B00030196 r 0 01Hz 8 Output current 1 00 04 no 010B00040197 r O 1A z Output voltage 1 00 05 no 010B00050198 r 1V 5 DC bus bar voltage 1 00 06 no 010B00060199 r 0 1V QO g Load motor revolving 5 1 00 07 no 010B0007019A r 1RPM S speed E Load motor linear speed 1 00 08 no 010B0008019B r no Inverter temperature 1 00 09 no 010B0009019C r VG Runtime 11 00 OA no 010BO00A01A4 r 0 1min 2 7 3 C ta lat ER ERNE nm 00 oB no O10BO00BOI1AS r Ih runtime C ta lati ei Peeters i 00 oc no O10BO00CO1A6 r Ih power on time Inverter state 11 00 OD no 010B000D01A7 r no Input terminal state 11 00 OE no 010B000E01A8 r no 245 Appendix B Free port communication protocol Output terminal state 00 OF no 010BO00F01A9 r no Expand output terminal state 00 10 no 010B00100194 r no Expanding input terminal state 00 11 no 010B00110195 r no eee oo 12 no 010B00120196 r no terminal state Internal virtual input node state 00 13 no 010B0
127. N500 OH ser EN600 FO All ee or 47 20mA 2 gt Se GND AT current input Shield cable near end earth AEN grounding SWI1 4 20mA Fig 3 11 AI terminal wiring diagram 29 3 Installation and wiring 2 AD receive analog voltage or current signal single ended input switch through SW2 and should match it with exact second figure of F00 20 setting wire as below AD voltage input 10V TT ENSO0 LG EN600 f LOV 10V ven ag AT2 or 4 20mA 10 10V SEE ER PEE AI2 current input Shield cable near end earth grounding Sw2 4 20mA Fig 3 12 AL terminal wiring diagram 3 AO1 AO2 terminal can connect to external analog meter which can indicate several physical quantity it can select analog voltage or current signal output and switch through SW3 and SW4 wire as below AO1 AO2 voltage output rT N m SW3 SW4 Analog meter A01 s 0 10V AO1 AO2 current output PEN GND 9 Analog meter EN500 EN600 A02 SW3 SW4 AA 4 20mA Fig 3 13 AO1 AO2 terminal wiring diagram 1 Under analog input mode filter capacitor or common mode choke can be installed between AI1 and GND or AI2 and GND 3 2 Analog input and output signal can be interfered easily by Note ambient environment it need use shield cable for connection and earth grounding well as short as possible 3 6 4 Digital input terminal wiring 1 To
128. O1 09 through parameter FO1 10 gain calculation Range lower limit frequency 600 00Hz 50 00Hz F01 11 Upper limit frequency This parameter s max setting frequency of all run modes should be modification carefully according to the motor nameplate details E01 12 Low limit frequency a se ld Emit 0 40Hz F01 13 Low limit frequency Range 0 3 2 run mode 103 7 Detailed function specification Sleep run hysteresis Range 0 01Hz upper limit F01 14 frequency frequency 0 01Hz 0 As low limit frequency run 1 As setting frequency run 2 As zero frequency run 3 Sleep PWM clocked at sleep mode When actual setting frequency lower than low limit frequency low limit frequency run mode selection 0 then drive run at low limit frequency low limit frequency run mode selection 1 drive continuously run according to setting frequency low limit frequency run mode selection 2 drive continuously low output frequency and run at zero frequency low limit frequency run mode selection 3 immediately clock the output and display frequency decline slowly to zero when provide value over low limit frequency drive restart to accelerate run from OHz to provide value after through FO1 14 stagnant loop When F01 13 3 this parameter can finish sleep function to achieve E energy saving run and avoid drive to start frequently at threshold Note value through width of return difference
129. P DOWN Integration is enabled if keep adjusting the frequency in the same direction the Integration effect will be effective and the Integration rate is determined by F18 04 This function is suitable for the applications that need adjusting frequency quickly Keyboard no integral single F18 05 RE steps size setup Range 0 01 10 00Hz 0 01Hz When the keyboard UP DOWN integral function disabled the rate of adjusting frequency fixed by the value of F18 05 F18 06 Terminal UP DOWN Integral rate Range 0 01 50 00Hz 0 20Hz Terminal no integral single F18 07 tee steps size setup Range 0 01 10 00Hz 0 10Hz Please refer to the functions of F18 04 and F18 05 for the functions of F18 06 and F18 07 F18 08 Droop control decline frequency Range 0 00 10 00Hz 0 00Hz When several drivers drive one load the function can make the drives share the load equally When the load of one drive is heavier the drive will reduce its output frequency to shed part of the load This function is suitable for the share of several motors which with a common load The value of F18 08 is the maximum reduced frequency when the drive reaches the rated power F18 09 Setup accumulate power on time Range 0 65535h 0 F18 10 Setup accumulate run time Range 0 65535h 0 When the actual accumulate operation time reach to the set accumulated operation time F18 10 the drive wi
130. PYAR Checking whether the load divorced load divorced from motor fi rom motor E 12 The input phase The three phase input Check the three phase input power lose power supply is abnormal line is off or poor contact 216 8 Troubleshooting Power board anomaly supply Look for service from manufacturer or agent The control board anomaly Look for service from manufacturer or agent E 13 The output phase lose Anomaly wire between motor and inverter Check the motor wire When the motor runs inverter three phase output unbalanced Check whether the motor three phase winding is balance Power supply board anomaly Look for service from manufacturer or agent The control board anomaly Look for service from manufacturer or agent E 14 Inverting module protection Transient overcurrent of the inverter Refer to countermeasure for overcurrent phase to phase short circuit or earthing short circuit of output 3 phase wiring again Air path blocked or fan damaged To clear air path or replace the fan Ambient temperature is too high Lower ambient temperature Connecting wire or insert on control board loose Check and connect the wire again Unwonted current wave caused by missing output phase etc Check wiring Assistant power supply damaged and drive voltage lacking Look for service from manufacturer or agent Unwonted co
131. Please memorize the password Seeking advice from manufacturer in case it is lost Note F27 01 Manufacturer password Range 00000 65535 00000 Factory setting function the user can t modify 214 8 Troubleshooting 8 Troubleshooting 8 1 Failure and countermeasure Possible failure types in EN500 EN600 are shown in Table 8 1 the fault types including fault and alarm two kinds Such as if inverter fault display E XX while the corresponding alarm is displayed in A XX Once the inverter failure fault types are stored in the F26 fault recording parameter group and if alarm alarm status has been revealed until the alarm source release alarm status are not logged to the F26 parameter group Some failure code is reserved for intelligent automatic diagnosis function which will be executed continuously in future When failure takes place in the inverter the user should check according to note of these table first and record failure phenomena detailedly Please contact our after sale service and technical support Department or agent in your local place when technical service is needed Table 8 1 Failure type and the countermeasure are Failure type Possible reason Countermeasure foes HIDE 37 100 Prolong accelerating time Adjust V F curve setting adjust Improper V F curve manual torgue boost or change to automatic torgue boost Overcurrent during Res
132. Senior List Mode F03 V F Control Group Range 0 3 ENTER DATA Press increase button gt FOO System Parameter Group W Parameter Group Display 00 Parameter Group Display ENTER DATA F0000 0 01 C00 display when operation 0 Basic List Mode 02 C01 display when operation Range 0 3 Fig C 5 Example of Secondary Menu Operation 254 Appendix C Keyboard 4 Function Parameter Operation Function parameter operation includes the parameter checking revise and storage of parameters Before the operating the inverter parameters should be set correctly Operation methods are shown as Fig C 6 Frequency Setting WV Motor Control Mode c00 050 00 Hz F0024 1 Frequency Setting 1 Speedless Vector Control 050 00 Hz Range 0 2 ESC MENU Press increase button F00 System Parameter Group W Motor Control Mode F01 Basic Running Group F0024 0 F02 Start Stop Brake Group 0 V F Control F03 V F Control Group Range 02 ENTER DATA ENTER DATA P gt FOO System Parameter Group p gt FOO System Parameter Group 00 Parameter Group Display 24 Motor Control Mode 01 C00 display when operation 25 Supervision 2 selection 02 C01 display when operation 26 Busbar voltage coefficient Fig C 6 Example of function parameter editing 255 Appendix C Keyboard 5 Fault query status When fault alarm occurs customers can enter the fault query status Fault Alarm E13 Output Phase Loss ESC MENU gt F26 Fault Record Par
133. Stop according to the stop mode 29 Acceleration deceleration prohibited command 30 Three wire running control 31 Process PID invalid 32 Process PID stop 33 Process PID integral holding 34 Process PID integral resetting 35 Process PID function negation Closed loop adjustment feature negation 36 simple PLC invalid 37 simple PLC halted 38 simple PLC stop state resetting 39 main frequency switchover to digit keypad 40 main frequency switchover to AT1 1 main frequency switchover to AI2 2 main frequency switchover to EAI 3 main frequency switchover to EAI2 4 main frequency setting channel selection erminal 1 5 main freguency setting channel selection erminal 2 6 main freguency setting channel selection erminal 3 7 main freguency setting channel selection erminal 4 8 Auxiliary frequency reset 9 Command switchover to panel 50 Command switchover to terminal 51 Command switchover to communication 52 Running command Channel selection terminal 1 53 Running command Channel selection terminal 2 50 Forward prohibited command Stop according to the stop mode invalid for jogging command 55 Reverse prohibited command Stop according to the stop mode invalid for jogging command 56 Swinging frequency input 57 Resetting state of swinging frequency 58 Interior counter reset end 59 Interior counter input end 60 Internal timer resetting 61 Internal timer triggering 62 Length count input 63 Length
134. WMENC ISO Quality Management System Authentication EN500 600 series Ver 2 0 SHENZHEN ENCOM ELECTRIC TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Print version V2 0 A2 Foreword Thank you for purchasing EN500 EN600 series inverter developed and produced by Shenzhen Encom Electric Technologies CO LTD EN500 EN600 series hi performance flux vector inverter adopt advanced control mode to achieve high torque high precision and wide range speed regulation drive and it also support speed sensorless torque control and PG control torque It can meet customer all kinds of requirement to universal inverter EN500 EN600 inverter is a organic combination for customer s universal and industrial control purpose and provide practical main auxiliary frequency provision run channel frequency binding PID regulator simple PLC spinning traverse programmable input amp output terminal control pulse frequency provision and inbuilt Modbus Can bus Profibus 485 freedom protocol and other function and platform It provide high integration solution for most manufacturing and automation customer and EN500 EN600 inbuilt input phase loss function output phase loss function short circuit to earth grounding function and many other protective function to improve effectively the system reliability and safety This brochure provide the installation and wiring settings fault check and methods maintenance and other relative issues to customer To make inverter assemble and o
135. X1 positive and negative logic definition BIT1 EX2 positive and negative logic definition BIT2 EX3 positive and negative logic definition BIT3 EX4 positive and negative logic definition BITO EXS positive and negative logic definition BIT1 EX6 positive and negative logic definition The setting of this parameter is finally converted to binary setting relationship between binary setting and hexadecimal is as shown in table 7 2 Table 7 2 Relationship between binary setting and bit displayed value Binary setting Hexadecimal BB BIT2 BITI BITO bit displayed value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 1 1 3 0 1 0 0 4 0 1 0 1 5 0 1 1 0 6 0 1 1 1 7 1 0 0 0 8 1 0 0 1 9 1 0 1 0 A 1 0 1 1 B 1 1 0 0 C 1 1 0 1 D 135 7 Detailed function specification 1 1 1 0 E 1 1 1 1 F Bit refers to units tens hundreds or thousands displayed in operation panel F08 00 parameter defines valid logic state of Xi input terminal Positive logic Xi terminal and corresponding common port closed valid opened invalid Negative logic Xi terminal and corresponding common port closed invalid opened valid When BIT selects 0 it indicates positive logic 1 indicates negative logic Proper setting of this parameter can realize correct logic input without changing terminal wiring F08 01 Input terminal filter time Range 0 000 1 000s 0 010s
136. agex 100 2Xinverter rated current F03 02 Torque boost Range 0 0 12 0 mts an Torque boost cut off Range 0 0 100 0 0 frequency motor rated frequency MCW F03 03 Improving inverter low torque characteristic the output voltage can be compensated Motor rated Motor rated ic erm Ser EERS Boost Boost volt i i Volt Cut off Motor Cut off otor Freq rated freq Freq rated freq a Degression torque curve Torque boost b Constant torque curve Torque boost Fig 7 8 Torque boost 1 F03 02 for increasing torque setting to this parameter can cause motor heating or over current protection E 2 When driving synchronous machine User is advised to adopt Note manual torgue boost and adjust V F curve according to motor parameter and usage occasion when driving synchronous motor 115 7 Detailed function specification Range 0 00 V F frequency F03 04 V F frequency value 0 10 00Hz valuel F03 05 V F voltage valueo _ Range 0 00 V F voltage 20 00 valuel Range V F frequency value F03 06 V F frequency valuel 0 VIF frequency value 20 00Hz Range V F voltage value0 g F03 07 V F voltage valuel VIF voltage value2 40 00 Range V F frequency valuel F03 08 V F frequency value2 VIF frequency value3 25 00Hz Range V F voltage valuel 5 F03 09 V F voltage value2 VIF voltage value3 50 00 F03 10 V F frequency value3 Range V F frequency value
137. air guarantee 1 We provide the free maintenance within warranty time if any failure or damage under normal usage the warranty time can be seen in the warranty card we will charge some when exceed warranty time 2 We will take some upkeep if one of following situations takes place within period of repair guarantee a If did not use the inverter according to service manual strictly or did not use it under ambient demanded in service manual which cause failure b Failure caused by applying the inverter to non normal function c Failure caused by self repair refit which is not already allowed d Damage caused by bad keeping falling down from high place or other extrinsic factor after purchasing the inverter e Failure caused by natural disaster or its reason such as unwonted voltage thunderbolt water fog fire salt corroding gas corroding earthquake and storm etc f Make bold to tear up product logo such as nameplate etc Body serial number don t accord with that in repair guarantee card 3 We calculate service fee based on actual cost which is subject to contract if any 4 You can contact the agent and also our company directly if you have questions After repair guarantee period we shall also provide lifetime charged repair service for our products Our company will also provide lifetime repair service with fee for inverter which is not within period of repair guarantee Note 223 9 Maintenan
138. al 50 Command switchover to terminal When current command source is reset by keypad or communication switchover between current command source and terminal command setting can be realized by this terminal 51 Command switchover to communication When current command source is reset by keypad or terminal switchover between current command source and communication command setting can be realized by this terminal 52 53 Running command Channel selection terminal For details please refer to Table 7 9 Table 7 9 Running command channel logic mode Running command channel Running command channel r p 3 Running command channel selection terminal 2 selection terminal 1 OFF OFF Invalid OFF ON Operation keypad running command channel ON OFF Terminal running command channel ON ON Communication running command channel 54 Forward prohibited command Enable this terminal during the forward running process and the inverter stops according to the stop mode First enable this terminal and then forward running enters zero frequency running status Jogging running is not affected by this 55 Reverse prohibited command Function and Forward prohibited command are opposite 56 Swinging frequency input When the starting mode of swinging frequency is manual input this terminal is valid and swinging frequency function is valid See F13 group function parameter instruction When swinging freque
139. al 2 21 Multi step closed loop terminal 3 22 External equipment failure input 23 External interruption input 24 External resetting input 25 Free stop input 26 External stop instruction Stop according to the stop mode 27 stop DC braking input command DB 7 X4 Input termina 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 08 closed time n X4 Input termina 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 09 opened time X5 Input terminal 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 10 closed time F08 11 X5 Input terminal 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o opened time 5 X6 Input termina 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 12 closed time 7 X6 Input termina 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 13 opened time 5 X7 Input terminal 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 14 i closed time d X7 Input termina 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 15 opened time X8 Input termina 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 16 i closed time 5 X8 Input termina 0 00 99 99s 0 01s 0 00s o F08 17 opened time F08 18 Input terminal X1 0 Leave control terminal unused 1 1 x function selection 1 Forward running FWD terminal 2 Reverse running REV terminal 3 External forward jogging control 4 External reverse jogging control 5 Multi step speed control terminal 1 6 Multi step speed control terminal 2 7 Multi step speed control terminal 3 8 Multi step speed control terminal 4 9 Acceleration deceleration time selection 65 6 Function parameter schedule graph 28 inverter running prohibited
140. al Freq 4 Lower limit Freq t Preset Freq Jitter Freq i i al EE i Time t Rising tim Ac elerate Traverse waiting T se Deceldrate time F13 07 dd ig according the Dec time Run Stop Fig 7 43 Traverse operation F13 08 Setting length Range 0 65535m Om F13 09 Number of pulses for axis Range 1 10000 1 per circle F13 10 Perimeter of shaft Range 0 01 100 00cm 10 00cm F13 11 Reserved F13 12 Ee coefficient of Range 0 001 1 000 1 000 ength Set length Actual length and Numbers of pulses per cycle are used for fixed length control The Actual length is calculated by the number of pulses collected by terminal Xi i l 8 Allocate corresponding Xi terminal with 62 Length count input Actual length The number of PulsesxF13 10xF13 12 F13 09 When the actual length F00 02 39 exceeds the set length F13 08 the drive can output a Length reached signal via Yi or relay B When F00 02 39 Actual length can be monitored by C 01 in running state Count length function is available both V F control Note mode and Vector Control mode 180 7 Detailed function specification F13 13 Processes when reaching the set Range 0 1 1 length 0 Reset When reaching the set length the counter reset automatically Restart counting with the coming of next pulse 1 Keep the record When reaching the set length the counter keep the
141. ameter 00 The Last Fault Record 01 The Last Two Fault Record 02 The Last Three Fault Record ENTER DATA y The Last Fault Record F2600 13 13 Output Phase Loss Range 00 50 Fig C 7 Fault query status 256 Appendix C Keyboard C 4 LED single display digital potentiometer keyboard The type of local single display digital potentiometer keyboard EN LED3 D C 4 1 Keyboard Layout Voltage indicator light Current indicator light Frequency indicator light Failure alarm indicator light 7 i i Forward run indicator light Mode indicator light Reverse run indicator light AM A Increase key __ Exit Program key N I Digital potentiometer Shift Supervision key Hp V PH Confirm Data key pad pa Decrease key IL Stop Reset key Reverse Jog key orward run key Fig C 8 EN LED3 D Operation keyboard layout C 42 Keyboard function LED Nixie tube and indicator light description LED single display digital potentiometer keyboard is composed of a 5 digit nixie tube display 8 keys and a digital potentiometer For the function definition of 8 keys in operation keyboard LED nixie tub and indicator light description please see also the keyboard function description in chapter 5 Digital potentiometer function description it is the same as the function of increase and decrease key rotate to the left means decrease rotate to the right
142. an not be right RTU frame format as the table below Frame Header 3 5 characters time pause Slave address Slave address 0 247 03H read slave parameter 06H write slave parameter Data content DATA The contents of packet Parameter address 1 6bit Communication command code Data content DATA Number of parameter or bytes of parameter SEE value skepe Parameter value 16bit CRC check value low byte i gt CRC check value high byte 16bit Unsigned check value Closing Flag 3 5 characters time pause Regarding generation method of CRC check value please refer to Section A 9 ASCII frame format as the table below Frame Header 0x3A Slave address Hi Slave address Combined by 2 ASCH code Slave address Lo 8 bit slave address 0 247 Command code 8 bit command code combined by 2 ASCII code 03H read slave parameter 06H write slave parameter Command code Hi Command code Lo Data content DATA The contents of data packet N pieces of 8bit data content combined by 2 N Data content RATA pieces of ASCII code LRC CHK Hi LRC check value includes 2 pieces of ASCII LRC CHK Lo code Closing Flag Hi Closing Flag Hi CR 0x0D Closing Flag Lo Closing Flag Lo LF 0x0A A 5 2 Host read slave parameter Command code 03H Host can read one or more parameter up to ten by initiating a communication transaction E g read 2 contiguous inver
143. anee Unit Default cation F09 00 Open collector output 0 terminal unused 1 0 x terminal Y1 output setup 1 operation RUN 2 CW run 3 CCW run 4 DC brake 5 run prepare finish busbar voltage normal fault free no run forbid receival of run command s status 6 stop command indication 7 no current detected 8 overcurrent detected 9 current arrival 10 current2 arrival 11 no frequency output 12 frequency arrival signal FAR 13 frequency level detect signal 1 FDT1 14 frequency level detect signal 2 FDT2 15 output frequency arrival upper limit FHL 16 output frequency arrival low limit FLL 17 frequency 1 arrival output 18 frequency 2 arrival output 19 overload pre alarm signal OL 20 undervoltage lockout stop LU 21 external fault stop EXT 22 fault 23 alarm 24 simple PLC operation 25 simple PLC section operation finish 26 simple PLC circle operation finish 67 6 Function parameter schedule graph 27 simple PLC operation stop 28 traverse freguency high and low limit 29 setup length arrival 30 internal counter final value arrival 31 internal counter designated value arrival 32 internal timer arrival output 0 5s valid signal on arrival 33 operation stop time finish 34 operation arrival time finish 35 setup run time arrival 36 setup power on time arrival 37 1 pump variable frequency 38 1 pump power frequency 39 2 pump variable frequency 40 2 pump powe
144. arameter can correct the actual speed of the motor when the encoder not installed on the axis of motor For example when the encoder installed on a reduction gears with a 10 1 ratio you should set F16 02 as 10 000 so that get a correct feedback of actual motor speed Because of encoder usually install on the axis of motor in closed loop vector control mode so there is no need setting this parameters in this mode F16 04 Encoder filtering coefficient Range 5 100 15 In some occasion with strong interference increasing the value of F16 04 properly will weaken the vibration of the motor which because of the interference of the encoder signal Meantime a too big and too small value of F16 04 will lead to the vibration of the system Except for correct setting of F16 parameters Group Correct setting of F00 19 is also needed for a normal Closed loop vector control Reserved 190 7 18 Reserved parameters Group1 F17 7 Detailed function specification F17 00 F17 20 Reserved 191 7 Detailed function specification 7 19 Enhanced Control Functions Parameters Group F18 Operation panel control EEG frequency binding Range 0 15 0 F18 00 can bundle operation panel with frequency reference channels to achieve synchronous switching 0 No bundling 1 Keyboard digital provision 2 AI1 analog provision 3 AI2 analog provisi
145. arameter schedule graph 6 ACCIDEC time 7 7 ACCIDEC time 8 8 ACC DEC time 9 9 ACC DEC time 10 A ACCIDEC time 11 B ACC DEC time 12 C ACC DEC time 13 D ACC DEC time 14 E ACC DEC time 15 F10 02 Step 2 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 03 Step 3 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 04 Step 4 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 05 Step 5 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 06 Step 6 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 07 Step 7 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 08 Step 8 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 09 Step 9 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 10 Step 10 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 11 Step 11 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 12 Step 12 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 13 Step 13 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 14 Step 14 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 15 Step 15 setting 000H E22H 000 o F10 16 Step 1 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 17 Step 2 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 18 Step 3 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 19 Step 4 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 20 Step 5 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 21 Step 6 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 22 Step 7 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 23 Step 8 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 24 Step 9 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 25 Step 10 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0 o F10 26 Step 11 running time 0 6000 0 0 10 0
146. as shown in Figure 7 22 Setting i Upper limit freq Detection range Lower limit E A EE Time y Y1 Wobble upper and lower Fig 7 22 Wobble amplitude limit Fig 7 23 Freq arrival signal output diagram 29 Setup length arrived When detected the actual length exceeds a set value F13 08 output indication signal 30 Internal counter final value arrived Please refer to the function instruction of F08 27 31 Internal counter specified value arrived Please refer to the function instruction of F08 28 32 Internal counter timing meter arrival Please refer to the function instruction of F08 29 33 Shutdown time arrival of the running Frequency inverter runs longer than the setting time of F18 12 output indication signal 34 Time arrival of the running Frequency inverter runs longer than the setting time of F18 13 output indication signal 35 Setup time arrived Accumulated running time of the frequency inverter reaches the set accumulated running time F18 10 output indication signal 36 Setup power on time arrived Accumulated power on time of the frequency inverter reaches the set accumulated running time F18 09 the output indication signal 37 1 pump variable frequency 38 1 pump frequency 39 2rd pump variable frequency 40 2 pump frequency When using Y1 Y4 achieve two pumps constant pressure water supply Y1 Y4 functions are arranged in order of 37 to 40 Under constant pressure water
147. ation provision 0 10000 corresponds to 0 200 0 Rated torque current of the motor 5 EAI1 analog provision Extensible 6 EAI2 analog provision Extensible 183 7 Detailed function specification 7 High speed Pulse provision Please choose the related function of X8 8 Terminal width provision Please choose the related function of X8 The range of the above channels which from the Min value to the Max value corresponds to 0 0 200 Rated torque current of motor F14 14 Torque polarity setting Range 00 11 00 Unit digit Polarity of Torque reference 0 Positive 1 Negative Tens digit Polarity of Torque compensation 0 Same direction with torque reference 1 Opposite direction with torque reference F14 14 defines the polarity of torque compensation and torque reference When select AI2 EAI1 EAI2 as provision channels and set as bipolar mode the polarity of torque provision depends on the polarity of the analog At this time the units digit of F14 14 is invalid It s available changing the direction of torque provision through multi function key F14 15 Torque digital setting value Range 0 0 200 0 Valid when F00 24 1 or 2 0 0 When F14 13 0 the value of torque provision is set by F14 15 A 100 0 value of F14 15 corresponds to the rated current of motor The actual output torque will be decreased when the motor under a weaken field status Whe
148. ave 6 kinds of run mode following is in turn according to their priority jog run closed loop run PLC run multi section speed run swing frequency run common run Shown as Fig 5 1 Jog run High priority ulti sectio gt run gt Traverse run Common run Y low priority Fig 5 1 Run mode 0 Jog run Upon receiving jog run command for instance press the key on keypad during waiting state the inverter run at jog freguency see function code FO1 25 FO01 29 1 Closed loop run The inverter will come into closed loop run mode when closed loop run control 40 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter effective parameter is set F11 00 lor F12 00 1 Namely carry on PID adjustment to specified value and feedback value proportion integral differential calculation see F11 group function code and PID adjuster output is inverter output frequency Can make closed loop run mode ineffective and switch to lower level run mode by multi function terminal function 31 2 PLC run The inverter will enter into PLC run mode and run according to run mode preset see F10 group function code description through setting PLC function effective parameter F 10 00 last bit 0 Can make PLC run mode ineffective and switch to lower level run mode by multi function terminal function 36 3 multi section speed run By nonzero combination of multi function terminal 5 6 7 8 function
149. ay keyboard Optional 3 EN LCDI Local LCD Keyboard Optional 4 EN LCD2 Remote Control LCD Keyboard Optional 5 EN LED3 D Local LED Single display dig tel potentiometer Optional keyboard with the function of parameter copy At present Our has 4 kinds of optional keyboards for our customers selection they are EN LED2 EN LCD1 EN LCD2 and EN LED3 D Their outer dimension and installation size are the same as the standard keyboard EN LED1 For more detailed dimension please refer to Keyboard Operation and Outer Size of Keyboard installing box in Chapter 2 1 EN LCD1 EN LCD2 EN LED3 D are three kinds of keyboard E that with the function of parameter copy Note 2 Using the function of parameter copy could through operating parameter F00 27 C 2 LED double display keyboard Local LED double display keyboard type EN LED2 C 2 1 Keyboard Layout Voltage indicator light LED1 Current indicator light LED1 Frequency indicator light LED1 Failure alarm indicator light a ER Bi Forward run indicator light Mode indicator light H 2 Reverse run indicator light Digital display LED1 Digital display LED2 Voltage indicator light LED2 Parameter percent Current indicator light LED2 Speed r min Freq Hz indicator Increase key N Es Confirm Data key Exit Program key Multiple function key Wa gt Shift Supervision key Decrease key Reverse Jog key L RUN Stop Reset key Forward run key
150. bassembly Unwonted input voltage Check input power supply Acc Dec time is set to too Prolong accelerating decelerating Overvoltage during short time properly E 06 constant speed Er h Di process AE te Assemble reactor abnormally Load inertia is a bit big Use energy consumption subassembly Inverter control Check input power supply or look E 07 power supply Unwonted input voltage f mpur Pp PPly or service overvoltage E 08 Low voltage when Input voltage is too low Check the input voltage running Acc time is set to too short Prolong accelerating time DC injection braking is too Reduce DC injection braking big current prolong braking time Bi Inverter overload improper V F curve Adjust V F curve and torque boost protection Restart rotating motor Set speed checking restart function Ga Source ole 15100 check power source voltage Load is too big Choose inverter with high power Improper V F curve Adjust V F curve and torgue boost ro source voltage is too check power source voltage General motor run at low Can choose frequency conversion E 10 Motor overload speed with big load motor for long time low speed run A 10 protection R Motor overload protection to set motor overload protection factor set incorrectly factor correctly Motor blocked up or load change too suddenly and Check the load quickly The operating current of Confirm whether the parameters inverter less than underload F19 08 F19 09 setting are an eee threshold reasonable i
151. cable inlet Nameplate Fan hole Input amp output ble power cal Fan hole S Input output power cable inlet inlet Fig 2 3 EN600 Parts name sketch 2 5 2 EN500 Appearance and parts name explanation Operation keyboard Cover door rey R Operation keyboard Ps i Upcover plate 5 i J Aranma FS Input amp output x power cable inlet VE aS An Control cable inlet Input amp output ay power cable XT Bottom installation inlet 3 Control cable inlet hol Bottom installation hole Fig 2 4 ENS00 Parts name sketch 2 Inverter type and specification 2 6 Outer size T A GED m Fol 00 ood IN Tm sree HEA M me D W D A DI Fig a Fig b W D W WI Adetail WI Adetal D a MA 1 1 4 Ta A m i Bl il l Hy x i far a 5 Bdetail gt Ni S w2 Bdetail NI N2 N MI 1 EITANT SV S86 0 OOP ae A i Ad S Va Ed EEERSE BEESER i Adetail Bdetail Adetail Bdetail Fig c Fig d 2 Inverter type and specification Fr iat 1 MEE a EE i N mi
152. ce 9 4 Storage The user must pay attention to following points for temporary storage and long term storage after purchasing the inverter 1 Avoid storing the inverter in high temperature moist place and place of dust metal powder and assure good ventilation 2 Longtime storage will cause low quality of electrolyte capacitance so must assure that it s electrified for one time within 1 year and electrification time is not shorter than 1 hour and input voltage must be increased to rated value gradually by voltage regulator of 250w meanwhile the inverter should be cut off from the motor 224 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol Appendix A Modbus communication protocol A 1 Summary We provide general RS485 communication interface in our inverters for the user Through this communication interface upper device such as HMI PC PLC controller and etc can perform centralized monitor to the inverter such as to set inverter parameter control run of inverter read work state of the inverter This communication protocol is interface criterion file designed for realizing above mentioned function please read it earnestly and program according to it so that realize long distance and network control to the inverter A 2 Communication net buildup mode RS232 232 485 conversion module RS485 Fig A 1 net buildup graph A 3 Communication mode At present EN500 EN600 inverter can be used only as Slave device in RS4
153. cific requirements The time unit of acceleration deceleration time 2 15 above is the same as that of acceleration deceleration time 1 all are decided by F01 19 parameter of acceleration deceleration time unit E Acceleration deceleration time 1 is defined in F01 17 and F01 18 Note 122 7 Detailed function specification 7 6 Communication control parameter group F05 F05 00 Protocol selection Range 0 6 0 0 Modbus protocol 1 Reserved 2 Profibus protocol external expansion card needs to be purchased if needed 3 CANlink protocol external expansion card needs to be purchased if needed 4 CANopen protocol external expansion card needs to be purchased if needed 5 Free protocol 1 Can realize the revision of all EN600 function parameters 6 Free protocol 2 Can only realize the revision of part EN600 function parameters Range units digit 0 8 F05 01 aoe ie tens digit 0 3 005 8 hundreds digit 0 6 F05 01 is for choosing communication baud rate when using different communication modules Units digit Free protocol and Modbus Baud rate selection 0 300BPS 1 600BPS 2 1200BPS 3 2400BPS 4 4800BPS 5 9600BPS 6 19200BPS 7 38400BPS 8 57600BPS Tens digit Profibus_DP Baud rate selection 0 115200BPS 1 208300BPS 2 256000BPS 3 512000BPS Hundreds digit CanLink and CANopen Baud rate selection 0 20K 1 50K 2 100K 123 7 Detailed function speci
154. cified and others which can be switched by many means at any time Binding function Run command channel and frequency specified channel can bind together randomly and switch synchronously ONSLISEIEgs dyno Indu Digital input channel Channel 8 for universal digital input max Frequency 1KHz channel 1 can be used as pulse input channel max Input 50KHz which can be expanded to channel 14 Analog input channel Channel 2 for analog input channel AI can choose 4 20mA or 0 10V output AI2 is differential input channel 4 20mA or 10 10V for option which can be expanded to channel 4 analog input Pulse output channel 0 1 20KHz pulse square signal output to achieve setting frequency output frequency and other physical quantity output Analog output channel Channel 2 for analog signal output AO1 can choose 4 20mA or 0 10V AO2 can choose 4 20mA or 0 10Vto achieve setting frequency output frequency and other physical quantity output which can be expanded to channel 4 analog output 14 2 Inverter type and specification Rapid current limit Limit inverter over current to the greatest point and make it run more stably f l Suitable for working site where need one button to control inverter E Monopulse control start and stop first press to start then press to stop and that cycle 5 repeats Its very simple and reliable E Fixed length control Realize fixed
155. class function code be adjusted code F01 01 menu FO1 02 oa AN ses gt lt lt Store modified Parameter Parameter Function code value back to modification modification confirmation first class menu 5 6 Choose Enter into Display next parameter digit second class function code Fig 5 8 example for parameter setting and modification Description under second class menu if the parameter has no blinking digit this function code can t be modified possible reasons are as follows 1 gt This function code shouldn t be modified for example actual detected status parameter run record parameter etc 2 gt This function code can t be modified under run status and can be changed after stopping running 3 gt Parameter protected All the function code can t be modified when function code F00 14 1 or 2 in order to avoid wrong operation Need to set the function code F00 14 to 0 if you want to edit function code parameter 3 Specified frequency adjustment for common run Take example modifying specified frequency from 50 00Hz to 40 00Hz at F01 06 1 F01 03 0 during running for explanation LED displayed content 50 00 50 00 00 49 99 45 00 00 40 00 00 dd Key press ol ti d ae Sto ressin Perm ed set ER ee Press decreasing Adjust es Son pressing go back button tof one based on to normal display status time reguirement after Is Fig 5 9 set freguency adjustment operation e
156. command channel switching function with special switch to command channel switching order F00 16 Range 0 3 0 1 Command channel priority terminal switch to terminal function code 49 50 51 terminal run command channel selection terminal function code 52 53 multi function key switch F01 15 when B switching to terminal control be sure the terminal command invalid Terminal switch to and terminal run command channel Note selection refer to F08 group parameter about the detailed description of terminal function 2 We suggest alter the mode at the stop state moy Motor sesi display Range 0 1 999 9 100 0 coefficient This function code is used to check speed scale display error there is no effect to motor actual speed Fo0 18 Line velocity display Range 0 1 999 9 1 0 coefficient This function code is used to check speed scale display error there is no effect to motor actual speed F00 19 Extended Port parts set Range 0 10 0 0 Expansion card invalid 95 7 Detailed function specification 1 Reserved 2 Multi pump water supply card 3 Incremental PG encoder 4 10 Reserved This function is for extended port expansion card parameter after setting expansion card FOO 19 will choose the expansion card number accordingly then we can use the expansion card normally For example when Extended Port add PG expansion card F00 19 should be set to 3 Range un
157. cy Interference b and wire leakage current from inverter output side 7 AC output reactor Installing AC output reactor is suggested to avoid motor insulation damage oversize current leakage and inverter frequent protection when connecting wire between inverter and motor exceeds 50m 8 Safety earth ground wire Inverter and motor must be earth ground connection connection wire should select as shorter and thicker as above 3 5mm multicore copper wire and earth grounding resistance smaller than10 T N Isolation switch Breaker or fuse Contactor Brake unit In option Ac output reactor In option Fig 3 8 connection of inverter and fitting parts 21 3 Installation and wiring 3 4 2 Main loop terminal wiring 1 Main loop input output terminal show as table 3 2 3 3 Table 3 2 EN600 main loop input output terminal description A 7 Terminal AT Adapted type Main loop terminal ee Function description Ll 12 1 phase AC input terminal connect power source IDC volt Positive terminal EN600 2S0004 PB External connect to brake ku resistor reverse terminal EN600 280037 IDC volt Negative terminal U v w 3 phase AC output terminal connect to motor Grounding terminal R amp T 3 phase AC input terminal connect power source IDC volt Positive terminal EN600 4T0007G 0015P PB
158. d 2 frame end end checkout sum D checkout sum Ko O checkout sum checkout gt checkout sum Checkout ag A checkout sum area D checkout sum arka 3 checkout sum 3 checkout sum a set data rundata a z N set data Setting 5 mun data Run data set data data area 3 run data aa g set data 4 2 rundata 2 o command index 8 command index i a amp command index Index 2 co command index ES area 3 Index area gt assistant index i i i Bo gt failure index Ne assistant index P o failure index wo in devi d main device comman N ili i a n command i E auxiliary device response response A area ase st main device command auxiliary device response ae n auxiliary device address en auxiliary device address address N address A auxiliary device address auxiliary device address frame head head frame head head ob an en an Eg Definiti so 45 So 33 ennition 3 3 gs Definition gt Oo 9 e 5 5 5 n n n sa Fig B 2 command response frame format 241 Appendix B Free port communication protocol Remark 1 Setting data area and run data area may not be existent in some command data frame format so in protocol command list it s marked with nothing 2 In protocol effective character setis 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E Fandhex data ODH ASCII lowercasea b c d
159. d it is possible to flash motor and it should be used by derating or boosting input and output voltage 3 as carrier frequency low the motor noise would increase accordingly 4 4 Installation demand for electromagnetic on off electronic device It should pay attention that surge absorber must be installed when electromagnetic on off electronic device like relay electromagnetic contactor and electromagnetic iron generating noise easily and largely installed near to inverter or in the same control cabinet show as Fig 4 3 diode 24Vpc i varistor Inverter or other devices i as i 220V Ac RC filter 220Vac Fig 4 3 install demand for electromagnetic on off device 4 5 Noise filter installation instructions 1 To use strictly as per the rated value filter metal casing grounding must connect reliably to assemble cabinet metal grounding in large scale and it required good conductive continuity Otherwise it may cause electric shock and influence the EMC effect seriously 2 Filter grounding terminal and inverter terminal must connect to the same common earth grounding otherwise it will influence the EMC effect seriously 3 Filter installed as close as possible to inverter power input terminal 37 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter 5 1 Run of invert
160. demand and respond data package 1 respond mainframe demand and without response F05 03 Local address 0 247 1 1 x this function code is used to identify inverter s address among which 0 is broadcast address When setting broadcast address it can only receive and execute upper computer broadcast command while cannot respond to upper computer F05 04 Communication overtime 0 0 1000 0s 0 1s 0 0s o checkout time F05 05 Communication error 0 0 1000 0s 0 1s 0 0s o checkout time F05 06 Local response delay time 0 200ms Modbus effective Ims 5ms o F05 07 Main amp sub inverter 0 500 1 100 o communication frequency setting percentage F05 08 communication virtual 00 FFH 1 00H o input terminal enabled Bit0 CX1 virtual input terminal enabled 0 forbidden 1 enabled Bitl CX2 virtual input terminal enabled 0 forbidden 1 enabled Bit2 CX3 virtual input terminal enabled 0 forbidden 1 enabled Bit3 CX4 virtual input terminal enabled 0 forbidden 1 enabled Bit4 CX5 virtual input terminal enabled 0 forbidden 1 enabled Bit5 CX6 virtual input terminal enabled 0 forbidden 1 enabled Bit6 CX7 virtual input terminal enabled 0 forbidden 1 enabled Bit7 CX8 virtual input terminal enabled 0 forbidden 1 enabled F05 09 Communication virtual 0 Independent node 1 0 o input terminal joining 1 Terminal node node F05 10 Communicati
161. ds F26 02 The last three fault Same as above 1 0 a records F26 03 The last four fault Same as above 1 0 N records F26 04 Setup frequency at the 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz last one fault F26 05 Output frequency at the 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz last one fault F26 06 Output current at the last 0 07 6553 5A 0 1A 0 0A one fault F26 07 DC busbar voltage at the 0 0 6553 5V 0 1V 0 0V last one fault F26 08 Module temperature at 0 125 C 1 C OC ig the last one fault F26 09 Input terminal status at 0 a the last one fault F26 10 Accumulated run time at 0 65535min Imin Omin the last one fault F26 11 Setup frequency at the 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz gt last two fault F26 12 Output frequency at the 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz ig last two fault F26 13 Output current at the last 0 0 6553 5A 0 1A 0 0A i two fault F26 14 DC busbar voltage atthe 0 0 6553 5V 0 1V 0 0V gt last two fault F26 15 Module temperature at the 0 125 C VC OC ig last two fault F26 16 Input terminal status at 0 the last two fault F26 17 Accumulated run time at 0 65535min Imin Omin ri the last two fault F27 Password and Manufacturer Function Parameter Group Function Min Factory Modifi Code Name SerRange Unit DR cation F27 00 User password 00000 65535 1 00000 o F27 01 Manufacturer password 00000 65535 1 00000 o 87 6 Function paramet
162. dule graph F14 16 Forward speed limit 0 Digital setting 1 0 x channel selection in 1 AIl Analog setting Torque control mode 2 AI2 Analog setting 3 Terminal UP DOWN adjustment setting 4 communication provision 5 EAI Analog setting expansion effective 6 EAI2 Analog setting expansion effective 7 rapid pulse setting X8 terminal needs to choose the corresponding function 8 terminal pulse width setting X8 terminal needs to choose the corresponding function Note This parameter is valid when F00 24 1 or 2 F14 17 Reverse speed limit 0 Digital setting 1 0 x channel selection in 1 AIl Analog setting Torque control mode 2 AI Analog setting 3 Terminal UP DOWN adjustment setting 4 Communication provision 5 EAI Analog setting expansion effective 6 EAI2 Analog setting expansion effective 7 Rapid pulse setting X8 terminal needs to choose the corresponding function 8 Terminal pulse width setting X8 terminal needs to choose the corresponding function Note This parameter is valid when F00 24 1 or 2 F14 18 Forward speed limit 0 00Hz upper limit frequency This parameter 0 01Hz 50 00Hz o value in Torque control is valid when F00 24 1 or 2 mode F14 19 Reverse speed limit 0 00Hz upper limit frequency This parameter 0 01Hz 50 00Hz o value in Torque control is valid when F00 24 1 or 2 mode F14 20 Torque 0 000 60 000s This parameter is valid when 0 0
163. e 0 001 65 535Q AC Asynchronous drive power lt 7 5KW F15 07 motor Stator p ake se resistance Range 0 0001 6 5535Q Ac typ drive power 7 5KW A i Range 0 001 65 535Q AC syncironous drive power 7 5KW F15 08 motor Rotor us Depend on TESS EIER Range 0 0001 6 5535Q Ac type drive power 7 5KW Ee Range 0 01 655 35mH AC Syncaronous drive power 7 5KW F15 09 motor leakage i Ee se inductance Range 0 001 65 535mH AC typ drive power 27 5KW Range 0 1 6553 5mH AC Asynchronous drive power lt 7 5KW Depend on F15 10 motor mutual inductance Range 0 01 655 35mH AC typ drive power 7 5KW Asynchronous Depend on F15 11 motor no load Range 0 01 655 35A P y current typ 187 7 Detailed function specification F15 07 F15 11 is the characteristic parameters of asynchronous motor not display on the nameplate which need detected by auto tuning To achieved a good control performance please let the motor unload before start rotating auto tuning For the asynchronous motor that cannot be disconnected from the load you can choose static auto tuning or input the motor parameters manually Another way is just set F15 01 and used the default parameters in F15 01 F15 11 Meantime Choosing different type of G and P will also change the default parameters in F15 01 F15 11 F15 12 gt Reserved F15 18 F15 19 Motor parameter auto tuning selection
164. e 15 30V 3 X3 Multifunction input 3 Opto coupler isolation Compatible with bipolar B X4 Multifunction input 4 input 9 X5 Multifunction input 5 Input impedance 4 7KQ gt X6 Multifunction input 6 max input frequency 1KHz z X7 Multifunction input 7 g Multifunction input 8 ee e function it can be used as E Di ie sed pulse Input impedance 2 2KQ P max input frequency 50KHz Provide 24V power to external device 24 4V SA 2AN Dew source Max output current 200mA factory default connect to 24V when use external External power source signal to drive X terminal it need to connect to a PW 3 g input external power source and cut off with 24V g power terminal g Provide 10Vpower to external device 10 0 5V g SION TO power ORCS Max output current 50mA COM Common interface Reference ground for digital signal and 24V power GND Common interface Reference ground for analog signal and 10V power Input range DC OV 10V 4 20mA selected by SWI dial switch on control board All Analog input Input impedance voltage input at 20KQ current gt input at 250Q resolution 1 4000 ws Input range DC 10V 10V 4 20mA selected by E the second figure of F00 20 and SW2 dial switch on control board ole Analog mput 2 Input impedance voltage input at 20KQ current input at 250Q resolution 1 2000 Voltage or current output is selected by SW3 oo Analog output 1 AO1 and SW4 AO2 dial switch on control Analog board onpa AO
165. e Ee Ee Bee Ee se 209 7 26 User Definition Display Parameter Group F25 steer s ese sesse ses ee 210 7 27 Fault Record Function Parameter Group F26 see sesse se sees ses see 212 7 28 Password and Manufacturer Function Parameter Group F27 214 8 Troubleshooting TT EE eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee Tee Tee Tee Tee Tee ee eee eee 215 8 1 Failure and countermeasure corer errr t ett t ett e ttt ee eee ere EE cee EE cee ARE ees 215 8 2 Failure record lookup sette ees ee eke eek ee eke EER EE ER EER ee eke EER ee eke ees 220 ETER N RE EE EE ENES 220 BAA Tarm RADE EE EE EE ES 221 o Maintenance s seserssseenstenseteceosscesesacucccsssecanseteessensssaesereeeoes 222 91 Routine maintenance ces eni r e e e ea Ee Ge Ed od EP ee 222 9 2 Inspection and replacement of damageable parts reses se see 222 9 3 Repair guarantee etes ee see eek nerne ER EER ee ER EER Ke see ee 223 TEE EE EE 224 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol rr FEE EE EE EE EE ee 225 Appendix B Free port communication protocol srrrrrttrsttter ttt EE EE eet Ee ee 239 Appendix C Keyboard tte ese eke EER EE ER EER EE ER EER EE ER EER ee ER ee ee ee eke ee 251 C 1 Keyboard selection renerne EER EE renere EE ER EER Re see ee 251 C 2 LED double display keyboard tte tese eke eek ee ER EER ee ER EER se ees ee 251 C 3 LCD keyboard tee ese Ee EER EE ER EER EE ER EER EE ER EER ee ER EER ee eke ee 252 C 4 LED single display digital potentiometer keyboard rer
166. e communication and control is normal function code 00 RE modification is effective password is correct 1 frame checkout error 2 command area data overrun When this response code is reported 20 3 index area data overrun data of command area index area 4 frame length error non ASCII byte and running data area are not exist in area except frame head frame reported end 1 control to auxiliary device is y Whether report this response code relate ineffective ba p z i to current set state of auxiliary device 2 ineffective function code parameter BIT SE When report data of area index 30 modification 3 setting running data area data overrun 4 password error area and run data area are reported according to protocol requirement 4 Auxiliary index command index failure index Data meanings include auxiliary index byte and command index byte For mainframe auxiliary index command index are used for cooperating mainframe command in realizing specific function For auxiliary device failure state code command index are reported without modification Data type hex 4 byte Command index occupy 2 low byte Auxiliary index occupy 2 high byte auxiliary index ASCII format command index are used for reporting data range 00 FF data range 00 FF Auxiliary device failure state occupy
167. e inverter interference to ambient environment this chapter introduce installation means to restrain interference from aspect of interference restrain field wiring system earth grounding leakage current and power filter usage Inverter will have good electromagnetic compatibility under general industrial environment when user install the inverter according to this chapter 4 1 Noise interference restraining Inverter interference generating for run may have effect to nearby electronic device and the effect depend on the inverter installation surrounding electromagnetic environment and the restrain interference ability of the device 4 1 1 Interference noise type Becuase of inverter working principle there are mainly 3 kinds of noise interference source 1 circuit conduction interference 2 space emission interference 3 electromagnetic induction interference Interference Type Space emission Electromagnetic interference induction interference Input wire Inverter power Output wire induction c induction component route 6 route route Circuit conduction interference interference interference route Inverter main circuit Motor wire Power wire switch and switch VW radio R S T radio power radio inteference interference route OD route route route Fig 4 1 interference noise type 34 4 EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility Explanation 4 1 2 Basic count
168. e must directly connect to floor it cannot connect to earth grounding through other device and the location of earth grounding should close to inverter as possible as 5 strong current cable R S T U V W cannot parallel wiring closely with control signal wire and bundled together is prohibited It should keep distance from over 20 60 cm relative to strong current size When it s necessary to intersect it should be orthogonal crossing show as Fig 4 2 Power wire or motor cable Control signal wire Fig 4 2 system wiring demand 6 earth grounding wire for strong current should separately connect to earth grounding with control signal and sensor earth grounding wire for weak current 7 Forbid to connect inverter input terminal R S T to other devices 4 3 Leak current and countermeasure The leak current flows through inverter input and output terminal for wire capacitance and motor capacitance and its size decided by the distributed capacitance and carrier frequency There are two kinds of leak current leak current to earth and wire to wire Restraining methods as below 1 diminish the cable length between inverter and motor 2 install ferrite magnetic ring or output reactor at the inverter output terminal 36 4 EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility Explanation When reactor installed with rated voltage drop more 5 and long wiring to U V W terminal it would reduce motor s voltage apparently When motor run at full loa
169. e parameter Press can quickly switch value between F26 04 F26 10 parameters and fault alarm easy to view the fault records 7 Keypad key press locking operation Under monitoring situation To press J for 2s the keyboard will display LOCHI now the buttons on the keyboard are under locked The detailed locked situation is decided by the value of hundred unit of F00 14 8 Keypad key press unlocking operation 1 Under locked keypad situation press key for 2s to unlock the keypad 48 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter 2 Under locked keypad situation if there is no key please press key for 2s to unlock the keypad 5 3 Inverter electrification 5 3 1 Check before electrification Please carry on wiring based on operation requirement provided in inverter wiring of this Service manual 5 3 2 First electrification Close input side AC power supply switch after correct wiring and power supply confirmed electrify the inverter and keypad LED display 8 8 8 8 8 contactor closed normally LED displayed set frequency shows that electrification is finished First electrification operation process is shown as Fig 5 12 Input voltage correct Y Electrify Y N Display 8 8 8 8 8 Y Vv N Hear contactor closed sound Y Vv N Display 0 00Hz Success Failure Cut off powe i Fig 5 12 first electrification operation flow 49 6 Function parameter schedule
170. ection control when main frequency provide is e AI2 EAI1 EAI2 and setup provide to be 10 10V run direction confirmed by analog provide signal polarity completely when PID run is valid run direction confirmed by PID error polarity and parameter F11 21 completely Note Excerpt terminal encoder provide F01 00 9 main and auxiliary provide channel cannot be set into the same frequency source if they are the same then panel would be light ALM and display A 51 F01 01 Main frequency digital Range 0 00Hz upper 50 00Hz setup limit frequency When F01 00 0 3 or 4 F01 01 is the initial value of main frequency Main frequency digital Range 00 11 00 control F01 02 Units digit power down reserve setup 0 Main frequency power down reserve When main frequency channel provide is valid power down in run status current main frequency of run frequency is recorded in parameter F01 01 1 Main frequency power down no reserve Tens digit halt reserve setup 0 Halt main frequency hold When main frequency channel provide is valid current run frequency only recorded after halt 1 Halt main frequency recovery F01 01 main setting frequency recorded in software is recovery to value of parameter F01 01 after halt Only when parameter F01 00 0 3 4 it can be valid after 3 power fail or Stop storage function both are valid stop the machine Note first it also can serve F01 03 Auxiliary freque
171. ed by the positive and negative characteristic regulation as shown in Fig 7 41 F11 15 PID regulation upper Range 0 00Hz upper limit 50 00Hz limit frequency Frequency F11 16 PID regulation lower Range 0 00Hz upper limit 0 00Hz limit frequency Frequency User can set up the parameters F11 15 and F11 16 to define the output lower limit and upper limit frequency of the PID regulator F11 17 Integral regulation selection Range 0 1 0 0 Stop integral regulating when the comparison value of the reference and feedback reaches the range of threshold for integral separation 1 Keep integral regulating even thought the comparison value of the reference and feedback reach the range of threshold integral separation Adjusting this parameter can avoid integral saturation and improve the response of the system F11 18 PID threshold of the integral separation PID integral separated function there is no integral regulating just proportion Range 0 0 100 0 100 0 regulating during closed loop control when the comparison value that between 172 7 Detailed function specification reference and feedback is bigger than this threshold When the comparison is smaller than this threshold the integral regulating will be active and can adjust the response speed of system by adjusting this parameter F11 19 Preset Closed loop Range 0 00Hz upper 0 00Hz frequency limit frequency mmo
172. ed curve 1 Same as units digit 63 6 Function parameter schedule graph Ten thousands digit extended curve 2 Same as units digit F07 Analog Pulse input function parameter group Function Min Facto Modifi Code Dang Se Ranee Unit Defait cation F07 00 AT input filter time 0 000 9 999s 0 001s 0 050s x F07 01 All setting gain 0 000 9 999 0 001 1 004 o F07 02 ATI setting bias 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 5 o F07 03 AI2 input filter time 0 000 9 999s 0 001 0 050s x FO7 04 Al2 setting gain 0 000 9 999 0 001 1 003 o FO7 05 AD setting bias 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 1 o F07 06 Analog setting bias Units digit AT setting bias polarity 1 01 o polarity 0 Positive polarity 1 Negative polarity Tens digit AI2 setting bias polarity 0 Positive polarity 1 Negative polarity F07 07 Pulse input filter time 0 000 9 999s 0 001 0 000s x FO7 08 Pulse input gain 0 000 9 999 0 001 1 000 FO7 09 Pulse input Max 0 01 50 00KHz 0 01KHz 10 00KHz frequency FO7 10 Pulse width input filter 0 000 9 999s 0 001s 0 000s x time FO7 11 Pulse width input gain _ 0 000 9 999 0 001 1 000 FO7 12 Pulse width input logic 0 positive logic 1 0 setting l negative logic FO7 13 Max pulse input width 0 1 999 9ms 0 1ms 100 0ms o FO7 14 Reserved FO7 15 Reserved FO7 16 Reserved FO7 17 Reserved F0
173. eded to start and reset the device has a state machine control State machine include Initialization Pre operational Operational Stopped D 3 3 Object Dictionary Object Dictionary OD Object Dictionary is an ordered group of objects each object using an index value of 16 is addressed in order to allow access to the data structure of a single element while the definition of an eight sub indexes D 3 4 Communication 1 Communication objects Management packets Service Data Objects SDO process data objects PDO the pre definition packet or special function object 2 Communication model master slave model client server model producer consumer model D 3 5 Agreement 1 NMT Agreement network management network management Status Agreement definition of the state machine change commands such as starting or stopping the equipment to detect remote device bootup and failure scenarios 2 Heartbeat Agreement nodes in the network to monitor and confirm it is working properly 3 SDO agreement between devices used to transfer large low priority data typically used to configure devices on the CANopen network 4 PDO Agreement 8 bytes or less used to transmit data no other agreement preset which means data has been pre definition 262 Appendix D Communication extension card D 3 6 CANopen form and terminal definition description E deeel Fig D 2 CANopen outline dimensional drawing Table D 3 Terminal functi
174. elde Data Z 8 ele8e Datarield SE Ela EE i 5 E amp Field EP SE 2 EP SE 232 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol A 8 2 ACSIT Mode Host read Slave command code 03 The host frame The host frame format ml ala a a O O Q o 2 2 2 2 w 5 23 6 4 o Slo S R S R EIR GIR G2 Fle ETES EIE EE Sele s l S Boe E aas 5 o5 l5 09 5 09 8 2 BE EISE SESESESERRSERESER o e a Sole 2 jerler Sle 4lg4ieg4iraioaioalog 5 S5 SR EE SI Bla ea ela gla aja g ll jl g 2 Aa elg g a a 5 5 5 5 3 5 5 a S amp a a Send 1 2 2 4 4 2 2 byte Remark gt Begin symbol The lower computer judge the frame header of ASCII based on this It is gt Slave address Single inverter ID code range 0 247 Thereinto 0 is broadcast address Broadcast address can control all the lined Slave simultaneously and the Slave will not send back any Data to the host That means the Slave only accept and do not send Modbus protocol without host address gt Command code Reading the command of parameter or data from inverter the value is 0 3 gt Register address The internal memory address of inverter function parameter is of 4 byte which is ASCII mode transformed from Hexadecimal Corresponding relation between specific parameters and memory address can be seen in the later table gt Register number The number of parameters read by a
175. emark Number Communication wiring By the client device connected to the CNI ae terminal CAN bus communication i When you install this plug docking with Ji Signal port Tena por the main control board CN2 n Terminal resistor access Connect J2 then terminal resistor entry connect to bus 1 The definition of CN1 pin PIN data Definition PIN data Definition 1 Signal CANL 3 COM 2 Signal CANH 265 Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card E 1 The selection of encoder expansion card Universal encoder expansion card PG card As an option to use it is the necessary option for closed loop vector control inverter Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card No Model Description Remark Differentiator input PG card encoder 1 EN PGO1 input signal not isolated suitable for all Optional series machine Differentiator input PG card encoder 2 EN PG02 input signal through the optocoupler Optional isolation stronger anti interference ability suitable for all series machine E 2 PG card shape and terminal definitions 266 Fig E 1 EN PG01 EN PG02 Outline dimension drawing Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card Table E 1 Terminal function description Terminal Name Description Remark number CNI Board and board When installing the plug and the main Butt socket control board CN2 docking
176. en AO output voltage the adjustment is as follows Analog output AOI after revise output gain F09 40 xanalog output AO1 before revise output bias F09 41 x10V When AO1 output current the adjustment is as follows Analog output AOI after revise output gain F09 40 xanalog output AO1 before revise output bias F09 41 x20mA This function code will influence analog output during modify Note Processes F09 42 Analog output AO2 filter time Range 0 0 20 0s 0 0s F09 43 Analog output AO2 gain Range 0 00 2 00 1 00 F09 44 Analog output AO2 bias Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 Please refer to the function introduce of parameters F09 39 F09 41 F09 45 DO filter time Range 0 0 20 0s 0 0s F09 46 DO output gain Range 0 00 2 00 1 00 F09 47 rao tia pulse output Range 0 1 20 0KHz 10 0KHz Please refer to the function introduce of parameters F09 39 F09 41 Maximum pulse output frequency of terminal DO corresponds to maximum select value of F09 37 For example F09 31 0 terminal DO s function is output frequency before slip compensation which means Maximum pulse output frequency corresponds to upper frequency F09 48 Reserved F09 49 Reserved F09 50 Reserved 160 7 Detailed function specification 7 11 Simple PLC Multi speed function parameters Group F10 Range unitdigit 0 3 tens digit 0 2 hundreds digit 0 1 thousands digit 0 1
177. er 5 1 1 Running order channels There are 3 kinds of order channel for controlling run action of the inverter such as run stop jog etc 0 keypad Control by key 0 2 EH on keypad factory default 1 Control terminal Use control terminal FWD REV COM to make of double line control or use one terminal of X1 X8 and FWD or REV to make of three line control 2 Communication port Control run and stop of the inverter through upper machine or other device which can communicate with the inverter Choose order channel by setting function code FO1 15 and also can choose by multi function input terminal F08 18 F08 25 choose function 49 50 51 52 53 Also can reach switch the command channel through multi function key lt gt Please make switching debugging in advance when switch the order channel to check if it can fulfill system requirement otherwise have danger of damaging device and injuring personal 5 1 2 Frequency provision channel EN500 EN600 includes main frequency provision and assist frequency provision Main frequency provision 0 keypad analog potentiometer provision 1 AT1 analog setting 2 AI2 analog setting 3 terminal UP DOWN adjustment provision 4 communication provision Modbus and external bus share a main frequency memory 5 EAI analog setting extend effective 6 EAI2 analog setting extend effective 7 high speed pulse provision X8 terminal need select the corresponding function 8
178. er schedule graph C Monitor Function Parameter Group Function Min Factory Modifi Code name EG Unit Defsuit cation C 00 Display the parameter of i F00 01 F00 07 definition col Display the parameter of i F00 02 F00 08 definition C 02 Display the parameter o FOO 03 F00 09 definition Co Display the parameter of i F00 04 F00 10 definition C 04 Display the parameter of i F00 05 F00 11 definition C 05 Display the parameter o f i F00 06 F00 12 definition Deorresponding relationship of input terminal status as below Hone VLELELELEI TE l ev i sasie L X1 terminal status J terminal input valid Reserved X2 terminal status X8 terminal status F i X3 terminal status XT terminal status i i X4 terminal status X6 terminal status X5 terminal status 2 Corresponding relationship of standard output terminal status as below III I I N J terminal input invalid l aah 3 seed ii terminal status J terminal input valid Reserved Y2 terminal status Reserved Y3 terminal status Reserved i Y4 terminal status Reserved RLY terminal status 88 6 Function parameter schedule graph 3 Corresponding relationship of communication virtual input terminal status as below l l l l l l E terminal input invalid l l l l l l l l terminal input valid L CX1 terminal status CX2 terminal status Reserved gt Reserved CX8 terminal status
179. erational rule selection terminal 2 15 Main i and auxiliary frequency 64 Length reset operational rule selection terminal 3 16 Frequency ascending command UP 65 Reset this operation time Frequency descending command 17 DOWN 66 Reserved 18 Frequency ascending descending 67 Reserved frequency resetting 19 Multi step closed loop terminal 1 68 Reserved 20 Multi step closed loop terminal 2 69 Reserved 21 Multi step closed loop terminal 3 70 Reserved 22 External equipment failure input 71 Reserved 23 External interruption input 72 Reserved 24 External resetting input 73 Reserved 25 Free stop input 74 Reserved 26 External stop instruction Stop 75 Reserved according to the stop mode 27 stop DC braking input command DB 76 Reserved 28 inverter running prohibited Stop 77 Reserved according to the stop mode 29 Acceleration deceleration prohibited 78 Reserved command 30 Three wire running control 79 Reserved 31 Process PID invalid 80 Reserved 32 Process PID stop 81 Reserved 33 Process PID integral holding 82 Reserved 34 Process PID integral resetting 83 Reserved Process PID function negation 35 Closed loop adjustment feature 84 Reserved negation 36 Simple PLC invalid 85 Reserved 138 7 Detailed function specification 37 Simple PLC halted 86 Reserved 38 Simple PLC stop state resetting 87 Reserved 39 Main frequency switchover to digit 88 Reserved keypad 40 Main frequency switchover to
180. ermeasure for restrain interference Table 4 1 interference restrain countermeasure Noise spread road Countermeasure of weakening effect Earth grounding cable of peripheral device and inverter wiring make up of the closed loop and leakage current of inverter earth grounding cable will make device perform wrong action It will decrease wrong action when device not connect to earth grounding When the power of peripheral device and inverter power belong to the same power source high harmonic gererating from inverter will transmit the voltage and current along with the power line which will interfere other devices within the same power source system Take some restraining measures as below install electromagnetic noise filter at inverter input end use isolation transformer to isolate other devices connect power end of peripheral device to remote power grid add power ferrite filter magnetic ring to inverter R S T three phase wire to restrain high harmonic current conduction OOS Keep other sensitive devices and signal wire installed away from inverterr it should use shield wire and make the shield layer single end earth grounding Besides keep distance from inverter and its input amp output wire as possible as When signal wire need to intersect with strong current cable it should make them orthogonal crossing not parallel Install high frequency noise filter ferrite common code choke also called magnetic
181. erter function parameter is double byte The high byte is in the front and the low byte is in the back The detail relation between parameter and storage address can be seen in the later excel gt Data The new value of revised parameter gt Checksum From slave address to the character before checksum the LRC checksum of the character string The followings are the example of command frame and return frame all the Data are ASCII character gt Inquiry frame 0106010113885 C n r 236 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol The detail introduction of every byte 2 beginning symbol 0 1 Slave address 0 6 write command 0 1 0 1 storage address of writing parameter 13 8 8 the value of writing parameter 5 C 01060101138 8 for LRC checksum 0x5C 0x100 0x01 0x06 0x01 0x01 0x13 0x88 gt Response frame 0106010113885 C n r Detail introduction of every byte beginning symbol 0 1 Slave address 0 6 write command 0 1 0 1 storage address of writing parameter 13 8 8 the value of writing parameter 5 C 01060101138 8 for LRC checksum 0x5C 0x100 0x01 0x06 0x01 0x01 0x13 0x88 1 ASCII frame realizes transform by that 8Bit hexadecimal is divided as different 2 character of 4 and then grouped ashexadecimal of one 8Bit when reaching the destination 2 Frame header add frame footer adds n r the enter line break character E 3 The valid character i
182. es connect to motor C gt Grounding terminal 23 3 Installation and wiring RST 3 phase AC input terminal ai Connect power source 7 T 7 Vv IDC volt Positive terminal EN500 4T1600G 2000P o o o 9 o o o lLO IDC volt Negative terminal EN500 4T2200G 2500P 5 gt External connect brake unit o j TE 3 phase AC output terminal 7 connect to motor 5 Grounding terminal RST 3 phase AC input terminal j connect power source R S T OU V W IDC volt Positive terminal ENS500 4T2500G 2800P IDC volt Negative terminal EN500 4T4000G 4500P O External connect brake unit al EE 3 phase AC output terminal Me connect to motor C Grounding terminal R S T 3 phase AC input terminal fit connect power source R S T 4 IDC volt Positive terminal EN500 4T4500G 5000P Mi bo id ss op IDC volt Negative terminal ER EDGE External connect brake unit U V W UV 3 phase AC output terminal connect to motor Grounding terminal 1 The wiring of main loop must connect right according to the description above Wrong wiring will cause device damage and personal injury 2 Short circuit copper bar assembly for 18 5KW and up power terminal 1 for EN600 must be edgefold in up direction or it will cause device damage and personal injury in the reverse direction 24 3 5 Basic running wiring diagram
183. esponsible for inverter and device damage and human injury 1 Forbid to connect AC power source to output terminal U V W otherwise it could cause inverter completely damage 2 Not allow for short circuit between and otherwise it could cause inverter damage and power source short circuit 3 Forbid to install inverter on flammable objects otherwise it may cause fire 4 Do not install inverter in a environment with explosive gas it may cause explosion 5 Bare connection terminal should be insulation treatment after main loop connection otherwise it may cause electric shock 6 Do not operate inverter with wet hands when inverter power on otherwise it may cause electric shock 7 Inverter earth terminal should be well grounding connection 8 Do not open the front cover for wiring when inverter power on Inverter wiring and check must handle after 10 minutes of inverter power off 9 Wiring connection should handle by qualified person and not allow to slip any conductive objects inside inverter otherwise it may cause a electric shock or inverter damage 10 when inverter stocked for more than 6 months using voltage regulator to boost voltage up and keep inverter in standy status for 1 hour otherwise it may cause electric shock and explosion 1 Forbid to connect control terminals except TA TB TC to AC 220V 380V signal otherwise it may cause inverter completely damage 2 Do not install and run inverter when
184. etting relationship between the input signal pulse frequency and setting frequency is as shown in F06 and FO7 group parameter 92 Pulse width PWM input X8 valid Only valid for multi functional input terminal X8 this function terminal accepts PWM signal check pulse width as frequency setting relationship between input PWM Pulse width and setting frequency is as shown in F06 and FO7 group parameter 93 96 Reserved F08 26 FWD REV operating mode selection Range 0 4 0 This parameter defines five different modes by controlling external terminal inverter running 0 Two wire control mode 1 K2 K1 Operating command ENS00 EN600 K 0 0 Stop o FWD K2 1 0 REV Le REV 0 1 FWD R COM 1 i Stop Fig 7 16 Two wire operating mode 1 146 7 Detailed function specification 1 Two wire control mode 2 K2 K1 Operating command EN500 EN600 K 0 0 Stop OFWD K2 1 0 Stop o REV 0 1 FWD p COM 1 1 REV Fig 7 17 Two wire operating mode 2 2 Two wire control mode 3 monopulse control mode Monopulse control is triggered type control After triggering SB1 once it forwards runs Retriggering SB1 once it stops Triggering SB1 once it reversely runs Retriggering SB2 once it stops If it is forward running the inverter stops when triggering SB2 once Retriggering SB1 once it stops If i
185. etting channel selection terminal terminal function 44 47 is higher than the main frequency switchover to terminal function 41 42 43 For details see table 7 8 Table 7 8 Main frequency setting channel selection terminal Channel Channel Channel Channel gt a selection selection selection selection EE Ee EE grace terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1 EE OEF OFF OFF ON Operation keypad digital setting OFF OFF ON OFF AT analog setting OFF OFF ON ON AI2 analog setting OFF ON OFF OFF Terminal UP DOWN setting OFF ON OFF ON Communication setting OFF ON ON OFF EAI analog setting extended OFF ON ON ON EAI analog setting extended ON OFF OFF OFF rapid pulse setting X8 ON OFF OFF ON Pulse width setting X8 ON OFF ON OFF Terminal encoder setting X1 X2 ON OFF ON ON Keypad analog potentiometer setting optional ON ON OFF OFF Reserved ON ON OFF ON Reserved ON ON ON OFF Reserved 48 Auxiliary frequency reset Only valid for digit auxiliary frequency when this function terminal is valid reset auxiliary frequency setting quantity setting frequency is completely decided by main frequency setting channel 144 7 Detailed function specification 49 Command switchover to panel When current command source is reset by terminal or communication switchover between current command source and keypad command setting can be realized by this termin
186. evel running mode can be available only when the inverter runs in closed loop mode e F11 00 1 or F12 00 1 2 When switching to low level running mode start stop control direction and acceleration deceleration time comply with relevant setting of running mode Note 32 Process PID stop Invalid when PID stops when inverter maintains current output frequency PID regulation of frequency source is no more performed 33 Process PID integral holding PID integral impact maintains and will not regulate according to the output quantity 34 Process PID integral resetting When the terminal is valid PID integral regulation function halts but PID proportional control and differential control function are still valid 35 Process PID function negation When the terminal is valid direction of PID effect and setting direction of F11 13 is opposite 36 simple PLC invalid Realize flexible switchover in low level running mode under PLC running status 1 Switchover between PLC and low level running mode can be available only when the inverter runs in PLC mode F10 00 unit s E digit is not 0 Note 2 When switching to low level running mode start stop control direction and acceleration deceleration time comply with relevant setting of running mode 37 Simple PLC halted It is to control the stop of running PLC when the terminal is valid the inverter runs at zero frequency PLC running does not time after invalid imp
187. except user password definition and manufacturer password Fre Ord Checkout Meanings ae Address Order H bei Run data MA Frame end head index sum Mainframe 7EH ADDR 14 See remark 4 BCC ODH order Byte guantity 1 2 2 4 4 4 1 Auxiliary Function device 7EH ADDR 06 See remark code BCC ODH respond parameter Byte guantity 1 2 2 4 4 4 1 Command index combination of function code group number and hex code of function code number For instance If want to read parameter of F00 05 function code order index 0005 If want to read parameter of FO2 11 function code order index 020B If want to read parameter of F02 15 function code order index 020F If want to read parameter of F02 13 function code order index 020D Corresponding relation between decimal and hex value of function code group No Function code J Function code ne Decimal Hex Decimal Hex group No group No F00 0 00H FOE 14 OEH F01 1 01H FOF 15 OFH F02 2 02H F10 16 10H Remark F03 3 03H F11 17 11H F04 4 04H F12 18 12H F05 5 05H F13 19 13H F06 6 06H F14 20 14H F07 7 07H F15 21 15H F08 8 08H F16 22 16H F09 9 09H F17 23 17H FOA 10 OAH F18 24 18H FOB 11 OBH F19 25 19H FOC 12 OCH FIA 26 1AH FOD 13 ODH FIB 27 1BH Virtual data 0 FFFF namely 0 65535 250 Appendix C Keyboard Appendix C Keyboard C 1 Keyboard selection NO Type Details Remark 1 EN LEDI Local LED single display keyboard Standard 2 EN LED2 Local LED double displ
188. fication 3 125K 4 250K 5 500K 6 1M Range units digit 0 5 F05 02 Data format tens digit 0 3 000 hundreds digit 0 1 Units digit Free protocol and Modbus protocol data format 0 1 8 1 format no parity RTU 1 for start bit 8 for data bits 1 for stop bit no parity s RTU communication mode 1 1 8 1 format even parity RTU 1 for start bit 8 for data bits 1 for stop bit even parity s RTU communication mode 2 1 8 1 format odd parity RTU 1 for start bit 8 for data bits 1 for stop bit odd parity s RTU communication mode 3 1 7 1 format no parity ASCII 1 for start bit 7 data bits 1 for stop bit no parity s ASCII communication mode 4 1 7 1 format even parity ASCII 1 for start bit 7 data bits 1 for stop bit even parity s ASCII communication mode 5 1 7 1 format odd parity ASCII 1 for start bit 7 data bits 1 for stop bit odd parity s ASCII communication mode Tens digit Profibus_DP protocol data format 0 PPO1communication format 1 PPO2communication format 2 PPO3communication format 3 PPOScommunication format Hundreds digit Modbus agreement or free protocol response selection Under the condition that Modbus or protocol agreement and the hundreds of F05 02 is 1 when slave sends mainframe the demand of running frequency revise and hide parameter inside the slave is without response to increase the slave response speed But when mainframe reads inverter parame
189. fication operations 0 All parameters are allowed to be modified 1 Except current parameter all other parameters are not allowed to modify the 2 ExceptF01 01 F01 04and current parameter all other parameters are not allowed to be modified Tens digit Reset to factory defaults 0 No action 1 All parameters return to default not include fault record parameter group F26 group parameter 2 Except for motor parameter all parameters return to default not include F15 and F26 group parameter 3 Extension parameter return to default only F21 F24 group parameter return to default 4 Virtual parameter return to default only F20 group parameter return to default 5 Fault record return to default only fault record parameter group F26 group parameter return to default Hundreds digit Key operation All locked Except button the others locked gt button the others locked button the others locked button the others locked Except n 0 1 2 Except 3 4 Except gt 000 52 6 Function parameter schedule graph F00 15 Button function selection Units digit panel B button selection 0 Reversal command action button 1 Jog action button Tens digit lt gt selection 0 Invalid 1 Jog run 2 For rev switching 3 Free stop 4 Switching to run command provide mode as the setup order of F00 16 5 Forward Reverse Torque Switching 6 9
190. fines the action delay time of magnetic control conductor when it s switch from power source supply to variable or from variable frequency control to power source supply F12 10 Automatic switching time interval Range 0000 9999Mins 0 By setting this parameter can avoid the rust of motor when it s not work long time The inverter will switch the work status of the working pump and static pump automatically and smartly under the switch interval The automatic switch function is disabled when set the parameter as 0000 The system will switch one time when each restart of system as this parameter is 0001 If the value of this parameter is bigger than 0002 the system will switch automatically according the switch interval F12 11 Revival mode selection Range 0 1 1 F12 12 Revival pressure coefficient Range 0 01 0 99 0 75 When F12 11 0 the revival pressure of the constant pressure supply is the value of F12 03 WhenF 12 11 1 the revival pressure is the calculating value of F12 12 F12 01 F12 13 Reserved F12 14 Reserved 177 7 Detailed function specification 7 14 Traverse Fixed length control Function Parameters Group F13 F13 00 Traverse function selection Range 0 1 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Range unit digit 0 1 tens digit 0 1 hundreds digit 0 1 thousands digit 0 1 F13 01 Traverse operating mode 0000
191. fore staring auto tuning F15 01 F15 06 Set F15 19 as 2 and press back to monitoring mode then press RUN to start auto tuning which with a tune symbol on the 188 7 Detailed function specification keyboard After auto tuning the Drive will exit process automatically and the detected values of the stator s resistance rotor s resistance the leakage inductance No load current and mutual inductive reactance will be saved in F15 07 F15 11 During the process of auto tuning any abnormal please press s to stop auto tuning l 3 Reserved F15 20 Reserved F15 22 189 7 Detailed function specification 7 17 Closed loop encoder parameters Group F16 F16 00 Reserved F16 01 Encoder line number Range 0 10000 1024 This parameter should be set as same as the value of encoder installed on the axis of motor or it will lead to an offset between the monitor speed and the actual speed of the motor Range units digit 0 1 tens digit reserved ue F16 02 Direction of encoder Units digit Phase sequence of AB phase 0 Forward 1 Reverse Tens digit Reserved The above parameters define the Encoder pulses per revolution and AB phase sequence of encoder wrong phase sequence will lead to over current alarm of the drive Encoder fractional frequency F16 03 coefficient Range 0 001 60 000 1 000 This p
192. frame it is 4 byte It is ASCII mode transformed from Hexadecimal gt Checksum From slave address to the character before checksum the LRC checksum of the character string Function terminal can be seen on the end of the text 233 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol gt Ending code enter line break is 0x0D 0x0A Response frame Response frame format 71 m a Q Q o ou g o o 5 Ka 5 3 al uloa Sle 2 amp S ls S 8 a G 3 ale sle rle BIS B 8 S jp 5 S E ole ld 2 BI B g g g 6 A gt o ola olan oa F 9 JO 2 ss ss oO al c c Q ola a 5 5 5 o 3 a al 5 5 A B B a 5 Send 1 2 2 2 N 2 2 2 byte remark gt Begin code The lower computer judge the frame of ASCII frame This is gt Slave address Single inverter ID code range 0 247 Thereinto address 0 is broadcast address Broadcast address can control all the lined Slave simultaneously and the Slave will not send back any Data to the host That means the Slave only accept and do not send Modbus protocol is without host address gt Command code The command of reading parameter or data from inverter the value is 0 3 gt Data byte The number of parameters read by a frame It is 4 byte which is ASCII mode transformed from hexadecimal gt Data string value The detail return Data the length of Data string is the register address Data byte which
193. frequency away from resonance frequency of mechanical load Inverter setting frequency can jump around some frequency point according to mode as shown in Fig 7 9 3 jumping ranges can be defined at most Jump freq 3 Jump freq 2 A Set freq after adjustment ja ms oe Jump range3 Jump range2 Jump freq 1 ME Sa Jump rangel Output freq f Fig 7 9 Jump freq and range F04 06 Slip freq gain Range 0 0 300 0 0 0 F04 07 Slip compensation limit Range 0 0 250 0 100 0 F04 08 Slip compensation time constant Range 0 1 25 0s 2 0s This function can adjust output frequency properly as the load varies to compensate slip frequency of the asynchronous motor dynamically so that control motor speed is in constant value If acting with automatic torque boost function better low speed moment characteristic can be obtained As shown in Fig 7 10 Slip compensation range Slip compensation limit F04 06 Rated slip Rated slip F15 03 x60 Np F15 04 Np is motor polarity tE 7 Detailed function specification i Slip compensation is 100 Output current i EA rusen 100 e mad Before slip compensation i j 14 After slip compensation soo eers RE sees i i Motor revolving speed Mee Fig 7 10 Slip freq Compensation Depend on F04 09 Carrier frequency Range 0 5 16 0K rae Carrier freq mainly affects motor noise and heat lo
194. g above mentioned function please read it earnestly and program according to it so that realize long distance and network control to the inverter B 2 Protocol content apd description B 2 1 Communication net buildup mode Mainframe is PC Mainframe is PC RS232 232 485 conversion module RS485 EN500 EN600 mainframe Fig B 1 net buildup graph B 2 2 Communication mode At present EN500 EN600 inverter can be used as not only auxiliary device but also mainframe device in RS485 if the inverter is used as auxiliary device master device can be completed by PC PLC or human interface and if used as mainframe device the main auxiliary control of the inverter can be complement by it Specific communication mode is as mentioned below 1 PC or PLC as mainframe inverter as auxiliary device point to point communication between mainframe and auxiliary device 2 Auxiliary device don t response when mainframe send out command by broadcast address 3 User can set local address baud rate and data format of the inverter through auxiliary device keypad 239 Appendix B Free port communication protocol 4 Auxiliary device report current failure information to mainframe in the last response frame 5 EN500 EN600 provides RS485 interface B 2 3 Transport mode Asynchronous serial semiduplex transport mode Default format and transport rate 8 N 1 9600bps For specific parameter setting please see description for
195. g change of load F19 14 defines the threshold of auto current limiting It is a percentage of the drive s rated current F19 15 defines the decrease rate of output frequency when the drive is in auto current limiting status If F19 15 is set too small overload fault may occur If it is set too big the frequency will change too sharply and therefore the drive may be in generating status for longtime which may result in overvoltage protection Auto current limiting function is always active in Acc or Dec process Whether the function is active in constant speed operating process is decided by F19 16 F19 16 0 Auto current limiting function is disabled inconstant speed operating process F19 16 1 Auto current limiting function is enabled inconstant speed operating process In auto current limiting process the drive s output frequency may change therefore it is recommended not to enable the function when the drive s output frequency is required stable F19 17 Rapid current limiting coefficient Range 150 250 230 The rapid current limit function can reduce the AC drive s over current faults at maximum guaranteeing uninterrupted running of the AC drive If the AC drive is in a rapid current limit state for a long time the AC drive may be overheated or overloaded for further protection The lower the setting of the F19 17 the more sensitive the rapid current limit is When the F19 17 equals 250 the rapid
196. g input AI1 before revise Setting bias F07 02 x10V Output Volt after AT1 adjustment 10V input gain 2 input gain 1 Bias voltage i Set voltage after AT1 filter 0 SV 10V Fig 7 12 AI adjustment F07 07 Pulse input filter time Range 0 000 9 999s 0 000s F07 08 Pulse input gain Range 0 000 9 999 1 000 F07 09 Pulse input Max frequency Range 0 01 50 00KHz 10 00KHz F07 07 FO7 08 parameter defines filter time and gain when frequency channel selection terminal pulse is set When setting filter time Please be noted that the longer the filter time is the slower the change rate of output frequency is So set filter time properly according to the actual situation Pulse width gain is for impulse quantity of current input impulse terminal F7 09 parameter defines frequency input range when frequency setting channel selection terminal pulse is set When actual input frequency is greater than the set Max frequency deal with it according to Max frequency F07 10 Pulse width input filter time Range 0 000 9 999s 0 000s F07 11 Pulse width input gain Range 0 000 9 999 1 000 F07 12 Pulse width input logic setting Range 0 1 0 133 7 Detailed function specification F07 13 Pulse width Max input width Range 0 1 999 9ms 100 0ms FO7 10 FO7 11 parameter defines filter time and gain when frequency channel selection terminal pulse width is
197. g mode as all the energy is consumed by the braking resistance EN600 2S0037 EN600 4T0007G 0015P EN600 4T0150G 0185P has been configured the built in braking unit for EN600 2S0004 EN600 2S0022 EN600 4T0185G 0220G EN600 4T0550G 0750P the built in braking unit is optional When braking function needed please connect external braking resistance according to below table Configuration table of braking unit and braking resistor configuration as well as circumscribed braking resistor Built in Built in Add Power of braking Power of braking Frequency inverter type braking braking braking Quantity resistor 50 resistor 10 unit resistor resistor braking rate braking rate EN600 2S0004 Optional K 21500 PCS ZIKW 2200W EN600 2S0007 Optional K 21002 PCS 2 1 5KW 2250W EN600 2S0015 Optional K 2708 PCS ZIKW 2400W EN600 2S0022 Optional K 2500 PCS Z3KW 2600W EN600 2S0037 Built in K 2300 PCS Z25KW Z1KW EN600 4T0007G 0015P Built in No 23002 PCS ZIKW 2250W EN600 4T0015G 0022P Built in No 23009 PCS 21KW 2250W EN600 4T0022G 0037P Built in No 23002 PCS 21KW 2250W EN600 4T0037G Built in No 21250 PCS 22KW 2400W EN600 4T0055P Built in No 21250 PCS 22KW 2400W EN600 4T0055G 0075P Built in No 2800 PCS 23 8KW 2750W EN600 4T0075G 0110P Built in No 2800 PCS 23 8KW 2750W EN600 4T0110G 0150P Built in No 2500 PCS 25KW 21KW EN600 4T0150G 0185P Built in No 2400 PCS 27 5KW 21 5KW EN6
198. g time F02 14 Stop DC braking starting 0 00 15 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00Hz x frequency F02 15 stop DC braking waiting 0 00 30 00s 0 01s 0 00s x time F02 16 Stop DC braking current 0 0 100 0 G type inverter rated current 0 1 0 0 x F02 17 Stop DC braking time 0 0 30 0s 0 1s 0 0s x F02 18 Stop auxiliary braking 0 0 100 0 G type inverter rated current 0 1 0 0 x 57 6 Function parameter schedule graph Current F02 19 Stop auxiliary braking 0 0 100 0s 0 1s 0 0s x time F02 20 Forward reverse dead 0 0 3600 0s 0 1s 0 0s x zone time F02 21 Forward reverse switching 0 Over zero switchover 1 0 x mode 1 Over starting frequency switchover F02 22 Energy consumption 0 No energy consumption braking 1 0 o braking selection 1 Energy consumption braking F02 23 Energy consumption 115 0 145 0 rated busbar voltage 0 1 125 0 o braking voltage F02 24 Energy consumption 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 o braking use rate F02 25 Encryption time 0 65535h 1 0 o F02 26 Reserved F03 V F control parameter group Function Min Factory Modifi Code Name Set Range Unit Sen cation F03 00 V F curve set 0 Constant torque curve 1 0 x 1 Degression torque curve 2 0 power 2 Degression torque curve 1 7 power 3 Degression torque curve 3 1 2 power 4 User self defined setting V F curve
199. g to different Note control mode F00 01 0 display parameter Range 0 65 51 selection when operation F00 02 C 01 display parameter Range 0 65 2 selection when operation mom C display parameter Range 0 65 4 selection when operation F00 04 03 display parameter Range 0 65 5 selection when operation C 04 display parameter El ee HOU 9 selection when operation Ranee U 6 F00 06 C O5 display parameter Range 0 65 9 selection when operation The above parameter display when inverter run by C 00 C 05 parameter groups pressing gt gt to switch between these parameters Pressing Ni and then return to C 00 parameter monitor For example pressing gt gt parameter switch from C 00 to C 01 continuous pressing the same button parameter switch from C 01 to C 02 then pressing return to C 00 parameter monitor 90 10 11 12 13 7 Detailed function specification Main setup frequency 0 01Hz Auxiliary setup frequency 0 01Hz Setup frequency 0 01Hz Output frequency 0 01Hz Output current 0 1A display 0 01A below 11KW Output voltage 1V DC busbar voltage 0 1V Motor speed 1 circle min Motor line velocity 1 circle min Inverter temperature 1 C Run time already this time 0 1min Current accumulate run time 1h Current accumulate power on time 1h Inverter status displays the working state of inverte
200. ge 0 0 50 0 10 0 Variable amplitude AW the central frequency lt F13 02 Fixed amplitude AW Upper limit frequency lt F13 02 a The traverse operating frequency is restricted by the upper and lower limit of frequency Incorrectly setting the frequency will lead Note to abnormal of traverse operation F13 03 Sudden jump frequency Range 0 0 50 0 2 0 As shown in Fig 7 43 there is not a jitter frequency when F13 03 0 F13 04 Traverse cycle Range 0 1 999 9s 10 0s F13 04 defines a complete cycle of traverse operation which including rising and falling processed z FE FiO F13 05 Triangular wave rising Range 0 0 98 0 Traverse 0 time cycle SU Definition traverse rising time F13 04xF13 05 s the traverse falling time F13 04x 1 F13 05 s Please refer to Fig 7 43 F13 06 Preset frequency of Traverse Range 0 00 400 00Hz 0 00Hz F13 06 defines the operating frequency of the Drive before entering traverse operation Traverse preset frequency F13 07 ae i waiting time Range 0 0 6000 0s 0 0s F13 07 defines the operating time of Preset frequency before entering Traverse operation when auto start mode is enabled If manual start mode is available F13 07 is disabled Please refer to Fig 7 43 as below 179 7 Detailed function specification Hz Operating Fre Traverse amplitude AW Fset F 13 02 Upper Limit Freq Centr
201. ge 1 60000 200 F04 25 Deceleration time 6 Range 1 60000 200 F04 26 Acceleration time 7 Range 1 60000 200 F04 27 Deceleration time 7 Range 1 60000 200 F04 28 Acceleration time 8 Range 1 60000 200 F04 29 Deceleration time 8 Range 1 60000 200 F04 30 Acceleration time 9 Range 1 60000 200 F04 31 Deceleration time 9 Range 1 60000 200 F04 32 Acceleration time 10 Range 1 60000 200 F04 33 Deceleration time 10 Range 1 60000 200 121 7 Detailed function specification F04 34 Acceleration time 11 Range 1 60000 200 F04 35 Deceleration time 11 Range 1 60000 200 F04 36 Acceleration time 12 Range 1 60000 200 F04 37 Deceleration time 12 Range 1 60000 200 F04 38 Acceleration time 13 Range 1 60000 200 F04 39 Deceleration time 13 Range 1 60000 200 F04 40 Acceleration time 14 Range 1 60000 200 F04 41 Deceleration time 14 Range 1 60000 200 F04 42 Acceleration time 15 Range 1 60000 200 F04 43 Deceleration time 15 Range 1 60000 200 EN500 EN600 defines 15 kinds of acceleration deceleration time select acceleration deceleration time 1 15 during the inverter running by different combinations of control terminal Please refer to the definitions of acceleration deceleration time terminal function in F08 18 F08 25 Cooperating with simple PLC function can also realize each step of PLC adopting different acceleration deceleration time to complete spe
202. gly to the exact figures F00 27 Parameter copying and Range units digit 0 2 language selection tens digit 0 2 oe Units digit language selection Only valid for LCD keypad 0 Chinese 1 English 2 Reserve Tens digit parameter upload and download valid for LCD and digital potentiometer keypad 0 No action 1 Parameter upload 2 Parameter download 98 7 Detailed function specification 7 2 Basic Run Function Parameter Group F01 Main frequency input EE channel selection Range 0 14 0 Total 15 types input channel for selection to chose inverter input channel of the main provide frequency among 11 14 are reserve channel currently there is no corresponding function 0 Operation keyboard digital setup When main frequency setup initial value to F01 01 modify FO1 01 parameter to change main setting frequency with operation keyboard or with 2 d V button to modify the value of FO1 01 1 AT analog setup Main frequency setup confirmed by AIl analog voltage current input range 0 10V AIl jumper wire selection V side or 4 20mA AII jumper wire selection A side 2 AI2 analog setup Main frequency setup confirmed by AI2 analog voltage current input range 10 10V AI jumper wire selection V side or 4 20mA AI2 jumper wire selection A side 3 Terminal UP DOWN adjusting setup When main frequency initial value is parameter F01 01 through terminal UP DOWN function to adjust
203. graph 6 Function parameter schedule graph 6 1 Symbol description x parameter can t be changed in process of running parameter can be changed in process of running read only parameter unmodifiable 6 2 Function parameter schedule graph F00 System Parameter Group Function code Name Set range Min unit Factory Default Modifi cation F00 00 Parameter group display control 0 Basic list mode only displayFOO FO3 basic control parameter group and F26 fault record parameter group 1 Middle list mode Display all parameter except for extension virtual and reserve parameter group 2 Senior list mode All parameter display 3 User list mode Display parameter defined by user and monitor parameter F00 00 display all the time 0 o F00 01 C 00 display parameter selection when operation 0 main setup frequency 0 01Hz 1 auxiliary setup frequency 0 01Hz 2 setup frequency 0 01Hz 3 output frequency 0 01Hz 4 output current 0 1A 5 output voltage 1V 6 DC busbar voltage 0 1V 7 motor speed 1 circle min 8 motor line velocity 1 circle min 9 inverter temperature 1 C run time already this time 0 1min current accumulate run time 1h current accumulate power on time 1h inverter status input terminal status output terminal status extension output terminal status extension input terminal status com
204. he chapter of Modbus communication 7 Reserved 169 7 Detailed function specification Note Except the above provision channels Multi Closed loop provision is available Connecting different terminal to choose different provision value which with a highest priority F11 02 Feedback channel selection Range 0 8 0 AT1 analog input 1 AI2 analog input 2 EAI1 analog input Extensible 3 EAI2 analog input Extensible 4 AI1 AI2 5 AI1 AI2 6 Min AI1 AI2 7 Max AT AD 8 Pulse input F11 03 Provision channel filtering time Range 0 01 50 00s 0 20s F11 04 Feedback channel filtering time Range 0 01 50 00s 0 10s F11 05 PID output filtering time Range 0 00 50 00s 0 00s The external reference signal and feedback signal usually carry some noise those noise signal can be filtered by setting the time constant of filter in F11 03 and F11 04 The bigger the time constant is the better the immunity capability but with a slow response The shorter the time constant is the faster the response but the immunity capability became weak The PID output filter time is the time of the filter for output frequency or torque the bigger time the slower the response output F11 06 Provision digital setting Range 0 00 10 00V 1 00V This function can realize digital setting of reference via keypad Note When the PID f
205. hronous modulation is valid frequency lower than this is fixed with asynchronous modulation mode 119 7 Detailed function specification F04 11 AVR function Range 0 2 0 AVR namely automatic voltage regulation function it indicates that the inverter can output constant voltage by AVR function when the inverter inputs voltage fluctuates 0 No action 1 Action all the time 2 No action only during deceleration 1 When input voltage is higher than rated value under normal situation F04 11 1 shall be set F02 11 0 namely inverter is in deceleration stop motor deceleration time short time running current will be greater But the motor decrease speed placidly E with small run current and long Dec time if choose AVR action Note all the time 2 When motor system vibration occurs due to AVR function set F04 11 0 namely AVR function is invalid 3 This function is valid in V F control mode F04 12 Reserved Automatic energy saving F04 13 operation Range 0 1 0 0 No action 1 Action To reach better energy saving effect automatic energy saving purpose can be obtained by checking load current When motor runs with no load or light load energy saving can be realized by checking load current and properly adjusting input voltage Auto energy saving operation is mainly used in applications like stable load and revolving speed E 1 This function is generally
206. hronous motor rotate no load to self adjusting 3 Reserved Note D Before adjustment The nameplate data should be setting directly Motor parameter group can have special default values or can be modified by users or can be self adjusted when parameter F15 01 is modified the 78 6 Function parameter schedule graph default values automatically other parameters of the motor will turn into F15 20 Reserved F15 21 Reserved F15 22 Reserved F16 Closed loop encoder parameter group Function Min Factory Modifi code None EIS Unit DEER cation F16 00 Reserved F16 01 Encoder line number 1 10000 1 1024 o F16 02 Direction of encoder Units digit AB phase sequence 1 00 0 Forward direction 1 Reverse direction Tens digit Reserved F16 03 Encoder fractional 0 001 60 000 0 001 1 000 o frequency coefficient F16 04 Encoder filtering 5 100 1 15 o coefficient F16 05 Reserve F16 06 Reserve F16 07 Reserve F16 08 Reserve F16 09 Reserve F16 10 Reserve F16 11 Reserve F16 12 Reserve F16 13 Reserve F17 Reserved Parameter Group 1 Function Min Factory Modifi code Eg EIS Unit Default cation F17 00 Reserved F17 20 F18 Enhance Control Parameter Group Function Min Factory Modifi code Name Oes Unit Doer cation F18 00 Operation pa
207. ill works after detecting overload situation Inverter overload pre alarm Range 20 180 5 Es detection level Inverter rated current 140 F19 07 inverter overload pre alarm Range 0 0 20 0s 5 0s delay time If output current higher parameter F19 06 the set electrical level will go though delay time of F19 07 open collector will output enabled signal please refer to fig7 45 and parameter list FO09 00 F09 03 196 7 Detailed function specification F19 08 Motor underload alarm detection level Range 0 0 120 0 Motor rated current 50 0 F19 09 Motor underload alarm detection time Range 0 1 60 0s 2 0s The output current Inverter will lower than Underload alarm detection level F19 08 definite the value comparing to motor rating current and the last time will over motor underload alarm detection level time F19 09 then Yi will output underload alarm Signal Range units digit 0 2 Motor underload F19 10 tens digit 0 2 alarm detection action a Units digit detection selection 0 No detection 1 The operation has been detected all the time This detection is enabled during the running process of inverter 2 Detect in constant speed mode only This detection is enabled during the constant speed mode only Tens digit action selection 0 when it s in alarm continue operation inverter will only warn when detecting motor
208. in Assistant power supplylLook for service from manufacturer E 19 Current detecting damaged or agent circuit failure Hall cGniponent RT Look for service from manufacturer P 8 or agent Unwonted amplifying Look for service from manufacturer circuit or agent The interruption protection of CPU is triggered but i T External none of the actual Press STOP RESET button to E 20 reset or add external power supply interference failure overcurrent overvoltage filter fi i id and short circuit signals er Hom power input SIGE have been detected Internal Power off and restart if the failure E 21 interference fail r Internal disturbance serious persists seek the manufacturer or dealer service ef in not RE ap To reset the relevant parameters re PID given loss aan tion SIV Check external given wiring The control board anial Look for service from manufacturer Y jor agent PID feedback loss threshold T Hetel setting is not reasonable o reset the relevant parameters E 23 PID feedback loss Feedback signal Check external feedback signal A 23 disconnection wiring The control board anomal Look for service from manufacturer y or agent PID error abnormal detection threshold setting To reset the relevant parameters Peay ETD error is not reasonable A 24 Jamount abnormal S The control board anomaly Look for service from manufacturer or agent E 25 Start terminal Terminal command Check the external input terminal protection effective when power on
209. initions of multi frequency 1 the frequency is determined by the combination of the main frequency and the auxiliary frequency 2 Reserved Tens digit Direction choosing 0 Forward 1 Reversed 2 Determined by operating commands FWD REV Hundreds digit Acc Dec time choose 0 Acc Dec time 1 1 Acc Dec time 2 2 Acc Dec time 3 3 Acc Dec time 4 4 Acc Dec time 5 5 Acc Dec time 6 6 Acc Dec time 7 7 Acc Dec time 8 8 Acc Dec time 9 9 Acc Dec time 10 A Acc Dec time 11 B Acc Dec time 12 C Acc Dec time 13 D Acc Dec time 14 E Acc Dec time 15 Accelerate timel 15 defined by F01 17 F01 18 F04 16 F04 43 F10 16 Step 1 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 17 Step 2 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 18 Step 3 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 165 7 Detailed function specification F10 19 Step 4 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 20 Step 5 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 21 Step 6 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 22 Step 7 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 23 Step 8 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 24 Step 9 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 25 Step 10 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 26 Step 11 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 27 Step 12 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 28 Step 13 running time Range 0 6000 0 10 0 F10 29 Step 14 running time Range 0 6000
210. int curve curve 3 is 4 point curve User can select different curves for adjustment based on characteristic requirement of the input signal so as to realize specific input Range 0 0 curve 1 F06 01 Curve 1 min setting 0 0 Inflexion setting Corresponding physical F06 02 quantity of curve 1 min Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 setting F06 03 Curve 1 inflexion Range curve 1 min setting 50 0 setting curve 1 Max setting Corresponding physical F06 04 quantity of curve 1 Range 0 0 100 0 50 0 inflexion setting F06 05 Curve 1 Max setting eed ae 100 0 Corresponding physical F06 06 quantity of curve 1 Range 0 0 100 0 100 0 Max setting F06 07 Curve 2 min setting Range ere AE 0 0 inflexion setting Corresponding physical F06 08 quantity of curve 2 min Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 setting F06 09 Curve 2 inflexion Range curve 2 min setting 50 0 setting curve 2 Max setting 128 7 Detailed function specification Corresponding physical F06 10 quantity of curve 2 Range 0 0 100 0 50 0 inflexion setting F06 11 Curve 2 Max setting EE E EE 100 0 Corresponding physical F06 12 quantity of curve 2 Range 0 0 100 0 100 0 Max setting 0 Pools oue am seg EE eee 0 0 inflexion 1 setting Corresponding physical F06 14 quantity of curve 3 min Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 setting F06 15 C
211. inverter 1 Waiting parameter display status The inverter is in waiting status and waiting status supervision parameter is displayed on keyboard normally parameter FOO 13 decide which status supervision parameter to be displayed As shown in Fig 5 3 b the indicator light shows the unit of the parameter To press gt gt key it can display different waiting status supervision parameter circularly for detail please see C 00 to C 05 group supervision parameter details decide by F00 07 F00 12 2 Run parameter display status The inverter enters into run status when receiving effective run command and normally parameter FOO 13 decide which status supervision parameter to be displayed on the keypad As shown in Fig 5 3 c the indicator light shows the unit of the parameter To press gt gt key can display run status supervision parameter circularly For detail please see C 00 To C 05 group supervision parameter details decide by F00 01 F00 06 EE TE EE Ee eooo e Ilooo eo oll o c eoc MO AM A He PDO RV woo AM A He FD REV Wo AM A He PD Fev ooog00 aon oon LI bl el tel ke TEMA bl blll Set frequency Output frequency D D E 2 E A uy Gan A 5 GN DD GG Ve D Vv wun EA ED un EEN SJ m un Eg j poi Y Fig a Electrification Fig b waiting status display Fig c run status display run display 8 8 8 8 8 waiting status parameter status parameter Fig 5 3 inve
212. ion When the frequency reaches set value of F02 12 in deceleration it stops deceleration and maintains the set time of F02 13 and enters deceleration state This parameter is only valid for stop mode 0 Stop DC braking starting F02 14 Range 0 00 15 00Hz 0 00Hz frequency F02 15 ee braking waiting Range 0 00 30 00s 0 00s Range 0 0 100 0 F02 16 Stop DC braking current G type machine rated 0 0 current F02 17 Stop DC braking time Range 0 0 30 0s 0 0s Range 0 0 100 0 CG type machine rated 0 0 current Stop auxiliary braking F02 18 current F02 19 Stop auxiliary braking time Range 0 0 100 0s 0 0s F02 14 FO2 19 parameter defines the current and duration inputting to the motor in the stop DC braking state If F02 17 F02 19 or F02 14 parameter is 0 0s then no DC braking process Auxiliary DC brake means when the inverter stops DC brake is finished give the second stage DC braking Role in some special circumstances require rapid braking and stop long time in the state of DC braking but to prevent motor heat circumstances 111 7 Detailed function specification l Output freq Stop brake Starting freq Time Auxiliary brake quantity Output volt Valid value DC brake quantity rl II Time Auxiliary brake time Stop DC brake time Running command Fig 7 5 Deceleration stop DC braking F02 20 Forward reverse
213. ion Content Function 0 Leave control terminal unused 49 Auxiliary frequency reset 1 Forward running FWD terminal 50 Command switchover to panel 2 Reverse running REV terminal 51 Command switchover to terminal ar d switch t 3 External forward jogging control 52 nisin OE O communication POE Runni d Ch 1 selecti 4 External reverse jogging control 53 DE pomar eaten Seen terminal 1 i A Runni d Ch 1 selecti 5 Multi step speed control terminal 1 54 un TE Comman Cannel seinan terminal 2 137 7 Detailed function specification Forward prohibited command 6 Multi step speed control terminal 2 55 Stop according to the stop mode invalid for jogging command Reverse prohibited command 7 Multi step speed control terminal 3 56 Stop according to the stop mode invalid for jogging command 8 Multi step speed control terminal 4 57 Swinging frequency input Acceleration deceleration time i ea 9 s lection terminal 58 Resetting state of swinging frequency 10 AGeeleraHondeteleratoR Hume 59 Interior counter reset end selection terminal 2 11 Eeue mon Hume 60 Interior counter input end selection terminal 3 12 Acceleration deceleration time 61 Internal timer resetting selection terminal 4 13 Man s and auxiliary frequency 62 Internal timer triggering operational rule selection terminal 1 14 Main i and auxiliary frequency 63 Length count input op
214. is ASCII mode transformed from hexadecimal Range 4 40 byte gt Checksum From slave address to the character before checksum the LRC checksum of the character string The function terminal can be seen in the later text gt Ending symbol enter line break Is 0x0D 0x0A The followings are the example of command frame and return frame all the Data are ASCII character 234 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol gt Inquiry frame 7010300010001 FA n r The detail introduction of every byte 2 beginning symbol 0 1 Slave address 0 3 read the command 0 0 0 1 storage address of reading parameter 0 0 0 1 the number of reading the parameter FA 010300010001 for LRC checksum OxFA 0x100 0x01 0x03 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x01 gt Response frame 0103020033 C7 n r The detail introduction of every byte beginning symbol 0 1 Slave address 0 3 read the command 0 2 The byte length of return parameter Data 0 0 3 3 return parameter current storage value C7 010302003 3 for LRC checksum 0xC7 0x100 0x01 0x03 0x02 0x00 0x33 The main frame writes slave address single register command code 06 The host frame The host frame format al a2 an on sis Ole wle els ele w Qi e ny 2 2 2 2 n SB S lesEE EE EE BE plo lyuluo Rl SE 36 8 aoa B09 ao Bag Q 8 SE 2 gt 2 BB Pe Se aS aS 8 S s S 9 Toj amp a 2
215. is underload alarm 1 Alarm Stop according to the stop mode 2 Fault Free stop The inverter will detect motor is in underload alarm and it will lock PWM output the motor will stop with free rotation Range units digit 0 1 tens digit 0 1 hundreds digit 0 1 thousands digit 0 1 Input amp output phase loss short circuit detection action F19 11 1111 Units digit input phase failure protect 0 No detection 1 Fault Free stop When inverter detect that the input is lacked one phase alarm in input lacked alarm and free stop Tens digit output phase failure protection 0 No detection 1 Fault Free stop When inverter detect that the output is lacked one phase alarm in input lacked then Free stop Hundreds digit power on will detect Short circuit protection 0 No detection 1 Fault Free stop When inverter is power on the output to earth is short circuiting At this time the fault of short circuiting to earth while power on is alarmed the inverter freely stops Thousands digit The detection to earth Short circuit protection in the running 197 7 Detailed function specification mode 0 No detection 1 Fault Free stop When inverter is power on the output to earth is short circuiting during the running process At this time the fault of short circuiting to earth while running is alarmed the inverter freely stops F19 12 Overvoltage stall selecti
216. ision z 40 00Hz g R m 5 Reverse run Auxiliary device reverse i OHz high 010C00060FA002 boot strap 2 run with run frequency 2 00 06 N 0 01Hz 8 a limit freq 81 r Set freq 9 provision 40 00Hz Auxiliary device stop 12 00 07 no 010C0007019B r no Auxiliary device jog run 12 00 08 no 010C0008019C r no Auxiliary device forward 2 00 09 no 010C0009019D r no Jog run Auxiliary device reverse i 2 00 0A no 010C000A01A5 no Jog run Auxiliary device stop run 12 00 OB no 010C000B01A6 r no Auxiliary device fail A a tase aaa 2 00 oc no O10CO000CO1A7 r no restoration 8 aD 2 amp Query auxiliary device 5 2 y 5 00 00 no 010F00000197 r 1 S 2 S software version 8 oa 247 Appendix B Free port communication protocol Free Port 2 protocol command table EI gt F 3 gt 5 TE gz 5 5 5 FT z z SEE E S IE amp S wags F gt EE 2 sa EE zZ 2 SE 52 8 3 a lela cb esels LE g EE se era 2 E Qa lal 2 99 S a 5 2 gt e e Z B l id SSR S d z BET a as look up auxiliary motor state 0 00 00 no 010A00000192 r 1 Auxiliary device run command 2 00 00 no 010C00000194 r no Set current run freq of OHz auxiliary device 2 00 01 high limit 010C00010FA0027C r 0 01Hz freq Auxiliary device run OHz with run frequency 2 00 02 high limit 010C00020FA0027D r
217. its digit 0 1 F00 20 Analog input terminal tens digit 0 1 configuration hundreds digit 0 2 thousands digit 0 2 0000 This parameter can configurate analog input All AI2 EAI1 EAI2 to be current input type or voltage input type Units digit AI configuration 0 0 10V input 1 4 20mA input Tens digit AI2 configuration 0 10 10V input 1 4 20mA input Hundreds digit EAI configuration 0 0 10V input 1 10 10V input 2 4 20mA input Thousands digit EAI2 configuration 0 0 10V input 1 10 10V input 2 4 20mA input LES Dial switching SW1 SW2 under the left corner of CPU to the Note corresponding position when AI1 AI2 configuration Analog output terminal ive configuration Range units digit 0 1 tens digit 0 1 hundreds digit 0 1 thousands digit 0 1 0000 This parameter can configurate AO1 AO2 EAO1 EAO2 analog signal output to be voltage type or current type Units digit AO1 configuration 0 0 10V output 96 7 Detailed function specification 1 4 20mA output Tens digit AO2 configuration 0 0 10V output 1 4 20mA output Hundreds digit EAO1 configuration 0 0 10V output 1 4 20mA output Thousands digit EAO2 configuration 0 0 10V output 1 4 20mA output ER Dial switching SW1 SW2 under the left corner of CPU to the Note corresponding position when AI1 AI2 configuration Range units digit Reserved Y output terminal tens digit Reserved
218. l closed time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s 136 7 Detailed function specification F08 17 X8 Input terminal opened time Range 0 00 99 99s 0 00s FO8 02 FO8 17 parameter defines the corresponding delay time of Xi input terminal from closed to opened or opened to closed so as to meet user s multiple requirements This parameter does not affect the monitor value of input terminal state You can revise the parameter to control the filtering when the interruption is strong Xi Level Invalid Y 2 Invalid Xi Valid Valid On delay 7 Off delay Fig 7 13 closed and opened delay F08 18 Input terminal X1 function selection Range 0 96 1 F08 19 Input terminal X2 function selection Range 0 96 2 F08 20 Input terminal X3 function selection Range 0 96 0 F08 21 Input terminal X4 function selection Range 0 96 0 F08 22 Input terminal X5 function selection Range 0 96 0 F08 23 Input terminal X6 function selection Range 0 96 0 F08 24 Input terminal X7 function selection Range 0 96 0 F08 25 Input terminal X8 function selection Range 0 96 0 Multi functional input terminal X1 X8 provides users with up to 95 selections which can be selected based on actual applications For details please refer to parameter function Table 7 3 Table 7 3 Multi functional input selection function table Content Funct
219. l selection 0 Modbus protocol 1 Reserved 2 Profibus protocol Extend effective 3 CANIink protocol Extend effective 4 CANopen protocol Extend effective 5 Free protocol 1 Can realize all the function parameter modification of EN500 EN600 6 Free protocol 2 Can realize part of the function parameter modification of ENS500 EN600 0 x FOS O1 Baud rate configuration Units digit Free protocol and Modbus Baud rate selection 0 300BPS 600BPS 1200BPS 2400BPS 4800BPS 9600BPS 19200BPS 38400BPS 57600BPS Tens digit Profibus DP Baud rate selection 0 115200BPS 1 208300BPS 2 256000BPS 3 512000BPS Hundreds digit CanLink and CANopen Baud rate selection 0 20K 50K 100K 125K 250K 500K IM CIADNARWNHE SUR 005 FOS 02 Data format Units digit Free protocol and Modbus protocol data format 0 1 8 1 format no parity RTU 1 1 8 1 format even parity RTU 2 1 8 1 format odd parity RTU 3 1 7 1 format no parity ASCII 4 1 7 1 format even parity ASCII 5 1 7 1 format odd parity ASCII Tens digit Profibus DP protocol data format 0 PPO1 communication format 1 PPO2 communication format 2 PPO3 communication format 3 PPOS communication format 000 60 6 Function parameter schedule graph Hundreds digit Modbus agreement or free protocol response selection 0 respond mainframe
220. larm continue operation It happens with only warning no motor overload Protection characteristic used cautiously at this time inverter has nothing to do with load motor for overload protection 1 Alarm Stop according to the stop mode 2 Fault Free stop When it is overloaded the output of inverter is block this AC motor free stop F19 04 Motor overload protection Range 20 0 200 0 i coefficient Motor rated current In order to apply effective overload protection to different kinds of motors the Max output current of the drive should be adjusted as shown in Fig 7 44 150 0 ry Tne 4 Warning level Output current 60Min Jo EE iS Sens ae ees eeRRRRRRRR BREER see i F19 06 i i F19 04 100 Yi FR 1Min i v lid valid i Current i i lt gt Time 55 110 150 G F19 07 F19 07 105 120 P Fig 7 44 Electronic thermal relay protection Fig 7 45 Overload alarm This adjustable value can base on the user s setting In the same condition if the AC motor is overloaded and need the fast protection then decrease F19 04 or else increase F19 05 Inverter overload pre alarm detection selection 0 Detection all the time during the working process of inverter it still Range 0 1 0 work after detecting overload situation 1 Enable only constant speed detection Only the inverter work in a constant speed mode it st
221. larm stop in stopping mode Free stop Terminal external device ELS fault action selection Ee Mi 2 0 Alarm continue operation When inverter checked that Terminal of the external is no alarm stop in stopping mode enabled it will alarm then run continue Under this mode the inverter will do nothing with Terminal of the external in No alarm stop in stopping mode so please cautiously use 1 Alarm Stop according to the stop mode When Inverter detect terminal outside fault is enabled alarm and then press Stop in stopping mode 2 Fault Free stop When inverter detect terminal external fault is enabled 200 7 Detailed function specification alarm for external equipment fault and free stop F19 24 Power on terminal protection Range 0 1 0 selection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When setting power down and then restart function is enabled this function is disabled When the running command channel is terminal command and when power on and detection run the command is enabled it will get terminal protection with faults this function only is enabled for terminal FWD REV function F19 25 Provide lost detection value Range 0 100 0 F19 26 Provide lost detection time Range 0 0 20 0s 0 5s When setting PID is lower than F19 25 definition continuous setting the Max as base and the constant time is over than the time that F19 26 definition detected then PID se
222. lect inverter match motor overheating Bus capacitance cooling fan Replace the bus capacitor cooling is damaged fan E 37 EE encoder or poor Check the wiring or the encoder Short acceleration time Prolong the acceleration time Overspecd Low inverter power Select high power inverter E 38 prylecien Overspeed detect parameter Set the parameter properly fer Blo ais ses according to the situation oe CE ere ond Prolong the acceleration time Large speed Low inverter power Select high power inverter E 39 deviation Over velocity protection misalignment Parameter Set the parameter properly F19 41 and F19 42 is set according to the situation improperly E 40 ox Reserved E 50 The main and ee Teie F01 00 and F01 03 cannot be set to A S1 8 q Y Parameter setting error the same channel 9 terminal channel exclusiveness alarm encoder given except 219 8 Troubleshooting Terminal function Terminal function i i A 52 parameters Check the terminal function settings exclusiveness i setting repeatedly alarm The detail 5 2 6 keypad lock LOCH1 Keypad lock Keypad lock in Ed eypad 100 Operation 8 2 Failure record lookup This series inverter can record latest 4 failure code and inverter run parameter of the last 2 times failure refer to these information can redound to finding out reason of the failure Failure information is all stored in F26 group parameter please enter int
223. lementation auto revolving speed tracking starts and keep on running PLC 38 Simple PLC stop state resetting Under stop status of PLC running mode will clear PLC run step runtime run frequency etc recorded when PLC running stops if this terminal is effective please see F10 group function description 143 7 Detailed function specification 39 Main frequency switchover to digital setting keypad The main frequency provision channel is switched to keypad digital provision when this terminal is valid setting frequency by keypad up and down key 40 Main frequency switchover to AI1 The main frequency provision channel is switched to analog quantity AIl provision when this terminal is valid 41 Main frequency switchover to AI2 The main frequency provision channel is switched to analog quantity AI2 provision when this terminal is valid 42 Main frequency switchover to EAI1 When extended analog quantity is valid the main frequency provision channel is switched to extended analog quantity EAI1 provision when this terminal is valid 43 Main frequency switchover to EAI2 When extended analog quantity is valid the main frequency provision channel switchover to extended analog quantity EAI2 provision when this terminal is valid 44 47 Main frequency setting channel selection terminal By ON OFF of selection terminal 1 4 Free selection of main frequency setting channel can be realized by terminal The priority of main frequency s
224. limit frequency 2 Setup frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 3 main setting frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 4 auxiliary setting frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 5 output current 1 0 2xinverter rated current 6 output current 2 0 3xmotor rated current 7 output voltage 0 1 2xload motor rated voltage 8 busbar voltage 0 1 5xrated busbar voltage 9 motor speed 0 3 rated speed 10 PID provision 0 00 10 00V 11 PID feedback 0 00 10 00V 12 AI1 0 00 10 00V or 4 20mA 13 AI2 10 00 10 00V or 4 20mA 14 communication provision 15 motor rotor revolving speed 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 16 present setting torque 0 2 times rated torque 17 present output torque 0 2 times rated torque 18 present torque current 0 2 times motor rated current 19 present flux current 0 1 times motor rated flux current 20 25 Reserved F09 36 Analog output AQ2 Same as above 1 0 selection F09 37 DO function Same as above 1 0 selection with Y4 reuse F09 38 Reserved F09 39 Analog output AO1 0 0 20 0s 0 1s 0 0s filter time F09 40 Analog output AO1 0 00 2 00 0 01 1 00 gain 70 6 Function parameter schedule graph FO9 41 Analog output AO1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 o ias F09 42 Analog output AO2 0 0 20 0s 0 1s 0 0s o filter time F09 43 Analog output AO2 0 00 2 00 0 01 1 00 o gain F09 44 Analog output AO2 0 0 100 0 C
225. ll output an indication signal Please refer to the description of FO9 00 F09 03 F18 09 defined the expected accumulated time of power on from Ex factory ES Power on time and accumulated run time can be checked by Note monitoring parameters group C F18 11 Timing run function enable Range 0 1 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 193 7 Detailed function specification F18 12 Timing run stop time Range 0 1 6500 0Min 2 0Min When F18 11 Timing operation function enabled the driver will start the timer with inverter start The drive will stop automatically and the multi function Yi Set Yi as the 33 function will output an indicator signal when reach to the set stop time B The timer of inverter start form 0 every times the user can Note monitor the current operation time through the FO Group F18 13 Currently run arrival time Range 0 0 6500 0Min 1 0Min When the actual operation time reach to this time the multi function Yi choose Yi as 34 function will output an indicator signal of Currently operation time reached Keyboard UP DOWN selection ets under monitor mode Range 0 6 0 0 Keyboard frequency provision frequency adjusting 1 PID digital reference value adjusting 2 6 Reserved When F18 14 1 UP DOWN is used to adjust the PID digital reference value in Monitor Mode merely When F18 14 0 UP DOWN is used to adjust
226. loss and the fault Error amount When it s set as 0 OR 1 inverter will have no response And with no protection selection users should set this parameter basing on the actual applications Units digit setting PID lost motion detection 0 no detection 1 Alarm continue operation 2 Alarm Stop according to the stop mode 3 Fault Free stop Tens digit PID feedback for lost motion detection 0 no detection 1 Alarm continue operation 2 Alarm Stop according to the stop mode 3 Fault Free stop Hundreds digit The amount of error fault for PID detection operation 0 no detection 1 Alarm continue operation 2 Alarm Stop according to the stop mode 3 Fault Free stop 202 7 Detailed function specification F19 32 Protection action selection 2 Range units digit 0 2 tens digit 0 2 hundreds digit 0 2 thousands digit 0 1 1200 This parameter definite the communication fault EPROM fault Contactor fault and lack voltage when it s in No alarm stop in stopping mode for the action selection of inverter When it s set as 0 during the fault situation inverter will only alarm And with no protection selection users should set this parameter basing on the actual applications Units digit communication fault action including communication replay and fault 0 Alarm continue operation 1 Alarm Stop according to the stop mode 2 Fault free stop Tens digit
227. lue high byte 93 228 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol A 6 Data communication address allocation A 6 1 Function code F00 F26 group communication address Inverter function parameter s MODBUS communication address addressing process follows PPnn way PP means high byte of the address corresponding to function parameter s group number nn means low byte of the address corresponding to function code parameter s group internal code For example F3 21 function code s communication address is 0315H 03H is the hex form of group number 3 15H is the hex form of group internal code 21 F00 00 F26 17 communication address is OOOOH 1A11H F26 group fault record parameter start address is LAOOH A 6 2 control command and status word communication address Variable Communicat Reading writin i a Command data or response value meanin Name ion address g attribute p i reserved reserved forward JOG run reversal JOG run Run command 1 E00H word Reading and run writing stop forward run reversal run fault reset 10 reserved Serial port IEOIH Reading and value writing setting 0 10000 0 max BITO bus voltage set BIT1 the ordinary run command effectively BIT2 JOG command effectively BIT3 Running BIT4 the current running direction is reverse BITS the operating instructions is reverse direction BIT6 deceleration braki
228. main and auxiliary absolute value 7 Selection no zero value auxiliary is not negative main frequency prior auxiliary is negative complex frequency is zero 1 The initial polarity of main and auxiliary frequency cannot change after main and auxiliary operation 2 When main and auxiliary frequency channel are complex eG value and both setup into power down reserve parameter F01 01 Note and F01 04 reserve separately the changed part of main frequency and auxiliary frequency in the complex frequency when power down Auxiliary frequency F01 07 provide coefficient Range 0 00 10 00 1 00 Parameter FO1 07 can adjust auxiliary provide frequency gain F01 08 Ceefficient after complex of Range 0 00 10 00 1 00 main and auxiliary frequency This parameter is to setup frequency flexibly and calculates the gain of complex setting frequency by main and auxiliary frequency F01 09 Auxiliary frequency range Range 0 1 0 selection 0 Relative high limit frequency Auxiliary frequency setup range 0 00Hz high limit frequencyxF01 10 1 Relative main frequency Auxiliary frequency setup range 0 00Hz main frequencyxF01 10 01 19 Auxiliary frequency source scope Range 0 00 1 00 1 00 This parameter cooperate with FO1 09 define the scope of auxiliary provide frequency Auxiliary provide frequency high limit value is restrained by the frequency selected by parameter F
229. meter recommended show as Table 3 1 Remark wire must choose PVC insulation copper conductor 19 3 Installation and wiring Table 3 1 parameter recommended for air switch breaker contactor and wire selection Type or Hae ees oe EE Able EE A mm mm mm EN600 2S0004 6 9 0 75 0 75 0 5 EN600 2S0007 10 12 0 75 0 75 0 5 EN600 2S0015 16 18 1 5 1 5 0 5 EN600 2S0022 16 18 1 5 1 5 0 5 EN600 2S0037 20 25 2 5 2 5 0 75 EN600 4T0007G 0015P 6 9 0 75 0 75 0 5 EN600 4T0015G 0022P 10 12 0 75 0 75 0 5 EN600 4T0022G 0037P 16 18 1 5 1 5 0 5 EN600 4T0037G 16 18 1 5 1 5 0 5 EN600 4T0055P 20 25 2 5 25 0 75 EN600 4T0055G 0075P 20 25 2 5 2 5 0 75 EN600 4T0075G 0110P 25 25 4 0 4 0 0 75 EN600 4T0110G 0150P 32 32 6 0 6 0 0 75 EN600 4T0150G 0185P 40 40 6 0 6 0 0 75 EN600 4T0185G 0220P 50 50 10 10 0 EN600 4T0220G 0300P 50 50 10 10 0 EN600 4T0300G 0370P 63 63 16 16 0 EN600 4T0370G 0450P 80 80 25 25 0 EN600 4T0450G 0550P 100 115 35 35 0 EN600 4T0550G 0750P 125 125 50 50 0 EN500 4T0750G 0900P 250 160 70 70 5 EN500 4T0900G 1100P 250 160 95 95 5 EN500 4T1100G 1320P 350 350 120 120 5 EN500 4T1320G 1600P 400 400 120 120 5 EN500 4T1600G 2000P 500 500 150 150 5 EN500 4T2000G 2200P 630 630 185 185 5 EN500 4T2200G 2500P 700 700 240 240 5 EN500 4T2500G 2800P 800 800 120 2 120 2 5 EN500 4T2800G 3150P 800 800 120 2 120 2 5 EN500 4T3150G 355
230. munication virtual input terminal status internal virtual input node status 20 analog input AI 1 after checkout 0 01V 0 01mA 21 analog input AI2 after checkout 0 01V 0 01mA 22 extension analog input EAI1 after checkout 0 01V 0 01mA 23 extension analog input EAI2 after checkout 0 01V 0 01mA 24 analog AO1 output after checkout 0 01V 0 01mA 25 analog AO2 output after checkout 0 01V 0 01mA 26 extension analog EAO1 output 0 01V 0 01mA COMIDNABRWNHHE SDS 51 50 6 Function parameter schedule graph 27 extension analog EAO2 output 0 01V 0 01mA 28 external pulse input frequency before checkout 1Hz 29 Reserved 30 process PID provide 0 01V 31 process PID feedback 0 01V 32 process PID deviation 0 01V 33 process PID output 0 01Hz 34 simple PLC current segment No 35 external multi speed current segment No 36 constant pressure water supply provide pressure 0 001Mpa 37 constant pressure water supply feedback pressure 0 001Mpa 38 constant pressure water supply relay status 39 current length 1M 40 accumulate length 1M 41 current internal count value 42 current internal time value 0 1s 43 run command setup channel 0 keyboard terminal 2 communication 4 main frequency provide channel 5 auxiliary frequency provide channel 6 rated current 0 1A 7 rated voltage 1V 8 rated power 0 1K W 9 Reserved 50 Reserved 5
231. n EDO given value D07H read write Range 0 4000 BITO Y1 BIT1 Y2 BIT2 Y3 BIT3 Y4 The communication BIT4 RLY output terminal given 1D08H read write BITS EY1 value BIT6 EY2 BIT7 EY3 BIT8 EY4 BIT9 ERLY1 BIT10 ERLY2 Communication 1D09H read write BITO CX1 230 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol virtual input terminal BIT7 CX8 given value Reserved IDOAH Reserved IDOBH Reserved IDOCH Reserved IDODH A 7 Communication error processing Inverter receiving data packet detection error it finds reading amp writing parameter address or parameter value invalid so reply to the host with communication error response packet Communication error response packet host command code 80H as command code with 1 byte error code Format for communication error response packet as follows ADR 01H CMD 83H 86H Communication error code 01H 06H for details please check below table Low byte of CRC checksum Obtain by calculating High byte of CRC checksum Obtain by calculating Meaning for each communication error code value as follows Communication error c icati i Priori EO ouine ommunication error type riority 0x01 CRC checksum error 1 0x02 Command code illegal 2 0x03 Register address visited illegal 3 0x04 Value to register illegal 4 0x05 Not allow to modify parameters 5 0x06 Regi
232. n Code Name Set Range Min Unit Factory Default Modifi cation F26 00 The last fault record O no fault l overcurrent at acceleration 2 overcurrent at deceleration 3 overcurrent at constant speed 4 overvoltage at acceleration 5 overvoltage at deceleration 6 overvoltage at constant speed 7 0vervoltage at motor halt 8 undervoltage at run 9 drive overload protection 10 motor overload protection 11 motor underload protection 12 input phase loss 13 output phase loss 14 inverter module protection 15 short circuit to earth at run 16 short circuit to earth when power on 17 drive overheat 18 external device fault 19 current detect circuit fault 20 external interference 21 internal interference main clock etc 22 PID provide lost 23 PID feedback lost 24 PID error value abnormal 25 terminal protection activate 26 communication fault 27 29 reserve 30 EEROM read write error 31 temperature detection disconnection 32 auto tunning fault 33 contactor abnormal 34 factory fault 1 35 factory fault 2 36 capacitor overheat few mode with overheat protection 37 encoder disconnection 38 over speed protection 39 protection when speed deviation is too large 40 50 Reserved 0 F26 01 The last two fault Same as above 86 6 Function parameter schedule graph recor
233. n Units digit PID provide loss detection act 1 000 selection 1 O no detection 1 alarm continue run 2 alarm stop run as halt mode 3 fault free halt Tens digit PID feedback loss detection act O no detection 1 alarm continue run 2 alarm stop run as halt mode 3 fault free halt Hundreds digit PID error value abnormal detect action O no detection 1 alarm continue run 2 alarm stop run as halt mode 3 fault free halt F19 32 Protection action Units digit communication abnormal 1 1200 selection 2 action include communication time out and error 0 alarm continue run l alarm stop run as halt mode 2 fault free halt 82 6 Function parameter schedule graph Tens digit E7PROM abnormal action selection 0 alarm continue run l alarm stop run as halt mode 2 fault free halt Hundreds digit contactor abnormal action O alarm continue run l alarm stop run as halt mode 2 fault free halt Thousands digit running lack Voltage fault display action selection 0 no detection l fault free halt F19 33 Reserved F19 34 Reserved F19 35 Fault indication and Units digit fault indication selection during the 1 00 x clock during the period period of fault reset automatically of recovery O action 1 no action Tens digit fault clock function selection to achieve fault display before power down ete 0 forbid l open F19 36
234. n choosing digital setting press up and down keypad can revise the torque value F14 16 Forward speed limit channel Range 0 8 0 selection in torque control mode F14 17 Reverse frequency limit channel Range 0 8 0 selection in torque control mode 0 Digital setting 1 AI1 analog provision 2 AI2 analog provision 3 Terminal UP DOWN adjusting 4 Communication provision SEAT analog provision Extensible 6 EAI2 analog provision Extensible 7 High speed Pulse provision Please choose the related function of X8 8 Terminal width provision Please choose the related function of X8 When positive torque provided if the load torque is smaller than the output torque the motor s rotational speed will rise forward continuously to the forward 184 7 Detailed function specification frequency limit defined by limit channel F14 16 so as to avoiding runaway of the motor When negative torque provided if the load torque is smaller than the output torque the motor s rotational speed will rise reverse continuously to the reverse frequency limit defined by limit channel F14 17 so as to avoiding runaway of the motor Forward Speed 5 SE F14 18 limit in Torque ass OE pu HOSTING 50 00Hz freq Valid when F00 24 1 or 2 control mode Reverse Speed limit a IDE F14 19 in Torque control Hance OE Upper UNG 50 00Hz de freg Valid when F00 24 1 or 2 When F14 16 0 F14 17 0 the related limit freq
235. n the protocol is 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F and hexadecimal 0DH lower case ASCII letter a b c d e f is invalid 4 The subject data volume is the 2 times as RTU checksum adopt LRC check 5 For the other information please refer to the official standard protocol when need Note 237 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol A 9 CRC checkout mode CRC checkout value calculating function written by C language is as follows unsigned int cal crc value unsigned char pval unsigned char len unsigned int crc_value OxFFFF unsigned int 1 while len ere value pval for i 0 i lt 8 i if crc value amp 0x0001 crc value gt gt 1 erc value 0xA001 else crc value gt gt 1 i i return crc value 238 Appendix B Free port communication protocol Appendix B Free port communication protocol B 1 Summarization We provide the customer with general RS485 RS232 communication interface in our EN500 EN600 series frequency inverter For the users through the communication interface upper device such as PC PLC controller etc can perform centralized monitor to the inverter such as setting inverter parameter controlling run of inverter reading work state of the inverter and also long distance control keypad can be connected to realize diverse operating requirement of the user This communication protocol is interface criterion file designed for realizin
236. nctuation input 10 20 Reserved FO1 04 Auxiliary 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz o frequency digital setup F01 05 Auxiliary Units digit power down reserve setup 1 11 o frequency digital O Auxiliary frequency power down reserve control 1 Auxiliary frequency power down no reserve Tens digit halt reserve setup 0 Halt auxiliary frequency hold 1 Halt auxiliary frequency recovery parameter FO1 04 FO1 06 Main and 0 Main frequency complex frequency of current is 1 0 o auxiliary provide main frequency calculating setup 1 Auxiliary frequency complex frequency of current is auxiliary frequency 2 Plus polarity oppose of complex and main frequency complex frequency is zero 3 Minus polarity oppose of complex and auxiliary frequency complex frequency is zero 4 Multiplication polarity opposed of main and auxiliary frequency complex frequency is zero 5 Max the max frequency of main and auxiliary absolute value 6 Min the min frequency of main and auxiliary absolute value 7 Selection no zero value auxiliary is not negative main frequency prior auxiliary is negative complex frequency is zero F01 07 Auxiliary 0 00 10 00 0 01 1 00 o freguency provide coefficient FO1 08 Coefficient after 0 00 10 00 0 01 1 00 o complex of main and auxiliary frequency F01 09 Auxiliary 0 Relative upper limit frequency 1 0 o freguency range 1 Relative main frequency
237. ncy is set as manual input this terminal is invalid run with preset frequency of swinging frequency 57 Resetting state of swinging frequency When selecting swinging frequency function no matter auto or manual input mode closing this terminal will clear state information of swinging frequency memorized in the inverter When opening this terminal swinging frequency restarts For details please see F13 group function 58 Interior counter reset end Reset inverter built in counter and go with counter triggering signal input For details please see parameter F08 27 F08 28 59 Interior counter input end Interior counter s counting pulse input port 145 7 Detailed function specification pulse max frequency 50 0KHz 60 Interior timer reset end Reset inverter built in timer goes with timer triggering end signal input 61 Interior timer triggering end See parameter F08 29 function 62 Length count input Length counting input terminal see fixed length function of F13 group parameter 63 Length reset When the terminal is valid reset internal length value see F13 fixed length function of parameter group 64 Reset this operation time When the terminal is valid the running counting time of this inverter is reset see timing running defined in F18 group 65 90 Reserved 91 Pulse frequency input X8 valid Only valid for multi functional input terminal X8 this function terminal accepts pulse signal as frequency s
238. ncy input Range 0 20 20 channel select VFD auxiliary provides frequency input channel has 21 input channels for selection for them 11 20 are Reserved channels and currently there is no relevant function 100 7 Detailed function specification 0 Keyboard operation digital setup When auxiliary frequency setup initial value is parameter FO1 04 modify parameter FO1 04 to change auxiliary setting frequency or with i N p v button modify the value of parameter F01 04 1 AT analog setup Auxiliary frequency setup confirmed by AIl analog voltage current input range 0 10V AIl jumper wire selection V side or 4 20mA AI1 jumper wire A side 2 AI2 analog setup Auxiliary frequency setup confirmed by AI2 analog voltage current input range 10 10V AI2 jumper wire selection V side or 4 20mA AI2 jumper wire selection A side 3 Terminal UP DOWN adjusting setup Auxiliary frequency initial value is parameter FO1 04 through terminal UP DOWN function to adjust auxiliary setting frequency 4 communication setting The initial value of auxiliary frequency is for F01 04 it will determine by F05 00 of the communication setting SEAT analog setup When extension analog input EAI is valid auxiliary frequency setup confirmed by EAT1 analog voltage current input range 10 10V EAI1 jumper wire selection V side or 4 20mA EAI1 jumper wire selection A side 6 EAI2 analog setup When extension analog input EAI2 is valid
239. nel control O no binding 1 0 o frequency binding l operation keyboard digital setup 2 AT1 analog setup 3 AI2 analog setup 4 terminal UP DOWN adjusting setup 5 communication provide Modbus and external bus use the same main freguency storage 6 EAI1 analog setup extension valid 7 EAI2 analog setup extension valid 8 high speed pulse setup X8 terminal need choose the relative function 9 terminal pulse width setup X8 terminal 79 6 Function parameter schedule graph need choose the relative function 10 terminal encoder provide decide by X1 X2 11 15 Reserved F18 01 Terminal control Same as above 1 0 frequency binding F18 02 Communication Same as above 1 0 control frequency binding F18 03 Digital frequency Units digit keyboard UP DW integral control 1 00 integral function O integral function selection 1 no integral function Tens digit terminal UP DW integral control O integral function 1 no integral function F18 04 Keyboard UP DOWN _ 0 01 50 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 10Hz integral rate F18 05 Keyboard no integral 0 01 10 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 01Hz single step s size setup F18 06 Terminal UP DOWN _ 0 01 50 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 20Hz integral rate F18 07 Terminal no integral 0 01 10 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 10Hz single step s size setup F18 08 Droop control decline 0 00 10 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00Hz frequency F18 09 Setup accumulate power 0 65535 hours 1 0
240. ng 1E 02H Reading only BIT7 acceleration BITS deceleration BIT9 alarm BIT10 fault BIT11 current limit BIT12 fault self recovery BIT13 self tuning BIT14 Free stop State BIT15 speed tracking start Inverter status 229 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol Alarm 0 no alarm code 1E 03H Reading only 1 50 the current alarm code e Modbus communication address 1E01 frequency given can be torque setting and pressure setting address Note A 6 3 Monitor parameter communication address Variable name Communication reani Command data or response value address attribute C 00 1C00H Reading Monitoring parameters 1 C 01 1C01H Reading Monitoring parameters 2 C 02 1C02H Reading Monitoring parameters 3 C 03 1C03H Reading Monitoring parameters 4 C 04 1C04H Reading Monitoring parameters 5 C 05 1C05H Reading Monitoring parameters 6 A 6 4 Inside hidden parameters i Communicatio read write means of command data or response Variable name 3 n address attribute value Reserved DOOH Reserved DOIH er eanon aa D02H read write Range 0 4000 given value Communication AGE D03H read write Range 0 4000 given value Communication 3 EAO1 given value D04H read write Range 0 4000 Communication EAO2 given value D05H read write Range 0 4000 Communication D06H read write Range 0 4000 DO given value Communicatio
241. ng frequency F01 00 9 Main frequency terminal encoder pulse input can only choose channel X1 and X2 combination auxiliary frequency terminal encoder pulse input can only choose channel X3 and X4 combination and the rate of the auxiliary frequency encoder frequency is the fixed rate When 9 is selected in F01 00 and F01 03 X1 X4 can only be used 3 as encoder frequency setting Other terminal functions defined by Note F08 18 F08 21 are invalid F08 31 Reserved 149 7 Detailed function specification 7 10 Switch output function parameter group F09 F09 00 Open collector output terminal Y1 Range 0 60 0 output setting F09 01 Open collector output terminal Y2 Range 0 60 0 output setting F09 02 Open collector output terminal Y3 Range 0 60 0 output setting F09 03 Open collector output terminal Y4 Range 0 60 0 output setting F09 04 Programmable relay output setting Range 0 60 22 Functions of the above parameters are used to select Y1 Y4 and relay output terminals Table 7 10 shows the functions of the above 4 terminals One function can be selected repeatedly Open collector Yi and high speed pulse DO output share terminal Y4 Y4 terminal as the high speed pulse function to be modified F00 22 thousands place to 1 Table7 10 Output terminals function selection diagram Setting Function Setting
242. nit Default cation F15 00 Reserved F15 01 Asynchronous motor rated 0 1 999 9KW 0 1KW Base on x power motor type F15 02 Asynchronous motor rated 1 690V 1V Base on x voltage motor type F15 03 Asynchronous motor rated 0 1 6553 5A O 1A Base on x current motor type F15 04 Asynchronous motor rated 0 00 400 00Hz 0 01Hz Base on x frequency motor type F15 05 Asynchronous motor rated 0 60000r min lr min Base on x rotational speed motor type F15 06 Asynchronous motor poles 1 7 1 2 x No F15 07 Asynchronous motor stator 0 001 65 535Q inverter power lt 7 5KW 0 001Q Base on x resistance 0 0001 6 5535Q inverter power gt 7 5KW 0 00012 ee F15 08 Asynchronous motor rotor 0 001 65 535Q inverter power lt 7 5KW 0 001Q Base on x resistance 0 0001 6 5535Q inverter power gt 7 5KW 0 00012 FRR F15 09 Asynchronous motor 0 01 655 35mH inverter power lt 7 5KW 0 01mH Base on x leakage inductance 0 001 65 535mH inverter power 7 5KW 0 001m Es F15 10 Asynchronous motor 0 1 6553 5mH inverter power lt 7 5KW 0 1mH Base on x mutnal iaductance 0 01 655 35mH inverter power 7 5KW 0 01mH as F15 11 Asynchronous motor no 0 01 655 35A 0 01A Base on x load current motor type F15 12 Reserved F15 13 Reserved F15 14 Reserved F15 15 Reserved F15 16 Reserved F15 17 Reserved F15 18 Reserved F15 19 Motor parameter 0 Inaction 1 0 x self tuning selection 1 asynchronous motor stop to self adjusting 2 async
243. nt When starting DC braking time is 0 0 second no DC braking process Output Freq 4 DC brake z YW Time Output volt quantity 7 yj Uy i f Yj GG Valid value 7 AN AA Up LA ty Ah Time DC brake time Running command Fig 7 4 Starting mode 1 description 109 7 Detailed function specification Speed track starting Range 0 2 2 ola frequency selection 0 Current setting frequency 1 Running frequency before power down 2 Speed track auxiliary starting frequency Select frequency closed to the current running frequency of the motor so as to track the current running revolving speed of the motor For example when current running frequency is closed to current setting frequency then select 0 and start to search from current setting frequency Speed track auxiliary Range 0 00Hz upper 5 res 10 00Hz starting frequency limit frequency F02 07 This parameter defines when 2 is selected in F02 06 parameter the starting searching frequency when revolving track is started meme bed ack Setting Range 0 00 10 00s 0 10s waiting time When 2 is selected in F02 00 if the inverter checks that the running command is valid the revolving speed is searched after the time defined by F2 08 Speed track current control Range 1 20 2 coefficient This parameter define the speed search process tracking current the bigger of the F02 09 value the faste
244. nt exceeds F19 06 overload pre alarm detection levels and time is greater than F19 07 overload pre alarm delay time output the indicator signal 20 Frequency inverter Low voltage lock up signal LU When the frequency inverter is running the DC bus voltage below the limit level output indication signal 21 External fault shutdown EXT When the frequency inverter appears external fault trip alarm E 18 output indication signal 22 Frequency inverter fault When the frequency inverter detects fault the output is indication signal 23 Frequency inverter warning When the frequency inverter detects alarm the output is indication signal 24 Simple PLC during operating The simple PLC is enabled and enter into operation state output indication signal 25 Simple PLC stage operation completed When the simple PLC stage operation is completed output indication signal single pulse signal the width is 500ms 26 Simple PLC ends after running a cycle After the completion of a cycle of simple PLC output indication signal single pulse signal the width is 500ms 27 Simple PLC pause When the simple PLC is running into the pause state output is indication signal 28 Wobble upper and lower limit If the frequency fluctuation range calculated by center frequency exceeds the upper limit FO1 11 or belows lower 152 7 Detailed function specification limit FO1 12 after selecting the wobble function it will output indication signal
245. ntrol board Look for service from manufacturer or agent E 15 Short circuit to ground when operation Motor short circuit to ground The replacement of cable or motor Hall component is damaged or the hall wiring is poor or the current detection circuit is abnormal Look for service from manufacturer or agent E 16 Short circuit to ground when power on Motor short circuit to ground Change the cable or motor The power supplier of the inverter and the motor wiring are reversed Change the cable or motor wiring Hall component is damaged or the hall wiring is poor Look for service from manufacturer or agent E 17 A 17 Inverter overheat Continuous alarm on A 17 for more than 30 minutes Cleaning or to the ventilation duct improve Duct blockage Cleaning or to the ventilation duct improve 217 8 Troubleshooting _ To improve the ventilation The ambient temperature is diti d h too high conditions decreasing the carrier frequency Fan damage Change new one External fault emergency Open external failure terminal after stop terminal closed external failure is settled E 18 External device Sudden stop terminal for Open external failure terminal after A 18 failure external failure closed external failure is settled ER insert Check and connect the wire aga
246. nts the time within which the inverter serial port receives and executes command from upper device and then responds to upper device Main amp sub inverter F05 07 communication frequency Range 0 500 100 setting percentage After setting this parameter proportion when frequency sent from main inverter as the input source of communication frequency of sub inverter one inverter can control multiple devices with different proportional frequency This parameter is valid only when inverter is master slave station and the frequency given channel is communication given Note mam Communication virtual Range 00 FFH 00H input terminal enabled BitO CX1 virtual input terminal enabled Bit1 CX2 virtual input terminal enabled Bit2 CX3 virtual input terminal enabled Bit3 CX4 virtual input terminal enabled Bit4 CX5 virtual input terminal enabled Bit5 CX6 virtual input terminal enabled Bit6 CX7 virtual input terminal enabled Bit7 CX8 virtual input terminal enabled 7 Detailed function specification Communication virtual input Ree terminal joining node Range 0 1 0 0 Independent node Communication virtual terminal function is only set in F05 10 F05 17 1 Terminal node Communication virtual terminal function is only set in F08 18 F08 25 regardless of X1 X8 valid or CX1 CX8 valid all execute this setting function X1 X8 corresponds to CX1 CX
247. o F26 group parameter to see about information by referring to keypad operation method Code Content Code Content F26 00 Previous one failure record F26 09 Mipit terminal state at previous failure F26 01 Previous two failure record F26 10 Running time at previous failure F26 02 Previous three failure record F26 11 Set freq at previous 2 failure F26 03 Previous four failure record F26 12 Output freq at previous 2 failure Output tat i 2 F26 04 Set freq at previous failure F26 13 big ee PAGES failure F26 05 Output freg at previous failure F26 14 DC bus volt at previous 2 failure Module temp at ious 2 F26 06 Output current at previous failure F26 15 See erence eee eae failure F26 1 Input terminal state of previous 2 F26 07 DC bus volt at previous failure 6 failure F26 1 Running ti f ious 2 F26 08 Module temp at previous failure oii sat eas 7 failure 8 3 Failure reset 1 Before reset you must find out reason of failure downright and eliminate it otherwise may cause permanent damage to the inverter 2 If can t reset or failure takes place again after resetting should look for reason and continuous resetting will damage the inverter 3 Reset should take place 5 minutes later after overload overheat protection action 4 For the fault of E 14 the reset is invalid the motor wiring should be checked after power off and restart the in
248. ompensation gain of Range 100 0 130 0 Valid 100 0 vibration restrain when F00 24 3 The compensation is 0 when F14 29 to over cu rrent when start operation 100 Large enough of this value will lead F14 30 Torque compensation limit frequency Range 0 00Hz Upper limit Freq Valid when F00 24 1 2 0 00Hz When the output frequency is bigger than the value of F14 30 the torque compensation defined by F14 21 is 0 And the actual torque compensation will linear decrease from 0Hz to the frequency of F14 30 186 7 Detailed function specification 7 16 Motor parameters Group F15 F15 00 Reserved F15 01 Asynchronous motor Range 0 1 999 9KW Depend on rated power type F15 02 Asynchronous motor Range 1 690V Depend on rated voltage type F15 03 Asynchronous motor Range 0 1 6553 5A Depend on rated current type miai I ee Range 0 00 400 00Hz Depend on rated frequency type Asynchronous motor ie z Depend on F15 05 rated rotational speed Range 0 60000r min type F15 06 Asynchronous motor Range 1 7 2 Poles No Set the parameters according to the motor nameplate no matter whether V F control mode or vector control mode is adopted otherwise it may be abnormal To achieve better V F or vector control performance motor auto tuning is required The motor auto tuning accuracy depends on the correct setting of motor nameplate parameters Rang
249. on 4 Terminal UP DOWN adjust setting 5 Communication provision MODBUS and FieldBus used a same storage registers 6 EAI1 analog provision Extensible 7 EAI2 analog provision Extensible 8 High speed Pulse provision Please choose the corresponding functions of X8 9 Terminal pulse width provision Please choose the corresponding functions of X8 10 Terminal encoder provision Defined by X1 and X2 11 15 Reserved Different control command channels can be bundled to the same frequency reference channel After success bundled the bundled frequency reference channel have a highest priority and just available for Main frequency bundling Terminal control frequency F18 01 binding Range 0 15 0 Please refer to the description of F18 00 F18 02 Communication control Range 0 15 0 frequency binding Please refer to the description of F18 00 Digital frequency integral Range units digit 0 1 function selection tens digit 0 1 w F18 03 Units digit Keyboard UP DOWN Integration control 0 Integral function enabled 1 Integral function disabled Tens digit Terminal UP DOWN Integration control 0 Integral function enabled 1 Integral function disabled This function should cooperate with 16 and 17 functions of multi function 192 7 Detailed function specification terminal Keyboard UP DOWN ole integral rate Range 0 01 50 00Hz 0 10Hz When the keyboard U
250. on Range 0 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled F19 13 Overvoltage stall protection Range 120 150 125 voltage During deceleration the motor s decelerate rate may be lower than that of drive s output frequency due to the load inertia At this time the motor will feed the energy back to the drive resulting in the voltage rise on the drive s DC bus If no measures taken the drive will trip due to over voltage During the deceleration the drive detects the bus voltage and compares it with the over voltage point at stall defined by F19 13 If the bus voltage exceeds the stall over voltage point the output frequency of the inverter will stop decreasing When the bus voltage become lower than the point then run slowly as shown in Fig 7 46 Overvoltage point at stall Time Output freq Time Fig 7 46 Over voltage at stall Figg uomatecursens limit Range 110 230 170 level Frequency decline rate of HG automatic current limit Range 0 00 99 99Hz s 10 00Hz s F19 16 Automatic current limit Range 0 1 0 action selection 0 Constant speed disabled 1 Constant speed enabled Auto current limiting function is used to limit the load current smaller than the 198 7 Detailed function specification value defined by F19 14 in real time Therefore the drive will not trip due to surge over current This function is especially useful for the applications with big load inertia or bi
251. on code 28 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 28 User function code 29 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 F25 29 User function code 30 Range F00 00 F25 xx 25 00 This parameter is the User defined parameter user can choose the at most 30 from FO to F30 that are reflect into F25 in order to check and alter more convenient Use F25 00 setting the first function code parameter that users plan to then use F25 01 setting the second function code parameter that users plan to so after the maximum 30 User defined parameter that can define is finished then setting F00 00 3 user list view press If users want to drop out user defined parameter mode setting F00 0043 then press For example user plan to set three User defined parameter F02 01 F03 02 AM F04 00 following the steps below Use F25 00 to set the first function code parameter02 01 press XX 2 Use F25 01 to set the second function code parameter03 02 press i 3 Use F25 02 to set the third function code parameter04 00 press Ba 4 Set F00 00 3 user list view press 2 After the setting is finished if users do not change F00 00 function code when enter function code display state the operation panel will display F00 00 F02 01 F03 02 and FO4 00 only if the user do not want to display User defined parameter setting F00 00 to the display expected mode 1 xx represent function code 2 F25 xx represent no reflection Note B When the setting function parameter
252. on description Terminal Name Description Remark number CNI Communication By the client device connected to the CAN wiring terminal bus communication re When you install this plug docking with H Signal port the main control board CN2 n Terminal resistor Connect J2 then terminal resistor connect access entry to bus 1 CN1 pin definition PIN data Definition PIN data Definition 1 signal CANL 3 COM 2 signal CANH 263 Appendix D Communication extension card D 4 CANIink communication card D 4 1 CANIink introduction The physical layer CANlink card is CAN bus only supports CAN2 0B extended frame Since the control signal CANIink card connected directly to the main board compared with CANOPEN card with high transmission efficiency real time stability and other characteristics the maximum transfer rate of 1Mbps CAN bus data transmission using a differential signal with strong anti interference transmission distance and other characteristics the communication rate 5Kbps below the farthest reach 10Km at 1Mbps baud rate up to 30m CANIink protocol is self definition protocols support for modifications and inverter terminal parameters monitoring D 4 2 CANlink card figure and terminal definition description Fig D 3 CANIink Dimensions 264 Appendix D Communication extension card Table D 4 Terminal function description Terminal Some Name Description R
253. on virtual 0 90 1 0 o terminal CX1 function F05 11 Communication virtual 0 90 1 0 o terminal CX2 function F05 12 Communication virtual 0 90 1 0 o terminal CX3 function F05 13 Communication virtual 0 90 1 0 o 6l 6 Function parameter schedule graph terminal CX4 function FOS 14 Communication virtual 0 90 1 0 o terminal CX5 function F05 15 Communication virtual 0 90 1 0 o terminal CX6 function F05 16 Communication virtual 0 90 1 0 o terminal CX7 function F05 17 Communication virtual 0 90 1 0 o terminal CX8 function FOS 18 Input mapping application F00 00 F26 xx 0 0 25 00 o parameter 1 F05 19 Input mapping application F00 00 F26 xx 0 0 25 00 o parameter 2 F05 20 Input mapping application F00 00 F26 xx 0 0 25 00 o parameter 3 F05 21 Input mapping application F00 00 F26 xx 00 25 00 o parameter 4 F05 22 Input mapping application F00 00 F26 xx 00 25 00 o parameter 5 F05 23 Input mapping application F00 00 F26 xx 00 25 00 o parameter 6 F05 24 Input mapping application F00 00 F26 xx 0 0 25 00 o parameter 7 F05 25 Input mapping application F00 00 F26 xx 0 0 25 00 o parameter 8 F05 26 Input mapping application F00 00 F26 xx 0 0 25 00 o parameter 9 F05 27 Input mapping application F00 00 F26 xx 00 25 00 o parameter 10 F05 28 Reserved F05 29 Reserved F05 30 Reserved F05 31 Reserved
254. onstant pressure water supply function parameters Group F12 F12 00 Constant pressure water supply mode selection 0 disabled 1 Inverter works in one drive two pump mode 2 Choose extensible constant pressure board acts in one drive two pump mode Range 0 4 0 3 Choose extensible constant pressure board acts in one drive three pump mode 4 Choose extensible constant pressure board acts in one drive four pump mode This function can be used to choose different kinds of constant pressure water supply mode and you should choose an extensible constant pressure board to realize one drive three mode and one drive four mode and F00 19 should be set to 2 1 The function of Group F11 will be effective automatically when the constant pressure supply function is enabled 2 Except for the related parameters in Group F11 and F12 for Closed loop the function of Yi should be enabled in F9 for the B inverter works in one drive two pump mode without an extend Note board 3 Output terminal Y4 DO should be set to Y4 4 When one inverter drive one pump with constant pressure water supply the parameter F09 00 F09 03 Y1 Y4 can not be set 37 38 Range 0 000 the range of F12 01 Target pressure setting long distance manometer 0 200Mpa This parameter defined the target pressure of the constant pressure supply system The channels of the pressure reference and feedback are defined by F
255. oo Range 0 00 20 00s MER large speed deviation no detection while at 0 VU Under the open loop or the closed loop vector running mode when it was detected that the difference of motor rotational speed and setting rotational speed equals the setting value of F19 41 and after the continue time of F19 42 s setting value the inverter alarms fault of E 39 and freely stop No detection when F19 42 equals 0 but detection is still available when F19 41 equals 0 204 7 Detailed function specification F19 43 Overvoltage suppression coefficient Range 0 0 100 0 90 0 The bigger value of F19 43 the more obvious the suppression will be but the load response will be slow the parameter is available when F00 24 1 or 2 When the load fluctuation is strong the devices like crusher punch pipe file machine and the equipment with clutch will be over voltage easily so increasing the parameter is needed F19 44 Reserved 205 7 Detailed function specification 7 21 Internal Virtual Input Output Node Parameter Group F20 F20 00 Virtual input VDI function selection Range 0 90 0 F20 01 Virtual input VDI2 function selection Range 0 90 0 F20 02 Virtual input VDI3 function selection Range 0 90 0 F20 03 Virtual input VDI4 function selection Range 0 90 0 F20 04 Virtual input VDI5 function selection Range 0 90 0
256. oop setting and exterior counting value of auxiliary device 258 Appendix D Communication extension card Appendix D Communication extension card D 1 Communication card selection At the present there are four kinds of communication card can be selected for ee Type Description Remark PROFIBUS DP communication card use l EN PRO1 in 15KW and the below Optional PROFIBUS DP communication card use 2 EN PR02 in 15KW the above Optional 3 EN CAN1 CANopen communication card Optional 4 EN CAN2 CANIink communication card Optional D 2 PROFIBUS DP communication card D 2 1 PROFIBUS introduction 1 PROFIBUS short for Process Field Bus PROFIBUS is an international and open field bus standard independent with manufacturer It can be support for many equipment manufacturers with good compatibility It s widely used in Manufacturing Automation automation of process industry and other buildings transportation electric power automation field 2 PROFIBUS can realize exchanging the data between all kinds of element of automation all of this equipment can exchange the information though the same port But the transmission rate is different all the automatic equipment can exchange the information though the same port but with the different rates so PROFIBUS should offer different types for the speed rates selection it is made up with PROFIBUS DP Distributed peripheral PROFIBUS PA PROFIBUS
257. option action frequency 0 15Hz action rake current 0 100 of rated current action time 0 30 0s ioe Jog frequency range 0Hz up limit frequency jog acceleration and deceleration time 0 1 6000 0 seconds for setting Multi section speed run Realized by inbuilt PLC or control terminal with 15 section speed each section speed with separately acceleration and deceleration time with inbuilt PLC can achieve reserve when power down Inbuilt PID controller Convenient to make closed loop control system Automatic energy Optimize V F curve automatically to achieve power saving run saving run according to the load status Automatic voltage Automatically keep output voltage constant when the power grid regulate AVR voltage fluctuation Automatic current Current limited automatically under run mode in avoid of inverter limiting over current frequently to trip carrier modulation Modulate carrier wave automatically according to the load characteristic Speed tracking restart Make rotating motor smoothly start without shocking uorpung Zuruuny running command specified channel Keypad specified control terminal specified communication specified can switch through various means Running frequency specified channel Main amp auxiliary specified to a realize one main adjusting and one fine control Digital specified analog specified pulse specified pulse width specified communication spe
258. or rotate speed 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 16 current given torque 0 2 times of rated torque 17 current output torque 0 2 times of rated torque 18 current torque current 0 2 times of rated motor current 19 current flux current 0 1 times of rated motor flux current 20 25 reserved 1 Terminal AO1 and AO2 are optional output terminal of 0 10V or 4 20mA which can satisfy the variety needs of customer 2 By disposing F00 21 analog output output of terminal AO1 and AO2 can be 0 10V or 4 20mA to satisfy the variety needs of customer 3 The unit s place of F00 22 is set to 1 when DO output pulse signal 4 Rated flux current current value of F15 11 parameter Rated torque current sqrt rated motor current X rated motor Current rated flux current X rated flux current F09 38 Reserved F09 39 Analog output AO1 filter time Range 0 0 20 0s 0 0s F09 40 Analog output AO1 gain Range 0 00 2 00 1 00 F09 41 Analog output AO1 bias Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 Parameter F09 39 defines the filter time of A01 output its reasonable setting can improve stability of analog output But a higher setting will influence the rate of change which can not reflect the instantaneous value of corresponding physical quantity 159 7 Detailed function specification If users want to change the display range or error correction table headers you can achieve it by adjusting the output gain and bias of AOL Wh
259. otocol and Modbus 1 005 x setting Baud rate selection 0 300BPS 1 600BPS 2 1200BPS 3 2400BPS 4 4800BPS 5 9600BPS 6 19200BPS 7 38400BPS 8 57600BPS FO5 02 Data format LED the unit digital free protocol and Modbus 00 x protocol Data format 0 1 8 1 format no checkout RTU 1 1 8 1 format Odd Parity RTU 2 1 8 1 format Even Parity RTU 3 1 7 1 format no checkout ASCII 4 1 7 1 format Odd Parity ASCII 5 1 7 1 format Even Parity ASCII F05 03 Local address 0 247 00 is broadcast address I 1 x A 5 Data communication structure A 5 1 Data frame format Using RTU mode messages are sent at least 3 5 character time interval pause The first transmitted field is device address the character you can transfer is hexadecimal 0x00 OxFF Network equipment Continuously monitor the bus including pauses When the address field is received all equipment determine whether it is sent to their own when the last character of the packet transfer is complete at least a 3 5 character times pause mean the end of the message A new 226 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol message can begin after this pause The entire message frame must be transmitted as a continuous flow If a new message start transmitting in less than 3 5 character times after a message and then receiving device will consider it a continuation of the previous message This will cause an error because in the final CRC field value c
260. pe Stepl Step2 _ Operated time Step2 remain time a Acc time of the 1 step az Acc time of the 2 step 23 Acc time of the 3 step dz Dec time of the 1 step f Frequency of the 1 step Freguency of the 2 step f Frequency of the 3 step Fig 7 34 simple PLC restart mode 1 Pause signal Output Freq Hz fi Same freq ai d 4 7 d f ae fo as Time t _ Stepl Step2 Step 2 remain time a Operated time a Acc time of the 1 stepaz Acc time of the one step a3 Acc time of the 3 step dz Dec time of the 1 step f Frequency of the 1 step fy Frequency of the 2 step f Frequency of the 3 step Fig 7 35 PLC Restart mode 2 163 7 Detailed function specification Hundreds digit PLC unit of running time 0 Seconds 1 Minutes The unit is effective for the running time of different steps only during the operation of PLC the unit of Acc time and Dec time is defined by parameter F01 19 1 The step is ineffective if the time of this step of PLC operation is set as 0 thereafter operate the next step ES 2 Control the PLC process a pause ineffective operate via Note terminal for details please refer to parameters in F8 Group that relative with terminal function Thousands digit the storage mode when power off 0 No storage No record the running state when power off it will restart from the first step when power on again 1 Storage Records the running status which
261. perate rightly and use its high performance to best please read this brochure carefully before installation usage and keep them well to the final users of inverter Please contact our office or dealer anywhere at any moment when you have any doubts or special demands in using these inverters and you can also contact our after service center in our Headquarters directly We will serve you with all our heart We reserve our right to notice you if we change contents of this manual Content 1 Safety information and use notice points eer errr reer rere eee ee eee eee ee eee 1 1 1 Safety precautions sees se eek EE eke EER EE ER EER EE ER EER ee ER EER ee eke ees 1 1 2 Application range mureren EER ee rener ee eke ee 3 1 3 Use notice points urnen ER EER EE ER EER ee eke EER ee eke ee 3 1 4 Scraping handling notice s tee ese eke ER EER EE ER EER EE ER EER ee eke ees 4 2 Inverter type and specification etet ee seek ee eke EER EE PRE EER EE ER EER ee ees ee 5 2 1 Incoming inverter inspect testes sees ee eke eek EE eke EER ee eke EER ee eke ee 5 2 2 Type explanation tee ee eek eek RE ER EER RE ER EER EE ER EER ee ER nen ee see ee 5 2 3 Nameplate explanation etse ees ee eke EER EE ER EER EE ER EER ee ER EER ee ee 5 2 4 Inverter type explanation tees see eke eek EE ER EER EE ER EER ee Ee EER Ke ee 6 2 5 Appearance and parts name explanation tee ee ee ee eke EER EE eke ee 7 2 6 Outer size eer r erro rT err errr reer rere ere eee eee ee ee eee
262. peration mode More details please refer to the Multi speed terminal operation function in Parameters Group F08 and Simple PLC operation function in Parameters Group F10 167 7 Detailed function specification 7 12 Closed Loop PID operation Parameters Group F11 Analog feedback control system Pressure reference is input through the terminal AIl and water pressure sensor send a 4 20mA to the terminal AI2 of inverter as a feedback signal all of them make up of analog closed loop control system via build in PID adjuster as shown in Fig 7 36 Three R ENS00 EN600 y Output phase S V MP 380V AT W Y ii d ja n m Xi Defined as FWD L 5 n 4 20mA S Co AI2 2 9 a 10V GND amp Provision z Sati 1 3K Ts GND Fig 7 36 Build in PID adjuster control system diagram ES Setting the value of F11 01 can choose the channel of pressure Note reference Operating principle of built in PID function of EN500 EN600 is shown in Fig 7 37 as below Proportion E1107 Closed l Offset limit Closed loop osed loop regulation ILID i Integral gain F outniat Closed loop reference F11 03 Fu Eog MS er ee i Differential E gain F11 09 Feedback regulation F11 04 F11 14 Closed loop feedback Fig 7 37 PID block control principle diagram In above diagram the definition of closed loop reference
263. quency arriving 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 50 00Hz the detection value FO9 21 Frequency arriving 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz o the detection width F09 22 Frequency 2 arriving 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 50 00Hz o the detection value F09 23 Frequency 2 arriving 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 0 00Hz o the detection width F09 24 positive and negative 0000 FFFF extension valid 0000 o logic setup of Output terminal F09 25 Y1 output closed delay 0 000 50 000s 0 001s 0 000s o time F09 26 Y1 output disconnected 0 000 50 000s 0 001s 0 000s o delay time 69 6 Function parameter schedule graph F09 27 Y2 output closed delay 0 000 50 000s 0 001s 0 000s time F09 28 Y2 output disconnected 0 000 50 000s 0 001s 0 000s elay time FO9 29 Y3 output closed delay 0 000 50 000s 0 001s 0 000s time F09 30 Y3 output disconnected 0 000 50 000s 0 001s 0 000s elay time FO9 31 Y4 output closed delay 0 000 50 000s 0 001s 0 000s time F09 32 Y4 output disconnected 0 000 50 000s 0 001s 0 000s elay time FO9 33 Relay output closed 0 000 50 000s 0 001s 0 000s elay time F09 34 Relay output 0 000 50 000s 0 001s 0 000s isconnected delay time F09 35 Analog output AO1 0 output frequency before slip compensation 1 0 selection 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 1 output frequency after slip Compensation 0 00Hz upper
264. r show it with decimalism after change it into binary the definition is on the parameter details 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Input terminal status Output terminal status Extension output terminal status Extension input terminal status Communication virtual input terminal status Internal virtual input node status Analog input AI1 before checkout 0 01V 0 01mA Analog input AI2 before checkout 0 01V 0 01mA Extension analog input EAI1 before checkout 0 01V 0 01mA Extension analog input EAI2 before checkout 0 01V 0 01mA Analog AO1 output after correction 0 01V 0 01mA Analog AO2 output after correction 0 01V or 0 01mA Extension analog EAO1 output 0 01V 0 01mA Extension analog EAO2 output 0 01V 0 01mA External pulse input frequency 1 Hz Reserved Process PID provide 0 01V Process PID feedback 0 01V Process PID deviation 0 01V Process PID output 0 01Hz Simple PLC current segment No External multi speed current segment No 91 7 Detailed function specification 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 51 52 Constant pressure water supply provide pressure 0 001Mpa Constant pressure water supply feedback pressure 0 001Mpa Constant pressure water supplies relay status Current length 1M Accumulate length 1M Current internal count value Current internal
265. r frequency 41 communication provision 42 60 reserve0 terminal unused 1 operation RUN 2 CW run 3 CCW run 4 DC brake 5 run prepare finish busbar voltage normal fault free no run forbid receival of run command s status 6 stop command indication 7 no current detected 8 overcurrent detected 9 currentl arrival 10 current2 arrival 11 no frequency output 12 frequency arrival signal FAR 13 frequency level detect signal 1 FDT1 14 frequency level detect signal 2 FDT2 15 output frequency arrival upper limit FHL 16 output frequency arrival low limit FLL 17 frequency 1 arrival output 18 frequency 2 arrival output 19 overload pre alarm signal OL 20 undervoltage lockout stop LU 21 external fault stop EXT 22 fault 23 alarm 24 simple PLC operation 25 simple PLC section operation finish 26 simple PLC circle operation finish 27 simple PLC operation stop 28 traverse frequency high and low limit 29 setup length arrival 30 internal counter final value arrival 3 1 internal counter designated value arrival 32 internal timer arrival output 0 5s valid signal on arrival 33 operation stop time finish 34 operation arrival time finish 35 setup run time arrival 36 setup power on time arrival 37 1 pump variable frequency 38 1 pump power frequency 39 2 pump variable frequency 68 6 Function parameter schedule graph
266. r it can track ROD Onl EE SE ine Range 0 1 30 0 4 00 speed time This parameter can be modified to improve speed track time On SVC control the minimum unit of speed tracking for search speed time is 0 1s On V F control the minimum unit of speed tracking for search speed time is ls 1 F02 06 F02 09 parameter only can be started on the speed 2 variator the start is valid Note 2 F02 10 parameter can be used for both V F model and SVC model F02 11 Stop mode Range 0 2 0 0 Deceleration stop After receiving stop command the inverter reduces output frequency gradually according to the set deceleration time the inverter stops when frequency is 0 1 Free stop After receiving stop command the inverter stops output 110 7 Detailed function specification immediately and the load stops freely according to mechanical inertia 2 Deceleration DC braking stop After receiving stop command the inverter reduces output frequency gradually according to the set deceleration time When reaching F02 14 starting frequency of stop braking After F02 15 defines DC braking waiting time the inverter starts DC braking as shown in Fig 7 5 F02 12 Deceleration stop holding Range 0 00Hz upper 0 00Hz frequency limiting frequency F02 13 ER LR stop holding Range 0 00 10 00s 0 00s The parameters F02 12 and F02 13 define inverter s deceleration stop holding funct
267. rameter display status to press x key to carry on parameter storage operation To press SVEND key can only come back to upper class menu without storing modified parameter ESC MENU First class menu ENTER DATA Second class menu i TA Fa ar N er Marred Marte E wo aw a He n e E wo mm a He ne RY wo mm a He ne EY z i mim i ITT TTT TT TI S LEI i io EI elt ILL I I ER li l I il il aa Output freq switch display i Para group Display control ESC MENU Waiting status parameter Display i or tun status parameter display EE EE EE EE A REE i or failure alarm display Fig 5 5 keypad display status switching 5 Alarm state display When under running and standby situation v It means enter failure alarm display status upon ar i detecting failure signal and display failure code sparklingly Fig5 6 Inverter keeping goe i running state But this alarm display can not be reset button eliminated After only find Same main assist frequency channel the cause of the alarm in order to eliminate Fig 5 6 45 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter this factor Normal 5 2 5 User Management Parameters In order to facilitate the user parameter management EN500 EN600 component model parameter menu for display management The parameters do not need to be displayed can be shielded 1 Method parameter setting mode display By setting F00 00 0 1 2
268. refer to the instruction of F09 14and F09 15 parameters for details 9 Current 1 arrived When the output current reaches the detection conditions to meet the current 1 output the indicator signal Please refer to the instruction of FO9 16and F09 17 parameters for details 10 Current 2 arrived When the output current reaches the detection conditions to meet the current 2 output the indicator signal Please refer to the instruction of FO9 18and F09 19 parameters for details 11 Frequency inverter Zero frequency output Please refer to the function 151 7 Detailed function specification instruction of FO9 10and FO9 11 12 Freguency arriving signal FAR Please refer to the function instruction of F09 05 13 Frequency level detection signal 1 FTD1 Please refer to the function instruction of FO9 06 F09 07 14 Frequency level detection signal 2 FTD2 Please refer to the function instruction of F09 08 F09 09 15 Output frequency reaches upper limit FHL When the running frequency reaches upper limit the output is indicator signal 16 Output frequency reaches lower limit FHL When the running frequency reaches lower limit the output is indicator signal 17 Frequency 1 arriving output Please refer to the function instruction of F09 20 FO9 21 18 Frequency 2 arriving output Please refer to the function instruction of F09 22 FO9 23 19 Frequency inverter overload pre alarm signal Frequency inverter output curre
269. ring at the bottom end of the inverter input amp output to restrain radio frequency interference of dynamic wire effectively e Motor cable should be placed in protective object with large thickness such as placed in larger thickness over 2mm pipeline or buried in cemented tank Putting dynamic wire in metal tube and connect to earth grounding with shield wire motor cable use 4 core cable one side is earthed through the inverter the other side connected to motor casing OOS To prevent wire parallel or bundled of strong and weak current it should keep away from inverter assemble device and wiring should away from inverter R S T U V W equipower line Devices with highfield and high magnetic field should notice the corresponding installation position of inverter and keep distance and orthogonal crossing 35 4 EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility Explanation 4 2 Field wiring and earth grounding 1 inverter terminal motor connection wire U V W terminal output wire and inverter terminal power connection wire R S T terminal input wire should keep distance enough as possible as can 2 U V W terminal 3 motor wires should be placed in metal tube or metal wiring tank as possible as 3 Generally control signal wire should use shield cable when shield layer connect to inverter terminal it should be the single end earth grounding which closed to inverter side 4 Inverter C gt terminal earth grounding cabl
270. romagnetic contact If contactor and other switch component needed to add please make sure inverter suspended without output show as Fig 3 6 6 To provide inverter over current protection in output side and convenient maintenance under power off it should be connected to power source through air switch and contactor 7 Control signal wire should select multicore stranded wire or shielding wire One end of the shielding layer hang in the air and the other end connect to inverter earth grounding terminal connection wire shorter than 20m 18 3 Installation and wiring DBefore wiring assure power supply is cut off completely for 10 minutes and all LED or LCD indicator light extinguished 2 Before inverter internal wiring confirm that DC volt Between main loop end P and P fall down to below DC36V 3 Wiring can only be done by professional person trained and qualified 4 Before power on check if voltage grade of the inverter is in line with that of power supply volt otherwise will cause personnel injured and device damaged U inverter y in Hee Fig 3 6 Forbid to use contactor and absorbing capacitor 3 4 Main loop terminal wiring Air switch breaker contactor i p Eo Uo eN 3 2 EN600 J OM power x T JO Fig 3 7 main loop simple wiring To keep user power grid safety please choose proper air switch breaker wiring at power input side para
271. rter electrification waiting run status display 3 Failure alarm display status The inverter enters into failure alarm display s status upon detecting failure signal and display i i I failure code sparklingly as shown in Fig 5 4 SS A mind aal To press gt gt key can look over relative I I i parameter after stopping running Est N over current in accelerating Can press Ce key to enter into program status to see about F26 group parameter if want to search Fig 5 4 44 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter failure information Can carry on failure restoration by G J key control terminal or communication command on the kd after troubleshooting Keep displaying failure code if failure exist continuously For some serious failure such as The earthing short circuit Inverter modules protect over current over voltage etc must not carry on failure reset forcibly to make the inverter run again without failure elimination confirmed Otherwise have danger of damaging the inverter 4 Function code editing status Under waiting run or failure alarm status press A key can enter into editing status If user password is set can enter into editing status after inputting the password see also F27 00 description and Fig 5 10 and editing status is displayed according to three classes menu mode as shown in Fig 5 5 To press 7 key can enter into one class by one class Under function pa
272. se see 27 3 6 3 Analog input amp output terminal Wiring esse ees sesse ses ees ee 29 3 6 4 Digital input terminal wiring tee ee Ee eek ee eke EER ee eke ees ee 30 3 6 5 Communication terminal Wiring tee ees see EER ee EER ee EER ee ees 32 4 EMC Electromagnetic compatibility explanation seer see see ees eee 34 4 1 Noise interference restraining tte ee see ee ees Ke Ee EE ee ER EER ee ees ee 34 4 1 1 Interference noise type sstertterseetseesstesseeeseeeseeeseeeseenaes 34 4 1 2 Basic countermeasure for restrain interference sesse 35 4 2 Field wiring and earth grounding tee ees ee eke EER ee eke EER ee ee ees ee 36 4 3 Leak current and countermeasure sesse ses see skede se EE See EE Seg 36 4 4 Installation demand for electromagnetic on off electronic device 37 4 5 Noise filter installation instructions sesse eee Es ee see eee Ee EE ees ees 37 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter tree sere settee Ee EE eee ee 38 EE OE EE EE EE teases 38 5 1 1 Running order channels tse tee Ee eke EER EE ER EER EE ER ER Ke ee 38 5 1 2 Frequency provision channel tees ee eke eek ee eke EER EE ER ees ee 38 5 1 3 Work state see sesese see ees ee ee Ee RE EER nen GR EA AE DRR AE DRR AE ee 39 5 1 4 Run mode sesse sesse se EER eee EER ene GE Ee RE RA sen ERA RE Ee ee 40 5 2 Operation and use of key board s 1 sstesseeeseseseessesesseneeeeneees 42 5 2 1 Keypad layouteren rer ere EER ee eke EER ee ees ee 42
273. selection F20 05 Virtual output VDO1 function 0 60 1 0 selection F20 06 Virtual output VDO2 function 0 60 1 0 selection F20 07 Virtual output VDO3 function 0 60 1 0 selection F20 08 Virtual output VDO4 function 0 60 1 0 selection F20 09 Virtual output VDOS function 0 60 1 0 selection F20 10 Virtual output VDOI 0 00 600 00s 0 01s 0 00s open delay time F20 11 Virtual output VDO2 0 00 600 00s 0 01s 0 00s open delay time F20 12 Virtual output VDO3 0 00 600 00s 0 01s 0 00s open delay time F20 13 Virtual output VDO4 0 00 600 00s 0 01s 0 00s open delay time F20 14 Virtual output VDO4 0 00 600 00s 0 01s 0 00s open delay time F20 15 Virtual output VDO1 0 00 600 00s 0 01s 0 00s close delay time F20 16 Virtual output VDO2 0 00 600 00s 0 01s 0 00s close delay time F20 17 Virtual output VDO3 0 00 600 00s 0 01s 0 00s close delay time F20 18 Virtual output VDO4 0 00 600 00s 0 01s 0 00s close delay time F20 19 Virtual output VDOS 0 00 600 00s 0 01s 0 00s close delay time F20 20 Virtual input VDI enable 00 FF 1 00 control F20 21 Virtual input VDI status 00 FF 1 00 digital setup F20 22 Virtual input output 00 FF 1 00 connection Bit0 VDI1 and VDO1 connection O positive logic negative logic Bit VDI2 and V O positive logic negative logic Bit3 VDI3 and V O positive logic negative logic Bit4 VDI4 and V O positive logic negative logic Bit4 VDIS5 and V O positive logic negative
274. selection table ES closed Multi step closed Multi step closed loop Multi step closed loop oop setting loop setting setting EE EE OR selection terminal 3 selection terminal 2 selection terminal 1 8 Closed loop setting decided OFF OFF OFF by FILOI OFF OFF ON Multi step closed loop setting OFF ON OFF Multi step closed loop 141 7 Detailed function specification setting 2 OFF ON ON Multi step closed loop setting 3 ON OFF OFF Multi step closed loop setting 4 ON OFF ON Multi step closed loop setting 5 ON ON OFF Multi step closed loop setting 6 ON ON ON Multi step closed loop setting 7 22 External equipment failure jump in with this terminal peripheral equipment fault signal can be input which is convenient for inverter to perform fault monitoring for peripheral equipment as shown in Fig 7 15 23 External interruption input When the inverter is running after receiving external interruption signal it blocks output and runs with zero frequency Once external interruption signal is released and inverter running command is still valid inverter auto revolving speed tracking starts the inverter restarts 24 External resetting input When fault alarm occurs to the inverter you can reset fault by this terminal Its function and operation keypad g SET key function are in accordance 25 Free stop input The purpose of this function and free stop set in F02
275. served 25 Completion of simple PLC operation 56 Reserved 26 Simple PLC cycle running completed 57 Reserved 27 Simple PLC suspended 58 Reserved 28 Upper and lower limit of Wobble 59 Reserved 29 Setup length arrived 60 Reserved 30 Internal counter final value arrived 7 The instructions of the function output terminals listed in table 7 10 are as below 0 The terminal function is idle 1 Frequency inverter is running RUN The Drive is in the running state output the indicator signal 2 Frequency inverter is forward running The Drive is in the forward running state output the indicator signal 3 Frequency inverter is reversed running The Drive is in reversed running state output the indicator signal 4 Frequency inverter is DC braking The Drive is in DC braking state output the indicator signal 5 Frequency inverter is ready to run This signal being valid means that the Drive bus voltage is normal the Drive is running and forbidding the terminal is invalid it can accept a start command 6 Shutdown command indicator When the shutdown command is valid output the indictor signal 7 Zero current is detected When detected the output meet the zero current state output the indicator signal Please refer to the instruction of F09 12and F09 13parameters for details 8 Over current is detected When the output current meet the over current detection conditions output the indicator signal Please
276. set When setting filter time Please be noted that when the Max pulse width set in FO7 13 is smaller the filter time is not suggested to be set too long otherwise the response time of output frequency will be very slow Pulse width gain is for impulse width duty cycle of current impulse width input terminal 0 Positive logic 1 Negative logic F07 12 defines valid level of digital quantity input X8 channel input pulse when frequency channel selection terminal pulse width is set The applications shall go with double polarity working state of X input terminal FO7 13 parameter defines the width range of input valid pulse when frequency setting channel selection terminal pulse width is set F07 14 Reserved F07 15 Reserved F07 16 Reserved F07 17 Reserved 134 7 Detailed function specification 7 9 On off input function parameter group F08 F08 00 Input terminal positive and Range 0000 FFFF 0000 negative logic setting thousands hundreds tens units BITO X1 positive and negative logic definition BIT1 X2 positive and negative logic definition BIT2 X3 positive and negative logic definition BIT3 X4 positive and negative logic definition BIT X5 positive and negative logic definition BIT1 X6 positive and negative logic definition BIT2 X7 positive and negative logic definition BIT3 X8 positive and negative logic definition BITO E
277. ss when running Relationship among carrier freq motor noise and leak current is as follows When carrier freq goes up 1 the motor noise is reduced leakage current of the motor is increased 1 and the interference is increased 1 When carrier freq goes down the motor noise is increased 1 leakage current of the motor is decreased and the interference is decreased When the ambient temperature is high and the motor load is heavy reduce the carrier freq properly to reduce thermal loss to the inverter Table7 1 model and Carrier freq relationship Model Max Carrier freq Factory Default 0 4KW 1 S5KW 16KHz 6KHz 2 2KW 11KW 16KHz 5KHz 15KW 55KW 8KHz 4KHz 75 200KW 6KHz 2KHz 220KW above 4KHz 2KHz 1 To get better control characteristic it is suggested that the ratio of max running frequency between carrier frequency and inverter p be not smaller than 36 Note 2 Error exists in current displayed value when carrier frequency is small 118 7 Detailed function specification Range units digit 0 1 tens digit 0 1 hundreds digit 0 1 thousands digit 0 1 Units digit Carrier freq is adjusted automatically according to temperature 0 Banned 1 Allowed Carrier frequency changes based on temperature which refers to inverter check F04 10 PWM optimized adjustment 0110 that the radiator temperature is relatively high it automatically
278. st 3 Clean up the oil stain of cooling fan V Check the air duct and regularly clean N Check whether the screws is loose N Check whether the inverter is corrode Whether inverter installation environment changes Whether the inverter cooling fan is working properly Whether the inverter is overheating When running whether voice of motor abnormal change lt a Pa EP EP ae a Whether occur abnormal vibration when motor running V Check wiring terminals have arc trace N The main circuit insulation test Recommend to inspect with following instrument Input voltage electric voltmeter output voltage rectifying voltmeter input output current pincers ammeter 9 2 Inspection and replacement of damageable parts Some component parts in the inverter will be abraded or bear descending performance for long term usage to assure that the inverter can run stably and reliably it is recommended to perform defending maintenance and replace corresponding parts if necessary 222 9 Maintenance 1 Cooling fan Abnormal noise even oscillation may take place if the fan have wearing bearing aging blade here replacement of the fan should be considered 2 Filter electrolyte capacitance When frequent changing load causes increasing pulsant current and aging electrolyte under high ambient temperature the electrolyte capacitance may be damaged and here should replace it 9 3 Rep
279. stallation claw with hook on the top of inverter press down heavily till cover bayonet enter into the holes of two side completely show as Fig 3 4 3 2 2 2 Metal cover disassembly and installation 1 Disassembly First take off 2 screws at the side of the cover and move it a bit outward horizontally then tilt it at 15 degree and draw it outward at the direction shown in right figure now you can take the cover off 2 Assembly N 2 First put down the cover in parallel with unit body 5 amp and make it just locked at two sides of the inverter NY secondly force it ahead and make fixing part on its top inserted into fixing slot of unit body at last screw the cover and finish assembly for the cover Fig 3 5 metal cover disassemble As shown in Fig 3 5 and assembly 3 3 Wiring notice points DAssure power be cut off completely for above 10 minutes before wiring otherwise there is danger of getting electric shock 2 Forbid connecting power wire to output U V W of the inverter 3 If there is current leakage inside inverter inverter and motor must be earth grounding for safety assurance please refer to clause 8 in Chapter 3 4 1 for grounding wiring 4 Before shipment compression resistance test of the inverter is Passed so users should not conduct compression resistance test again 5 Do not add absorbing capacitor or other resistance capacitor absorbing device between inverter and motor also do not add elect
280. state ay ease Baud rate set improperly set Baud rate properly Serial port communication Press STOP RESET key to reset error look for service Ere ee parameter vi odity F05 04 F05 05 218 8 Troubleshooting Upper device doesn t work Check if upper device work and wiring is correct E 27 Reserved E 28 Reserved E 29 Reserved E 30 EPROM read Mistake take place when Reset by pressing STOP RESET A 30 and write read or write control Look for service from manufacturer 3 wrongly parameter or agent Look for service from manufacturer Temperature Temperature sensor fault Gradent E 31 detecting i disconnection The temperature detection Look for service from manufacturer circuit anomaly or agent Parameter setting not 1 di ding to the motor set parameter correctly according SS late to the motor nameplate E 32 Self tuning failure 7 reer TR tuning y Select inverter match the motor Motor wiring error Check the motor three phase wiring E 33 Pawar board anomal Look for service from manufacturer A 33 Contactor anomaly y or agent Contactor anomaly Replace contactor E 34 The factory fault 1 Debugging use in factory E 35 The factory fault 2 Debugging use in factory Improve the inverter heat Poor cooling environment dissipati i The bus am issipation environment E 36 i The inverter capacity is too lect i h A 36 capacitor small Se
281. ster number read illegal 6 A 8 Data frames examples A 8 1 RTU Mode 1 Start 1 inverter running g gt 2 EerlSer g Sle le 3 EE ee0 Ba SY SE 29 EQ 5 g s ggZlsgz gE eo g g Z n e oO a e a host command 01 06 IE 00 00 05 AF El frames Slave respond 01 06 1E 00 00 05 4F El frames CRC High bit EO EO CRC Low bit OF OF Data Low byte 06 06 Data High byte 00 00 Register address Low byte 00 00 Register address High byte 1E 1E Order code 06 06 Slave Inverter Address 01 01 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol 2 Stop 1 inverter running Data Field host command frames Slave respond frames 3 Set 1 inverter given value to 25Hz the upper limitation frequency is 50Hz CRC CRC N t high bit a high bit a 9 CRC cn cn CRC en a low bit A A low bit a 5 Data low oo oo Data low byte ad byte ie 2 Data cn cn Data o 5 High byte a High byte 2 Register Register o address 3 3 address 3a JED Low byte Low byt y ow byte 3 g 9 Register Register a F address a 5 address B IER High byte High byte DZ op Order Ne Rey Order cn cn code S S code 2 5 E Slave Hy Slave Inverter 3 3 Inverter 3 3 Address 2 Address amp je m ise Sal 9 mn SE s
282. t 485 Twisted pair cable AI2 A V LOV 10V Voltage input oH 485Communication port Fig 3 9 basic wiring diagram Note When connect to external DC reactor it need to remove the short circuit copper bar between Pand 3 6 Control loop collocation and wiring 3 6 1 Relative location and function for control board terminal and slide switch Control board terminal and slide switch location show as Fig 3 10 The terminal CN1 and CN7 are used by the manufacturers CN2 is extended 25 3 Installation and wiring interface CNS is for keypad The CN3 CN4 and CN6 for users can be seen in table 3 4 The setting description and function of slide switch check table3 5 Please read the following descriptions carefully before using inverter Fig 3 10 sketch map of CPU board Table 3 4 function description of terminal provided for user No Function Description Exe Input and output controll To use when inverter run under external terminal control of external terminal refer to 3 6 2 TA TC is normal open contact TB TC is normal closed CN4 Signal output of relay contents ER 26 3 Installation and wiring CrystalRS485communicat To use when inverter through 485 communication can N6 ion interface achieve cascade connection and other control refer to 3 6 2 Table 3 5 Slide switch function description for users No Function Setting Default value m V F00 20 be
283. t Range Min Unit Factory Default Modifi cation FO1 00 Main freguency input channel selection 0 Operation keyboard digital setup 1 AIl analog setup 2 AI2 analog setup 3 Terminal UP DOWN adjusting setup 4 Communication provide 5 EAII analog setup 6 EAI2 analog setup 7 High speed pulse setup X8 terminal need choose the suitable function 8 Terminal pulse setup X8 terminal need choose the suitable function 9 Terminal encoder setup X1 X2 connect the encoder punctuation input 10 14 Reserved 0 o F01 01 Main frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 50 00Hz 54 6 Function parameter schedule graph digital setup FO1 02 Main frequency Only when parameter F01 00 0 3 4 valid 1 00 o digital control Units digit power down reserve setup 0 Main frequency power down reserve 1 Main frequency power down no reserve Tens digit halt reserve setup 0 Halt main frequency hold 1 Halt main frequency recovery F01 01 FO1 03 Auxiliary 0 Operation keyboard digital setup 1 20 o frequency input 1 AIl analog setup channel select 2 AI2 analog setup 3 Terminal UP DOWN adjusting setup 4 Communication provide 5 EAI1 analog setup 6 EAI2 analog setup 7 High speed pulse setup X8 terminal need choose the suitable function 8 Terminal pulse setup X8 terminal need choose the suitable function 9 Terminal encoder setup X1 X2 connect the encoder pu
284. t first that the use speed range of motor bearings and mechanical devices also the increasing of motor vibration and noise should be considered when motor run over rated frequency 5 It is necessary to select the suitable brake assembly for hoisting device and big inertia load to make sure the normal work when inverter stripping from power grid for the overcurrent or overvoltage failure 6 Inverter start and stop control through terminal or other normal command channel otherwise it may cause inverter damage via connecting inverter input terminal to big current switch just like contactor direct to start and stop inverter frequently 7 It is necessary to make sure inverter cut off from operation without output when inverter and motor connect through switch components just like contactor etc Otherwise it will cause inverter damage 8 When inverter output frequency within some range it may meet mechanical resonance point of load device through setting jump frequency to avoid it 9 Checking power supply voltage within allowed working range before usage otherwise it need to change voltage or custom special voltage inverter 1 Safety information and use notice points 10 When inverter usage site altitude over1000 meters inverter should derate current to use output current decrease about 10 of rated current per 1000 meters increase 11 Motor should do insulation check before first usage or reusage after lay aside for long time
285. t is reverse running the inverter stops when triggering SB1 once EN500 EN600 m SBi_ _d ewp mal SB2 REV COM Fig 7 18 Two wire control mode 3 3 Three wire control mode 1 EN500 EN600 Defines are as follows a SB2 7 EWD SB1 stop button SBI TT N Xi SB2 forward button Fi SB3 reverse button SB3 gt REV gt COM Fig 7 19 Three wire operating mode 1 Xi is X Xg s Multi functional Input terminal at this moment define its 147 7 Detailed function specification corresponding terminal function as Three wire running control function of No 30 4 Three wire control mode 2 SB1 stop button EN EN500 EN600 SB2 run button SB2 FWD KO Running direction SBL selection mm 0 Forward K2 od REV 1 Reverse gt COM Fig 7 20 Three wire operating mode 2 Xi is X Xg s Multi functional input terminal At this moment define its corresponding terminal function as Three wire running control function of No 30 F08 27 Set internal count value to setting Range 0 65535 0 F08 28 Specify internal count to setting Range 0 65535 0 F08 27 and F08 28 are to additionally define functions of 30 and 31 in 7 10 When Xi Counting trigger signal input function terminal output pulse reaches F08 27 defined value Y1 Y1 is set as internal count value final value to outputs one indicating signal as
286. tart rotating motor Set speed checking restart function E 01 accelerating i process Low power source voltage Check input power supply Too small powerof flig Choose inverter with high power inverter Output phase lose under Check whether the motor wiring is vector control in good condition oe time 1s too Prolong decelerating time Overcurrent during Have potential energy load Increase braking Powe of external energy consumption braking E 02 decelerating or big Inertia load subassembly process Power of inverter is a bit Choose inverter with high power small Load change suddenly or Check or reduce saltation of the have unwonted phenomena load Overcurrent during P time is set to too Prolong eee decelerating E 03 constant speed Pe Propely process low power source voltage Check input power supply POWER OL EES iS Dit Choose inverter with high power small E 04 Overvoltage Unwonted input voltage Check input power suppl during accelerating p g PRE PEY process Acc time is set to too short Prolong accelerating time properly 215 8 Troubleshooting Restart rotating motor Set speed checking restart function Decelerating time is too a de Overvoltage during short Prolong decelerating time E 05 decelerating H f Increase braking power of external ave potential energy load 5 5 process SST energy consumption braking or big inertia load su
287. tection value limit frequency Frequency 1 arriving Range 0 00Hz upper Beet detection width limit frequency OOH F09 22 Frequency 2 arriving Range 0 00Hz upper 50 00Hz detection value limit frequency Frequency 2 arriving Range 0 00Hz upper AE detection width limit frequency OOH When the output frequency of frequency inverter reaches detecting value of the positive and negative detecting width range then the output of multifunctional Yi is indication signal EN500 EN600 provides two sets of frequency arrival detecting parameters which have set frequency value and frequency detecting width respectively Table 7 29 156 7 Detailed function specification is the diagram of this function Operating freq Frequency I arriving detection width Frequency I arriving detection width Frequency I arriving detection value a Time Frequency I arriving ON ON induction signal OFF OFF OFF Fig 7 29 Frequency arriving detection diagram F09 24 Positive and negative logic setting of output terminal This parameter defines the output logic of the standard output terminal Yi relay RLY and expand output terminal EYi relays ERIY1 ERLY2 0 positive logic output terminal and the common terminal close to the valid state disconnect invalid state Range 0000 FFFF 0000 1 reverse logic output terminal and the common terminal close to the invalid state disconnect valid state thousands hundreds The tens the units
288. tep frequency 4 OFF ON OFF ON Multi step frequency 5 OFF ON ON OFF Multi step frequency 6 OFF ON ON ON Multi step frequency 7 ON OFF OFF OFF Multi step frequency 8 ON OFF OFF ON Multi step frequency 9 ON OFF ON OFF Multi step frequency 10 ON OFF ON ON Multi step frequency 11 ON ON OFF OFF Multi step frequency 12 ON ON OFF ON Multi step frequency 13 139 7 Detailed function specification ON ON ON OFF Multi step frequency 14 ON ON ON ON Multi step frequency 15 When using multi step speed to run and simple PLC to run use multi step speed frequency F10 31 F10 45 above take multi step speed running as an example Define control terminal X1 X2 X3 X4 When F08 18 5 F08 19 6 F08 20 7 F08 21 8 X1 X2 X3 X4 are used to define multi step speed running as shown in Fig 7 14 Fig 7 14 takes terminal running command channel as an example X5 is set as forward terminal X6 is reverse terminal to control by forward and reverse running 3 phase rai U KM 3 phase Vo AC 3 S wi i Power T H H x1 EN500 EN600 oe Xl K2 e X2 ka 0X3 K5 ze X4 X5e MY COM yee KS COM o Fig 7 14 Multi step speed running wiring Fig 7 15 Peripheral equipment fault Normally Open 9 12 Acceleration deceleration time terminal selection By ON OFF of acceleration deceleration time terminal acceleration deceleration time 1 15 can be selected For details see Table 7 5
289. ter status or revises inverter any parameter the hundreds of F05 02 would not influence the slave response F05 03 Local address Range 0 247 1 During serial port communication this function code is used to identify inverter s address Under free protocol communication 00 is set and the inverter is master station can be the Master slave communication Under Modbus communication 00 is broadcast address When setting broadcast address it can only receive and execute upper computer broadcast command 124 7 Detailed function specification while cannot respond to upper computer F05 04 Communication overtime checkout time Range 0 0 1000 0s 0 0s When serial port communication fails and its continuous time exceed set value of this function code the inverter judges it as communication failure The inverter would not detect serial port communication signal namely this function ineffective when set value is 0 ROS Osteo a Range 0 0 1000 0s 0 0s error checkout time When serial port communication fails and its continuous time exceed set value of this function code the inverter judges it as communication failure The inverter would not detect serial port communication signal namely this function ineffective when set value is 0 Range 0 200ms Modbus is valid ams F05 06 Local response delay time Local response delay time represe
290. ter parameter values from the address 0000H of inverter whose address is 01 the contents of host command Appendix A Modbus communication protocol ADR 01H CMD 03H Parameters initial address high byte 00H Parameters initial address low byte 00H Number of parameter high byte 00H Number of parameter low byte 02H CRC check value low byte C4 CRC check value high byte OB The contents of slave reply ADR 01H CMD 03H Parameter value bytes 04H Address 0000H content high byte 00H Address 0000H content low byte 00H Address 0001H content high byte 00H Address 0001H content low byte 03H CRC check value low byte BA CRC check value high byte F2 A 5 3 Host write slave parameter Command code 06H Host can write an parameter by initiating a communication transaction E g The decimal system 5000 1388H written to the inverter 0101H address whose slave address is 02 host command including ADR 02H CMD 06H Parameter address high byte 01H Parameter address low byte 01H Parameter value high byte 13H Parameter value low byte 88H CRC check value low byte D4 CRC check value high byte 93 The contents of slave reply ADR 02H CMD 06H Parameter address high byte 01H Parameter address low byte 01H Address 0101H content high byte 13H Address 0101H content low byte 88H CRC check value low byte D4 CRC check va
291. terminal pulse width provision X8 terminal need select the corresponding function 9 terminal encoder provision X1 X2 terminal connect to the encoder orthogonal input 38 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter 10 14 Reserved Assist frequency provision 0 keypad analog potentiometer provision 1 AT1 analog setting 2 AI2 analog setting 3 terminal UP DOWN adjustment provision 4 communication provision Modbus and external bus share a main frequency memory 5 EAI analog setting extend effective 6 EAI2 analog setting extend effective 7 high speed pulse provision X8 terminal need select the corresponding function 8 terminal pulse width provision X8 terminal need select the corresponding function 9 terminal encoder provision X1 X2 terminal connect to the encoder orthogonal input 10 20 Reserved 5 1 3 Work state Work state of EN500 EN600 includes of Waiting state Running state and Parameter setting state Waiting state If there is no running command after the inverter electrified or after stop command during running state the inverter enters into waiting state Running state The inverter enters into running state after receiving run command Parameter setting state After receiving the parameter identification command enter the parameter setting state after turning into the shutdown state 39 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter 5 1 4 Run mode EN500 EN600 inverter h
292. terval time at continuously jog When jog command invalid the time restart jog command is short than jog interval time jog command ignore here F1 28 F1 29 defines jog run acceleration and deceleration time fixed unit is 1s 107 7 Detailed function specification 7 3 Start stop forward reverse brake function parameter group F02 F02 00 Start running mode Range 0 2 0 0 Start from starting frequency After receiving start command by setting F02 01 delay time the inverter starts after setting F02 02 starting frequency and F02 03 starting frequency duration 1 First brake and then start from starting frequency First brake the current from DC and then from time F02 04 F02 05 and then start after setting starting frequency and starting frequency duration set by F02 03 2 Speed tracking start This mode can be supported by the entire motor control model at the present 1 Start up mode 0 It is suggested to use Start up mode 0 for general purpose applications and for general drive synchronous motor 2 Start up mode 1 Suitable for small inertia load for example forward and reverse occurs when the motor is not driven 3 Start up mode 2 Suitable for the starting of large inertia load ES before stopping stably Generally this mode is used when restarting Not after power failure fault self recovery and other functions The ote following points need to be noticed when this Start up mode is used
293. the main setting frequency Terminal function setup into 16 frequency increase progressively UP or 17 frequency decrease progressively control DOWN 4 Communication provide Main frequency provide by selection communication mode 5 EAI1 analog setup When extension analog input EAII is valid main frequency confirmed by EAI analog voltage current input range 10 10V EAI1 jumper wire selection V side or 4 20mA EAI1 jumper wire selection Aside Relevant extension card selection needed to use this setup function 6 EAI2 analog setup when extension analog input EAD valid main frequency setup by EAI2 analog voltage current input range 10 10V EAI2 jumper wire selection V side or 4 20mA EAI2 jumper wire selection A side Relevant extension card selection needed to use this setup function 7 High speed pulse setup main frequency setup by frequency signal of terminal pulse only X8 input input pulse specification voltage range 15 30V frequency range 0 00 50 00KHz 8 Terminal pulse setup main frequency setup by pulse width signal of terminal pulse only X8 input input pulse specification voltage range 15 30V pulse width range 0 1 999 9ms 9 Terminal encoder setup main frequency setup by terminal encoder pulse only combination input by X1 and X2 and frequency velocity set by parameter F08 30 99 7 Detailed function specification 10 14 Reserved Analog provide is positive and negative polarity control its prior to command dir
294. the frequency value not only in Monitor Mode when choose frequency digital reference channel F18 15 V F vibration restrain end Range 0 00Hz upper SOLE 50 00Hz frequency limit frequency In V F Control mode when the output frequency of inverter is bigger than the limit frequency the suppression of F03 12 will be disabled Adjusting F18 15 can restrain the shake phenomenon of motor in a large range F18 16 Torque closed loop control Range 0 1 when selection F00 24 1 or 2 When F18 16 0 torque open loop control is available When F18 16 1 torque close loop control is available which can increase the precision of torque control F18 17 Reserved F18 24 194 7 Detailed function specification 7 20 Protective Relevant Function Parameters Group F19 Range 0 0 20 0s 0 indicates disabled this 0 0s function Power off restart waiting F19 00 time When the power is off then power on whether this inverter will start automatically after a waiting time When F19 00 0 0s after the power off then power on inverter will not start automatic F19 0070 0s after the power off then power on again if all is ready inverter will run automatically with the start method defined by F02 00 after waiting the time defined by F19 00 Conditions for repower on after power off it should be in the running status before power off there
295. time 1 1 60000 deceleration time is the interval decelerate Base on from upper limit frequency to zero frequency 1 motor type FO1 19 Acc Dece time unit JO 0 01s 1 1 1 0 1s 2 Is F01 20 Acc Dece mode 0 Line acc Dece mode 0 selection S curve acc Dece mode F01 21 S curve 0 0 50 0 Acceleration deceleration time 0 1 20 0 acceleration S curve deceleration start time S curve deceleration initiation segment raise time lt 90 time FO1 22 S curve 0 0 70 0 Acceleration deceleration time 0 1 60 0 acceleration up S curve acceleration start time S curve acceleration segment time raise time lt 90 FO1 23 S curve 0 0 50 0 Acceleration deceleration time 0 1 20 0 deceleration S curve acceleration start time S curve acceleration initiation segment raise time lt 90 time FO1 24 S curve 0 0 70 0 Acceleration deceleration time 0 1 60 0 deceleration up S curve acceleration start time S curve acceleration segment time raise time lt 90 FO1 25 Keyboard jog run 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 5 00Hz 56 6 Function parameter schedule graph frequency FO1 26 Terminal jog run 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 01Hz 5 00Hz o frequency FO1 27 Jog interval time 0 0 100 0s 0 1s 0 0s o F01 28 Jog acceleration 0 1 6000 0s 0 1s 20 0s time FO1 29 Jog deceleration 0
296. time value 0 1s Run command setup channel 0 keyboard 1 terminal 2 communication Main frequency provide channel Auxiliary frequency provide channel Rated current 0 1A Rated voltage 1V Rated power 0 1KW 50 Reserved The frequency after deceleration 0 01Hz Motor rotator frequency 0 01Hz the frequency estimate on the open loop actual measurement for close loop 53 54 55 56 Present provide torque relative to rated torque it has direction Present output torque relative to rated torque it has direction Present torque current 0 1A The present flux current 0 1A 57 65 Reserved C 00 display parameter F00 07 Range 0 65 2 selection when stop 00 08 CU display parameter pages 0 65 6 selection when stop 00 09 02 display parameter p nse 0 65 48 selection when stop F00 10 0 display parameter p nse 0 65 14 selection when stop mo C 04 display parameter Range 0 65 20 selection when stop F00 12 C 05 display parameter Range 0 65 9 selection when stop The above parameter display when inverter stop by C 00 C 05 parameter group pressing 92 gt gt to switch between these parameters Pressing TE and then 7 Detailed function specification return to C 00 parameter monitor For example pressing gt parameter switch from C 00 to C 01 continuous pressing the same button parameter switch from C 01 to C 02
297. tion Program Exit i Enter into or exit programming state ey Shift Supervisi Can choose modification digit of set data under editor state on key can switch display status supervision parameter under other state Function Dat VRYE vee Enter into or exit programming state key Under keypad mode to press this key can set reverse run or Jog run i Rev Jog key A T st ps g ig 5 N according to the 1 bit of parameter FOO 15 Run key Enter into forward run under keypad mode 42 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter Stop reset key In common run status the inverter will be stopped according to set mode after pressing this key if run command channel is set as keypad stop effective mode The inverter will be reset and resume normal stop status after pressing this key when the inverter is in malfunction status Multi function The specific function keys decided by tens digit of FOO 15 see F00 15 key parameter descriptions Increasing To increase data or function code to press it continuously can button improve increasing speed Decreasing To decrease data or function code to press it continuously can button improve decreasing speed 5 2 3 LED and indicator light 4 status indicator light they are MOD mode ALM alarm FWD forward run REV reverse run from left to right on the LED their respective indicating meaning is as shown in table 5 2 Table
298. tion value F09 14 d I I I I I l I l l l I I I I I I I I l EE l Time Output over current induction signal on Time eg Output over current detection time FO9 15 Fig 7 27 Output over current detection diagram 155 7 Detailed function specification When the output current of the inverter is greater than the over current detection points and lasted longer than the over current detection time frequency inverter multifunction Yi output indication signal Figure 7 27 is the schematic of output over current detection ROG 1 envi the Range 0 0 250 0 100 0 detection value F09 17 Current 1 width Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 ROSSI nia ED ane Range 0 0 250 0 100 0 detection value F09 19 Current 2 width Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 When the output current of frequency inverter is within the positive and negative detection width of setting current arrival then the output of frequency inverter multifunction Yi is indication signal EN500 EN600 provides two current arrival and detection width parameters table 7 28 is the function schematic diagram Output current A Current I arriving Current I arriving detection width detection value Current I arriving detection width Time Current I arriving ON ON ON induction signal OFF OFF OFF Fig 7 28 Current arriving detection diagram F09 20 Frequency 1 arriving Range 0 00Hz upper 50 00Hz de
299. tion Specifications in Chapter 5 252 Appendix C Keyboard C 3 4 Operating Spec of LCD Display Keyboard 1 Initialization status of LCD keyboard when power on 32 When the keyboard is power on Key Board is displayed in the form of animation Keyboard Fig C 3 Initialization Display when Power On 2 Operation of switching to firstly menu Fig C 4 F00 System Parameter Group F00 System Parameter Group F01 Basic Running Group F01 Basic Running Group F02 Start Stop Brake Group F02 Start Stop Brake Group F03 V F Control Group F03 V F Control Group FOO System Parameter Group F26 Fault Record Group FO1 Basic Running Group F02 Start Stop Brake Group F03 V F Control Group FOO System Parameter Group FOO System Parameter Group FO1 Basic Running Group v F01 Basic Running Group F02 Start Stop Brake Group F02 Start Stop Brake Group F03 V F Control Group F03 V F Control Group Fig C 4 Power on initialized display 253 Appendix C Keyboard When set F00 00 2 Senior Menu parameters FOO F27 can be displayed 28 groups in total Operation methods are shown as Fig C 4 3 Display and operation of secondary menu When you are in the Firstly Menu choose a parameter group then press ENTER DATA key and you will enter into the Secondary Menu Take Parameter F00 00 for example FOO System Parameter Group W Parameter Group Display FO1 Basic Running Group F0000 2 F02 Start Stop Brake Group 2
300. tting will lost inverter will run base on F19 31 Units place set PID loss detection show on fig 7 48 F19 27 Feedback lost detection value Range 0 100 12 F19 28 Feedback lost detection time Range 0 0 20 0s 0 5s When the feedback value of PID is lower than F19 27 definite setting the input as base and the constant time is over than the time that F19 28 definition detected then PID setting will lost Inverter will run base on F19 31 Tens place set PID loss detection show on fig 7 48 Fig Poemon megi Range 0 100 50 abnormal detection value F930 Poe En Range 0 0 20 0s 0 5s abnormal detection time When the Error amount of PID is higher than F19 29 definite setting the input as base and the constant time is over than the time that F19 30 definition detected then PID setting will lost inverter will run base on F19 31 hundred s place set PID loss detection show on fig 7 48 201 7 Detailed function specification Close loop value setting feedback error value The detection value Less than detection time No detection more than detection time _ a No alarm when detection Failure alarm when detection Time Fig 7 48 Closed loop detection timing diagram ao ED Range units digit 0 3 F19 31 P tens digit 03 000 hundreds digit 0 3 This parameter definite the Internal PID controls the action selection of the setting
301. tures of input analog signal Curve will not change output positive negative polarity 4 As frequency setting 100 0 setting corresponding physical quantity is upper limit frequency F01 11 Range units digit 0 1 tens digit 0 1 hundreds digit 0 1 11111 thousands digit 0 1 ten thousands digit 0 1 Curve lower than min input corresponding selection F06 21 Units digit curve 1 setting 0 Corresponds to min setting corresponding physical quantity 1 0 0 of the corresponding physical quantity Tens digit curve 2 setting Same as units digit Hundreds digit curve 3 setting Same as units digit Thousands digit extended curve 1 Same as units digit Ten thousands digit extended curve 2 Same as units digit This parameter is used to set when curve s corresponding analog quantity input voltage is smaller than the min setting how to decide corresponding setting analog quantity For example F06 21 units 0 when analog quantity input is lower than F06 01 this curve output F06 02 corresponding physical quantity value If FO6 21 units 1 when analog quantity input is lower than F06 01 this curve output is 0 Take 0 10V AII for setting frequency as an example AI1 selects curve 1 setting frequency and AI relationship as shown in Fig 7 11 130 Freq A 50 00Hz 45 00Hz 30 00Hz 2 50Hz 7 Detailed function specification i gt All 2V 5V 7 5V 10V F06 01 20 0 F06 0
302. uency of the positive torque or negative torque are confirmed by F14 18 and F14 19 F14 20 Acc and Dec time of Range 0 000 60 000s Valid torque provision when F00 24 1 or 2 0 100s The torque provision from the provision channel will form the final torque provision after the Acc and Dec time of F14 20 Suitable value of F14 20 can avoid vibration of the motor which caused by saltation of torque provision Range 0 0 100 0 Valid 0 when F00 24 1 or 2 0 0 F14 21 Torque compensation Tens digit of F14 14 and F14 21 define the characteristic and value of torque compensation When Large torque losing which caused by mechanical losing of motor Setting torque compensation is needed 100 of F14 21 corresponds to the rated torque current of motor Positive torque gain Range 50 0 150 0 Valid z kite regulation coefficient when F00 24 1 or 2 M Negative torque gain Range 50 0 150 0 Valid 7 EM regulation coefficient when F00 24 1 or 2 Os When choosing positive torgue provision adjusting F14 22 will correct the matching of the actual output torque and the torque provision if they are unmatched When choosing negative torque provision adjusting F14 23 will correct the matching of the actual output torque and the torque provision if they are unmatched Range 0 0 300 0 Valid 0 when F00 24 1 or 2 0 0 F14 24 Flux braking coefficient Under open
303. unction is enabled Setting F18 14 as 1 can adjust pressure reference by press V otherwise the are invalid for adjusting reference in monitoring mode v keys F11 07 Proportion Gain Kp Range 0 000 9 999 0 100 F11 08 Integral Gain Ki Range 0 000 9 999 0 100 F11 09 Differential Gain Kd Range 0 000 9 999 0 000 170 7 Detailed function specification F11 10 Sampling cycle T Range 0 01 1 00s 0 10s The bigger of the proportion gain of Kp the faster the response but oscillation may easily occur If only proportion gain Kp is used in regulation the offset cannot be eliminated completely To eliminate the offset please use the integral gain Ki to form a PI control system The bigger Ki is the faster the response but oscillation may easily occur if Ki is big enough The sampling cycle T refers to the sampling cycle of feedback value The PI D regulator calculates once in each sampling cycle The bigger the sampling cycle is the slower the response F11 11 Deviation limit Range 0 0 20 0 2 0 If defines the max Deviation of the output from the reference as shown in Fig 7 39 the PID adjuster stops operation when the feedback value within this range Setting this parameter correctly will improve the moderation of the accuracy and stability of the system 4 Feedback y Reference Offset limit Time m Output Frda Time m
304. urve 3 inflexion 1 Range curve 3 min setting 30 0 setting curve 3 inflexion 2 setting Corresponding physical F06 16 quantity of curve 3 Range 0 0 100 0 30 0 inflexion 1 setting F06 17 Curve 3 inflexion 2 Range curve 3 inflexion 1 60 0 setting setting curve 3 Max setting Corresponding physical F06 18 quantity of curve 3 Range 0 0 100 0 60 0 inflexion 2 setting F06 19 Curve 3 Max setting nT Rd 100 0 Corresponding physical F06 20 quantity of curve 3 Range 0 0 100 0 100 0 Max setting Take curve 1 as an example Parameter F06 01 F06 06 is used to set analog quantity input voltage and its representative set value relationship When analog quantity input voltage is greater than the set Max input F06 05 analog quantity voltage is calculated based on Max input similarly When analog input voltage is smaller than the set min input F06 01 Set based on curve lower than min input setting selection F06 21 calculated by min input or 0 0 129 7 Detailed function specification 1 For function and usage of curve 2 please refer to curve 1 instruction 2 Curve 3 function is similar to curve 1 and curve 2 but curve 1 and 2 are three point straight line while curve 3 is four point BE curve which can realize more flexible corresponding relationship N 3 The output positive negative polarity of curve 1 2 3 is decided ote by the fea
305. usage performance of the inverter Please check and select right type according to this chapter before wiring It is necessary to select right type otherwise it may cause motor abnormal run or inverter damage 15 3 Installation and wiring 3 Installation and wiring 3 1 Installation ambient 3 1 1 The demands for installation ambient 1 Installed in drafty indoor place the ambient temperature should be within 10 C 40 C it needs external compulsory heat sink or reduce the volume if temperature is over than 40 C when temperature under 10 C please preheat inverter first 2 Avoid installing in places with direct sunlight much dust floating fiber and metal powder 3 Don t install in place with corrosive explosive gas 4 The humidity should be smaller than 95 RH without condensation water 5 Installed in place of plane fixing vibration smaller than 5 9m s 0 6g 6 Keep away from electromagnetic disturbance source and other electronic apparatus sensible to electromagnetic disturbance 3 1 2 Installation direction and space 1 Normally the inverter should be mounted vertically horizontal mounting will seriously affect heat dissipation and the inverter must be used in lower volume 2 Demand for minimum mounting space and distance please see Fig 3 1 3 When installing multiple inverters up and down leading divider must be applied between them see fig 3 2 I Fan exhaust 200mm above Fan exhaust
306. use inverter inbuilt 24V power supply and NPN source type external controller connection mode 30 3 Installation and wiring gt COM Di ENS500 EN600 GP vd xy ome g Signal wire X1 x ip 3 oe ve k E R ome EA En Fig 3 14 inbuilt 24V source type connection mode 2 To use inverter inbuilt 24V power supply and PNP drain type external controller connection mode 24V EN500 EN600 m COM PW 5 Ma K XI ny Com 7 IM Jo ONUOS pug Fig 3 15 inbuilt 24V drain type connection mode 3 To use external DC 15 30V power supply and NPN source type external controller connection mode remove the short circuit slice between PW and 24V COM EN500 EN600 24V PW EE aN Signal Ed DI z Yz k m S O Fig 3 16 external power supply source type connection mode 31 3 Installation and wiring 4 To use external DC 15 30V power supply and PNP drain type external controller connection mode remove the short circuit slice between PW and 24V 9 24V CoM EN500 EN600 es pu 3 ve aig wa S K XI x x P 3 COM R yt O Fig 3 17 External power supply drain type connection mode 3 6 5 Communication terminal wiring
307. used in load like blower and water pump Note 2 This function is valid only in V F mode 120 7 Detailed function specification F04 14 Acceleration time 2 and 1 Range 0 00Hz upper 0 00Hz switchover frequency limit frequency F04 15 Deceleration time 2 and 1 Range 0 00Hz upper 0 00Hz switchover frequency limit frequency This function is used in the process of the inverter running and we should adopted the acceleration time and deceleration for different applications During the acceleration process if the frequency is lower than F04 14 we choose acceleration time 2 if the running frequency is bigger than F04 14 we choose acceleration time 1 during the deceleration process if the running frequency is bigger than F04 15 then we choose deceleration time 1 if the running frequency is lower than F14 05 then we choose deceleration time 2 When using terminal for choose the deceleration time F04 14 F04 15 function is invalid Note F04 16 Acceleration time 2 Range 1 60000 200 F04 17 Deceleration time 2 Range 1 60000 200 F04 18 Acceleration time 3 Range 1 60000 200 F04 19 Deceleration time 3 Range 1 60000 200 F04 20 Acceleration time 4 Range 1 60000 200 F04 21 Deceleration time 4 Range 1 60000 200 F04 22 Acceleration time 5 Range 1 60000 200 F04 23 Deceleration time 5 Range 1 60000 200 F04 24 Acceleration time 6 Ran
308. ve torque characteristic as shown in Fig 7 7a curve 1 User can choose 1 2 3 V F curve running mode according to load characteristic to reach better energy saving effect when the inverter drives degressive torque load such as blower and water pump etc When F03 00 4 user can set V F curve by setting FO3 04 F03 11 parameter As shown in Fig 7 7b V F curve can be defined freely by setting V1 F1 V2 F2 V3 F3 V4 F4 to meet special load environment Voltage ER EE I EE Output voltage 100 N Rated voltage uses eee seeks f VI pvsssseessscceessessesssssssaneey i Voy i Eii if Freq Hz Output freq FO FIF2 F3 Fb 0 f VO V3 The Ist 4th voltage percentage of multi section V F Rated freq 2 HE eae FO F3 The Ist 4th frequency points of multi section V F Fb Rated frequency Fig 7 7 a V F curve b User setting V F curve 114 7 Detailed function specification F03 01 Torque boost mode Range 0 1 0 0 Manual boost Torque boost voltage is totally decided by parameter F03 02 whose feature is that the boost voltage is fixed but magnetic saturation of the motor is occurs often to the light load Boost voltage F03 02 xmotor rated voltage 100 1 Auto torque boost Torque boost voltage changes when the stator current of the motor changes the greater the stator current is magnetic saturation boost voltage is Inverter output current Boost voltage 03 02 motor rated volt
309. vector control torque control 3 precision 45 rated torque PG vector control PG torque control s T lt 20ms vector control i orque response lt 10ms PG vector control hd z 2 sg Digital setting max frequencyx 0 01 Analog setting max ai Frequency precision frequencyx 0 5 B 5 Analog A 2 setting 0 1 of max frequency Digital Freq od setting 0 01Hz resolution FE precision Exterior 0 1 of max frequency impulse Torque boost Automatic torque boost manual torque boost 0 17 12 0 V F curve volt Frequency characteristic Setting rated frequency at the range of 5 650Hz by choosing constant torque degressive torque 1 degressive torque 2 degressive torque 3 self defined V F total 5 kinds of curve Acceleration Deceleration curve Two modes straight line acceleration and deceleration S curve acceleration and deceleration 15 kinds of acceleration and deceleration time time unit 0 01s 0 1s 1s for option max time for 1000 minutes 13 2 Inverter type and specification EN600 3 phase 1SKW amp under power range with inbuilt brake P unit only add brake resistor between and PB em 18 5KW amp up power range is possible to add brake unit between b i and outside or extra connect brake unit with adding brake brake ie resistor between and PB EN500 series can connect brake unit between and outside DC brak Start stop action for
310. verter 5 When there is a fault of E 16 after power on do not directly run the inverter after reset and need to check whether the input out wiring are reversed 8 Troubleshooting To resume normal running when failure takes place in the inverter you can choose following any kind of operation 1 After you set any terminal of X1 X8 to be inputted by external RESET it will be reset after connected to COM 2 When failure code is displayed press Sk O key after confirmed that it can be restoration 3 Communication reset Please refer to annex description 4 Cut off power supply 8 4 Alarm reset When an alarm occurs must eliminate alarm source which cause alarm otherwise the alarm cannot be eliminated also cannot be reset by reset button 221 9 Maintenance 9 Maintenance 9 1 Routine maintenance When you use this series you must assemble and operate it according to demand listed in this service manual strictly During run state temperature humidity vibration and aging parts will affect it which may cause failure of the inverter To avoid this it is recommended to perform routine inspections and maintenance Table 9 1 Daily inspection and maintenance items Period Inspection item Daily Periodic Daily cleaning 1 Inverter should be maintained in a clean state N 2 Clean up the dust on the surface of inverter prevent the dust into the inverter internal especially metal du
311. xample 4 Jog run operation For example keypad as current run command channel jog run frequency 5Hz waiting status 47 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter LED displayed 0 00 content ooo Tess Release Key press Waiting Keep REN 3 operation order i NE SEES JOG R OG EE Waiting Display Display run Output frequency Output frequency set frequency output frequency Fall down to 0Hz Increased by 5Hz Stop running Fig 5 10 Jog run operating example 5 Operation for entering to function code editing status after setting user password For example User password F27 is set to 12345 Boldfaced digit in Fig 5 11 shows blinking bit LED displayed content 0 00 00000 10000 10000 Key press gt operation order None editing User password At first last ede uoa status effective go into Digit flash Samara forth digit password validation Increase to 1 status 12340 12340 12300 12300 12000 Move to TInerease Move to Increase the unit 4 oi con Move to third to 4 second digit to 3 izas Press confirmation Key pass validation Go into editing status Increase to 5 Fig 5 11 Inputting password to go into function code operation 6 See about failure parameter under failure status If press key under failure status the user can quickly locate to the F26 group function cod
312. y operational rule terminal is prior to function code F01 06 setting For details please see table 7 6 Table 7 6 Selection table of terminal main and auxiliary frequency operational rule Main and auxiliary Main and auxiliary Main and auxiliary Main and auxiliary operational operational rule operational rule operational rule ie EE selection terminal 3 selection terminal 2 selection terminal 1 OFF OFF OFF Decided by F01 06 OFF OFF ON Synthesized frequency is sub frequency OFF ON OFF Operation rule addition OFF ON ON Operation rule subtraction ON OFF OFF Operation rule multiplication ON OFF ON Synthesized frequency is Max value ON ON OFF Synthesized frequency is min value ON ON ON Synthesized frequency is nonzero value 16 17 Frequency ascending command UP descending command DOWN Realize frequency ascending or descending by control terminal substitute operation keypad for remote control Normal running FO1 00 or FO1 03 set as 3 is valid Ascending descending rate is set in F18 06 and F18 07 18 Frequency ascending descending frequency resetting When frequency setting is set as terminal UP DOWM this terminal can eliminate the set frequency value by terminal UP DOWN 19 21 Multi step closed loop setting terminal By ON OFF of multi step closed loop setting terminal Table 7 7 Multi step closed loop setting selection can be realized Table 7 7 Multi step closed loop setting

User manual EN500 EN600 V2.0-A2

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents